JP4866436B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes an image display means for displaying a predetermined image as the game progresses, a winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to a player based on a predetermined determination condition being satisfied, The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state for granting a profit to a player based on a determination result by the winning determination means.

  Conventionally, a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine provided with a symbol display device generally displays a special symbol (symbol) in a variable manner on the symbol display device, and the bonus game state when the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol Is supposed to occur. In addition, such a pachinko machine has been proposed that includes an effect member that moves in synchronization with the content of the symbol display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2003-52968 (FIG. 13)

  In such a gaming machine, generally, the mobilization rate of the effect member is changed based on the determination result as to whether or not the jackpot gaming state is set, and when the jackpot gaming state is determined, the jackpot gaming state is determined. By increasing the rate of movement of the effect member as compared with the case where there was not, the expectation degree of big hit that would be a big hit gaming state when the effect member was moved was increased. However, in general, whether or not to make a big hit gaming state is determined with a probability of about 1/500 (hit probability), so when the expectation degree of the big hit is high as described above, In this case, the production members are not frequently moved, the frequency of movement of the production members is remarkably reduced, and there is no change production. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, if the mobilization rate of the production member is improved regardless of the determination result of whether or not the big hit gaming state, the production member can be moved frequently, and the production member is frequently moved. Although it was possible to execute the effect of the change, the big hit gaming state does not occur even if the production member is frequently moved, so the player's interest is reduced, and the player's interest in the movement of the production member It was a cause to lose.

  That is, even if the player pays attention to the movement of the effect member, the player cannot improve the expectation for the big hit gaming state, and may lose interest in the movement of the effect member. Therefore, when a player plays a game for a long time, the interest in moving the effect member is lost, so that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game may be reduced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and the purpose of the present invention is to execute an effect that does not cause the player to lose interest using the effect member, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It is to provide a game machine that can be used.

In claim 1, image display means for displaying a predetermined image as the game progresses;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied;
In a gaming machine comprising: a profit granting state control unit that controls a profit granting state that grants a profit to the player based on a determination result by the winning determination unit;
Components constituting part of the gaming machine;
An effect device that is attached to the component member and forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the component member as viewed from the player,
A main control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
And peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the image display means,
The stage device is
The image display means for displaying the predetermined image from the production area toward the front side of the gaming machine;
An appearance position that faces the player by appearing in front of the image display means so as to perform a stunning operation, and a standby position that becomes invisible to the player by retreating from the appearance position; A plurality of types of production members that can reciprocate between the plurality of types of character forms,
A plurality of drive mechanisms that configure a plurality of operation mechanisms together with each of the plurality of types of effect members, and reciprocate the plurality of types of effect members;
The plurality of types of effect members and the plurality of drive sources are accommodated for each of the operation mechanisms, and a plurality of standby accommodating portions that hold the plurality of types of effect members in the standby position in the accommodated state,
The main control means includes
The winning determination means, the profit grant state control means,
Basic display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of basic display patterns for recognizing the determination result of the winning determination means;
Basic display pattern selection means for selecting the basic display pattern from the basic display pattern storage means based on the determination result by the winning determination means;
Command signal transmission means for transmitting the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means to the peripheral control means as a command signal,
The peripheral control means includes
Image storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect images imitating at least the plurality of types of character aspects as the predetermined image;
Display control means for notifying whether or not to control the display of the image display means based on the command signal transmitted by the command signal transmission means to control the profit grant state;
A basic effect mode as a display control execution content by the display control means until the image display means notifies whether or not to control the profit granting state according to the basic display pattern transmitted as the command signal A basic effect mode determining means for determining
Based on the basic effect mode determined by the basic effect mode determining means, an image effect mode for controlling display of a predetermined effect image among the plurality of types of effect images imitating the plurality of types of character modes, and the plurality An effect that determines any additional effect mode from a plurality of types of additional effect modes that have different degrees of combination with an accessory effect mode that drives a predetermined effect member among the plurality of types of effect members that forged different types of character modes An aspect determining means;
A combined effect execution means for executing a combined effect in which the additional effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is combined with the basic effect mode;
Among the plurality of types of additional effect modes, the additional effect mode including the accessory effect mode is replaced with the predetermined effect image displayed and controlled in the additional effect mode not including the accessory effect mode. It is combined so as to drive the effect member that has created the same type of character form as the effect image at the same timing as the display control timing,
In the same type of character mode among the plurality of types of character modes, the effect mode determination means increases the expectation that the drive control of the effect member is in the profit-giving state rather than the display control of the effect image. The additional effect mode is determined using the additional effect mode determination table allocated to the above.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an image effect mode for controlling display of a predetermined effect image among a plurality of types of effect images simulating a plurality of types of character modes, and a plurality of types of forgery of a plurality of types of character modes. Among the effect members, one of the additional effect modes is determined from a plurality of types of additional effect modes with different degrees of combination with the accessory effect mode that drives the predetermined effect member, and this additional effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode. In order to execute the combined effect, the effect member can be driven without drastically reducing the expected degree of jackpot.
In addition, an additional effect mode including an accessory effect mode among a plurality of types of additional effect modes is displayed instead of a predetermined effect image that is displayed and controlled in an additional effect mode that does not include an accessory effect mode. Rather than controlling the display of the effect image in the same type of character mode among the plurality of types of character modes, the effect member that forged the same type of character mode as the effect image is driven at the same timing as Providing a profit when the effect member is driven and controlled to determine the additional effect mode using the additional effect mode determination table distributed so as to increase the degree of expectation that the direction of driving the effect member is in the state of granting profit The expectation for the state can be increased.

The image display means for displaying a predetermined image as the game progresses according to claim 2,
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied;
In a gaming machine comprising: a profit granting state control unit that controls a profit granting state that grants a profit to the player based on a determination result by the winning determination unit;
It is possible to reciprocate between a standby position that is not visible to the player and an appearance position that faces the player by appearing from the standby position in front of the image display means. A plurality of types of effect members imitating a plurality of types of character aspects having a vertical relationship of
A plurality of drive mechanisms that configure a plurality of operation mechanisms together with each of the plurality of types of effect members, and reciprocate the plurality of types of effect members;
Basic display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of basic display patterns for recognizing the determination result of the winning determination means;
Basic display pattern selection means for selecting the basic display pattern from the basic display pattern storage means based on the determination result by the winning determination means;
Display control means for controlling the display of the image display means based on the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means and notifying the determination result of the winning determination means;
Image storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect images imitating a plurality of types of character aspects having at least the predetermined vertical relationship as the predetermined image;
Based on the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means, the accessory effect mode that drives a predetermined effect member among the multiple types of effect members that forged the multiple types of character modes, and the plurality Combined degree of image effect mode in which a predetermined effect image among the plurality of types of effect images imitating the type of character mode is displayed from the same direction as the effect member that forged the same type of character image as the effect image Effect mode determining means for determining any additional effect mode from a plurality of types of additional effect modes,
A combined effect execution means for executing a combined effect in which the additional effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is combined with the basic effect mode;
Among the plurality of types of additional effect modes, the additional effect mode including the accessory effect mode is the same as the effect image instead of the predetermined effect image that is displayed and controlled in the additional effect mode not including the accessory effect mode. It is compounded so as to drive the effect member that forged various kinds of character aspects,
In the same type of character mode among the plurality of types of character modes, the effect mode determination means increases the expectation that the drive control of the effect member is in the profit-giving state rather than the display control of the effect image. The additional effect mode is determined using the additional effect mode determination table allocated to the above.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the accessory effect mode for driving a predetermined effect member among a plurality of types of effect members forging a plurality of types of character aspects having a certain vertical relationship, and a certain vertical relationship. The composite degree of the image effect mode that causes the predetermined effect image to be expressed from the same direction as the effect member that forged the same type of character image as the effect image among the multiple types of effect image imitating the plurality of types of character modes In order to execute a composite effect in which any one of the additional effect modes is determined from a plurality of types of additional effect modes, and this additional effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode, the effect is not reduced significantly. The member can be driven.
Further, the additional effect mode including the accessory effect mode among the multiple types of additional effect modes is the same type as the effect image instead of the predetermined effect image displayed and controlled in the additional effect mode not including the accessory effect mode. It is compounded so as to drive the production member that forged the character form, and in the same kind of character form among the plurality of kinds of character forms, the drive control of the production member becomes more profitable than the display control of the production image. Since the additional effect mode is determined using the additional effect mode determination table distributed so as to increase the degree of expectation, when the effect member is driven and controlled, it is possible to increase the expectation for the profit provision state.

(Solution 1)
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image as the game progresses, winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on a predetermined determination condition being satisfied, and the winning determination means In a gaming machine provided with a profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state that grants a profit to a player based on the determination result by, a constituent member constituting a part of the gaming machine, and the constituent member An effect device which is attached and forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the components as viewed from the player, a main control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game machine, and the image display Peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the means, and the rendering device displays an image from at least the rendering area toward the front side. And a stand-by position that appears to be visible on the front side facing the player to perform a stunning action and a standby position that becomes invisible from the front side by retreating from this appearance position. A plurality of types of effect members imitating a predetermined mode, an operation mechanism together with the effect members, a drive source for reciprocating the effect members, and the drive source together with the effect members A standby storage section for storing and holding the effect member in the standby position in the storage state, wherein the main control means is the winning determination means, the profit grant state control means, and the profit grant state A basic display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of basic display patterns for recognizing whether or not the basic display pattern is acceptable; A basic display pattern selection means for selecting a command line, and a command signal transmission means for transmitting the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means to the peripheral control means as a command signal. An image storage means for storing a plurality of types of images, and a display control means for controlling display of the image stored in the image storage means on the basis of the command signal transmitted by the command signal transmission means. And a basic effect mode determining means for determining a basic effect mode according to the basic display pattern transmitted as the command signal, and a plurality of effect modes based on the basic effect mode determined by the basic effect mode determining means. Determined by the selective effect mode determining means and the selective effect mode determining means. A combined effect executing means for executing a combined effect obtained by combining the effect aspect with the basic effect aspect, and the display control means is an effect image corresponding to the combined effect executed by the combined effect executing means. A combined effect display control means for controlling the display by the image display means, wherein the combined effect executing means operates as an effect item with driving of the effect member according to the determined basic effect mode. It is characterized in that the composite effect combined with the basic effect mode is executed by varying the composite degree of the effect mode and the accessory non-acting effect mode without driving the effect member.

  In this case, the combined effect execution means, as the effect mode (notice type), in accordance with the determined basic effect mode, the accessory act effect mode with the drive of the effect member and the accessory non-with the drive of the effect member The composite effect that is combined with the basic effect mode with a different degree of combination with the operation effect mode is executed. In other words, since the effect mode is determined by combining the basic effect mode with the combination degree of the accessory operation effect mode and the accessory non-acting effect mode, the effect member can be selected without extremely reducing the expected value of jackpot Can be driven.

(Solution 2)
In the solving means 1, the accessory act effect mode includes a single accessory act effect mode that involves driving any one of the effect members and a plurality of effects among the effect members. And a composite accessory operation effect mode involving driving of the member.

  In this case, the effect member is used because the accessory action effect mode includes the composite character action effect mode with driving of one effect member and the single actor action effect mode with driving of a plurality of effect members. Since a plurality of types of performance modes can be executed and the game is prevented from becoming monotonous, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Solution 3)
In Solution 1 or Solution 2, a first effect period from the start of display control of the image by the image display device to a time when the first display mode is displayed after a predetermined time has passed through the effect mode; After the first effect period, the second effect period for recognizing the profitability state through the basic effect mode.

In this case, after the effect mode (in the present embodiment, the notice effect) is displayed in the first effect period, the first display mode (reach establishment display) is displayed, and in the second effect period, the basic effect is displayed. By displaying the mode (reach effect in the present embodiment), it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by noting these effects during the period until the profit grant state is recognized.
(Solution 4)
In the solving means 3, the combined effect executing means executes the accessory act effect aspect in any one of the first effect period and the second effect period.

  In this case, regardless of whether or not the dependent effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode, by executing a combined effect in which the independent effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode, an independent effect that is less important for the player. By increasing the display ratio of the mode and decreasing the display ratio of the dependent effect mode with high importance, the display of the dependent effect mode with respect to the independent effect mode is made to stand out.

(Solution 5)
In any one of the solving means 1 to the solving means 4, the accessory act presentation mode is incorporated into a single production mode combined with the basic production mode in a single production mode and the basic production mode. And a built-in production mode combined with the production mode.

  In this case, the accessory action effect mode is a single effect mode combined with the basic effect mode in a single effect mode, and an embedded effect mode combined with the basic effect mode by being incorporated into the specific single effect mode, The built-in effect mode may be incorporated into the single effect mode, the single effect mode will not be monotonous, and the interest in the single effect mode will not be lost to the end.

(Solution 6)
In any one of the solving means 1 to the solving means 4, the accessory operating effect mode is preferentially combined with the basic effect mode and whether or not the priority effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode. And a non-priority production mode combined with the basic production mode.

  In this case, the accessory operating effect mode is preferentially combined with the basic effect mode and the non-complexed with the basic effect mode based on whether the priority effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode. By including the priority effect mode, the display mode of the effect mode (priority effect mode) that the player wants to show to the player is displayed with priority, so that the interest in the priority effect mode can be maximized.

(Solution 7)
In the solving means 6, the non-priority effect mode is a single effect mode that is combined with the basic effect mode in a single effect mode when the priority effect mode is not combined with the basic effect mode.

  In this case, the non-priority production mode is a case where the priority production mode is not combined with the basic production mode, and the non-priority production mode is a single production mode combined with the basic production mode in a single production mode. Even if there is a single production mode, the opportunity to display the dependent production mode is increased as much as possible, the display period of the production mode is not bored, and a decrease in the interest of the player is suppressed. Can do.

(Solution 8)
In the solution 6 or the solution 7, the non-priority effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode by being incorporated into the priority effect mode when the priority effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode. It is an aspect.

  In this case, the non-priority effect mode is a built-in effect mode that is combined with the basic effect mode by being incorporated into the priority effect mode when the priority effect mode is combined with the basic effect mode. There is a possibility that a built-in production mode is incorporated, the single production mode is not monotonous, and the interest in the single production mode is not lost to the end.

(Solution 9)
In any one of the solving means 6 to the solving means 8, the priority effect mode has a plurality of effect modes more than the non-priority effect mode, and the combined effect execution means includes the plurality of effect modes as the priority effect mode. The multi-stage effect executing means for executing the multi-stage effect for controlling the display mode in a stepwise manner by the combined effect display control means.

  In this case, by executing a multi-stage effect in which a plurality of effect modes (the contents of each effect in each notice type) are displayed and controlled stepwise by the composite effect display control unit as the priority effect mode by the multi-stage effect executing unit. Since the priority production mode has a plurality of production modes more than the non-priority production mode, the multi-stage production can be a lively production, and the multi-stage production (priority production mode) becomes monotonous. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest with respect to the priority effect mode.

(Solution 10)
In the solving means 9, the multistage effect executing means executes a subsequent effect mode as a trigger of one effect mode as the multistage effect, and the composite effect execution means sets the one stage effect as the embedded effect mode. The first built-in production execution means for executing the first built-in production combined with the basic production mode by being incorporated in the production mode.

  In this case, by executing the first built-in production combined with the basic production mode by being incorporated into the one production mode as the built-in production mode by the first built-in production execution means, There is a possibility that a built-in production mode may be incorporated, one production mode will not be monotonous, the display period of the production mode will not be bored, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. it can.

(Solution 11)
In the solving means 10, the built-in effect mode is an effect mode in which the player recognizes the content by controlling the display of the comment text.

  In this case, the built-in effect mode is an effect mode in which the player recognizes the content by controlling the display of the comment text, so that the player is clearly notified by the display control of the character information as the comment text. Can be easily understood by the player.

(Solution 12)
In any one of the solving means 9 to the solving means 11, the multi-stage effect executing means executes a subsequent effect mode as a trigger of a single effect mode as the multi-stage effect. The embedded effect mode includes a second embedded effect executing means for executing a second embedded effect combined with the basic effect mode by being incorporated in any of the plurality of effect modes.

  In this case, by executing the second built-in production combined with the basic production mode by being incorporated into any of the plurality of production modes as the built-in production mode by the second built-in production execution means, a plurality of There is a possibility that a built-in production mode may be incorporated in any of the production modes, the plurality of production modes will not be monotonous, the display period of the plurality of production modes will not be bored, and the player's A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Solution means 13)
In the solving means 12, the built-in effect mode is an effect mode with high expectation that is incorporated into the priority effect mode when the contents of the priority effect mode and the embedded effect mode match.

  In this case, the built-in production mode is incorporated into the priority production mode when the contents of the priority production mode and the built-in production mode match, and is a production mode with high expectation. If the content of the production mode does not match, it is not incorporated into the priority production mode, and the second set is created by setting the production mode with high expectation while reducing the ratio of executing the second built-in production. It is possible to improve the player's bliss for the execution of the included production.

(Solution 14)
In the solving means 7, the combined effect execution means includes a vanishing effect executing means for executing an extinct effect that destroys all of the information controlled to be displayed on the image display means as the single effect mode.

  In this case, the extinction effect executing means can make the image display means aware of the player by executing an extinction effect that destroys all of the information controlled to be displayed on the image display means as a single effect mode. It is possible to improve the expectation that some kind of effect will be executed after the extinction effect is executed.

(Solution 15)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 14, the combined effect executing means is selected as a dependent effect mode that is combined with a specific basic effect mode and suggests the basic effect mode after the display of the dependent effect mode. It includes a selection appearance execution means for executing the production.

  In this case, the selection appearance execution means is combined with a specific basic effect aspect as the dependent effect aspect, and the basic effect aspect is displayed by executing the selection appearance suggesting the basic effect aspect after the display of the dependent effect aspect. It is possible to know a specific basic production mode before being played, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

(Solution 16)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 15, the composite effect executing means executes a back effect in the display area on the back of the image display means that does not hinder the viewing of the dependent effect mode as the independent effect mode. Back production execution means is included.

  In this case, the back effect execution means executes the back effect in the display area on the back of the image display means that does not hinder the viewing of the dependent effect mode as the independent effect mode, so that the independent effect that is less important for the player. The aspect is the back of the image display means, and is configured so as not to obstruct the viewing of the dependent effect aspect.

(Solution 17)
Any one of the solving means 1 to 16 further includes a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound, wherein the composite effect executing means outputs the sound as the independent effect mode regardless of the basic effect mode. A sound output effect executing means for executing a sound output effect for performing the sound output by the means.

  In this case, the sound output effect executing means executes the sound output effect in which sound output is performed by the sound output means regardless of the basic effect mode as the independent effect mode, so that it is less dependent on the player. The production mode is output by the sound output means, and is configured so as not to obstruct the viewing of the dependent production mode.

(Solution 18)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 17, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of determination tables in which a predetermined range of determination values are set, and the selective effect mode determination unit determines the basic effect mode determination. The effect mode is determined using a determination table corresponding to the determination result by the means.

  In this case, the selective effect mode determining means can set the effect mode according to the basic effect mode by determining the effect mode using the determination table corresponding to the determination result by the basic effect mode determining means.

(Solution 19)
In the solving means 18, the plurality of types of determination tables are assigned more determination values to the determination table for determining the non-dependent effect aspect than the dependent effect aspect, and the selective effect aspect determining means is configured to determine the dependence effect mode. The independent effect mode is determined at a higher rate than the effect mode.

  In this case, the selective effect mode determination means increases the appearance ratio of the independent effect mode and decreases the appearance rate of the dependent effect mode by determining the independent effect mode at a higher rate than the dependent effect mode. Thus, the appearance of the dependent effect mode with respect to the non-dependent effect mode can be emphasized.

(Solution 20)
In the solving means 9, the multistage effect executing means determines whether to execute the multistage effect by the multistage effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the multistage effect. Multi-stage effect determining means for determining which of the effect modes to be displayed when the multi-stage effect determination means executes the multi-stage effect by the multi-stage effect determination executing means. When the multi-stage effect is executed, the multi-stage effect execution means executes the multi-stage effect that displays the effect mode determined by the multi-stage effect determination means by the composite effect display control means.

  In this case, when it is determined by the multi-stage effect determination execution means that the multi-stage effect (in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect) is executed, the effect mode determined by the multi-stage effect determination means is controlled by the composite effect display control. By executing the multi-stage effect displayed by the means by the multi-stage effect executing means, when the execution determination is made, it is always executed unlike the other effects (non-priority effect mode). That is, it can be said that the multistage effect is an effect with a high priority (priority effect mode).

(Solution 21)
In the solving means 20, the peripheral control means further includes effect member drive means capable of driving and controlling the reciprocation of the effect member by the drive source, and the multi-stage effect executing means is configured to perform the effects in a predetermined order. The multi-stage effect that makes the player visible to the player is executed by the combined effect display control means and / or the effect member driving means, and the multi-stage effect determining means is executed by the multi-stage effect execution determining means. When it is determined that the multistage effect is to be executed, it is determined which of the effect modes is visible to the player and the effect image imitating the effect mode and / or the effect mode is imitated. The effect member made is determined.

  In this case, when it is determined that the multi-stage effect is executed by the multi-stage effect execution determination means, it is determined which of the effect modes is displayed so as to be visible to the player, and an effect image imitating the effect mode And / or the effect member that imitates the effect mode is determined, and the effect member that imitates the effect mode is also displayed in addition to the effect image that imitates the effect mode, so that the effect member is also noted in a multi-stage effect. Can do.

(Solution means 22)
In the solving means 21, the multi-stage effect executing means includes effect condition establishment determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and the multi-stage effect determining means is determining the effect condition establishment. Multi-stage effect selection determining means for selecting any one of the effect image and the effect member at different ratios according to the determination result by the means, wherein the multi-stage effect selection determining means is the multi-stage effect execution determining means. When the determination to execute the multistage effect is made, the player visually recognizes either the effect image or the effect member in each of the effect modes determined by the multistage effect determining means. The production mode to be expressed is determined.

  In this case, by selecting either one of the effect image and the effect member for each effect mode determined by the multi-stage effect determining means when the determination to execute the multi-stage effect is made by the multi-stage effect execution determining means. An effect aspect that is visible to the player is determined, and one of the effect image and the effect member corresponding to the one effect aspect is displayed, so that both the effect image and the effect member are expressed. It is possible to focus attention on the effect image or effect member that is expressed.

(Solution 23)
In the solving means 22, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of multistage effect determination tables in which a predetermined range of determination values are set, and the multistage effect execution determination means and the multistage effect determination means are Determining whether to execute the multi-stage effect using the multi-stage effect determination table according to the basic display pattern and the determination result by the effect condition establishment determination means in the multi-stage effect determination table of the type, And while determining which of the said production | presentation aspects is visible so that a player can visually recognize, the production image which imitated the said production | generation aspect and / or the production member which imitated the said production | generation aspect is determined.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not the multi-stage effect is to be executed by using the multi-stage effect determination table according to the basic display pattern and the determination result of the effect condition establishment determination means, and any of the effect modes is determined by the player. In order to determine whether or not to be visually recognizable, and to determine an effect image imitating the effect aspect and / or an effect member imitating the effect aspect, each determination result (including the determination result of the winning determination means) is included. ) To determine whether or not to execute a multi-stage effect, and to determine which of the effect modes is visible to the player, and to produce an effect image and / or A production member imitating the production mode can be determined.

(Solution 24)
In the solution means 22 or the solution means 23, the multi-stage effect selection determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the effect condition establishment determination means determines that the effect condition is satisfied. More often than not, the frequency of selecting the effect member was increased.

  In this case, when the production condition is satisfied, the frequency at which the production member is expressed is higher than when the production condition is not established, and thus it is possible to increase the frequency at which the production member is expressed in a multi-stage production. It becomes.

(Solution 25)
In any one of the solving means 22 to 24, the multi-stage effect selection determining means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the effect condition establishment determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied. The effect image is determined at a lower rate than when determined, and is determined as the effect member at a higher rate.

  In this case, when the production condition is satisfied, the production image is determined at a lower rate than when the production condition is not established, and the production member is determined at a higher rate. The frequency of being issued can be increased.

(Solution 26)
In any one of the solving means 22 to 24, the multi-stage effect execution determining means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the effect condition establishment determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied. It is determined that the multistage effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is determined.

  In this case, when the production condition is satisfied, the rate at which the multi-stage production execution determination unit determines to execute the multi-stage production is higher than when the production condition is not established. Can be increased, and the frequency at which the effect member is expressed in a multistage effect can be increased.

(Solution means 27)
In any one of the solution means 22 to the solution means 26, the multi-stage effect selection determination means determines whether to give a profit to the player when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means. The effect member is determined at a higher rate than when no change was made.

  In this case, when a decision is made to give a profit to the player, the production member is determined at a higher rate than when the decision to give a profit is not made. The expectation with respect to the player's profit granting state can be increased.

(Solution 28)
In any one of the solving means 21 to the solving means 27, the multi-stage effect determining means determines whether to give a profit to the player when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. More presentation modes than when not made are determined as presentation modes that are visible to the player.

  In this case, when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, the player can visually recognize more production modes than when the determination to give the profit to the player is not made. Since it determines as the production | presentation aspect to show, when more production | presentation aspects are expressed, the player's expectation with respect to a profit provision state can be raised.

(Solution 29)
In any one of the solution means 21 to the solution means 28, the effect mode is a mode in which a predetermined order can be recognized by visual recognition.

  In this case, the player can recognize the order determined in advance by visual recognition because the player can recognize the order determined in advance by visual recognition.

(Solution 30)
In the solving means 29, the multi-stage effect determining means determines the effect modes from the lowest-ranked effect mode to the predetermined-rank effect mode as the effect modes that are visible to the player.

  In this case, in order to display the production mode from the lowest production mode to the predetermined ranking as the production mode that is visible to the player, and to display it to the player in order from the lowest production mode. It is possible to easily recognize the number of effect modes displayed in a multi-stage effect so as to be visible according to the order of the displayed effect modes.

(Solution means 31)
In the solving means 30, the multi-stage effect determining means is an effect corresponding to the effect mode having the lower rank as the effect mode of the predetermined order when the winning determination unit determines that the player should be given a profit. The effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the next lowest order of the effect mode is determined to be approximately the same as the ratio determined for the member.

  In this case, when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player, the effect is approximately the same as the ratio determined as the effect member corresponding to the effect mode having a lower rank as the effect mode of the predetermined order. In order to determine the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the lowest order after the mode, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the profit granting state when the effect member is displayed even in the mode with the low order. it can.

(Solution means 32)
In any one of the solving means 29 to 31, the multistage effect executing means controls the composite effect display control means and / or the effect member driving means, and an effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the lower order and After displaying the effect member and / or the effect image corresponding to the multi-stage effect mode and / or the effect member, the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the next lowest order in the effect mode and / or Or a production member is expressed.

  In this case, after the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the effect mode having a lower rank is displayed, the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the effect mode is displayed next to the effect mode. Since the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the effect order having the lower rank is displayed, the number of the aspects expressed in the multi-stage effect can be specified.

(Solution means 33)
In any one of the solving means 29 to 31, the multistage effect executing means controls the composite effect display control means and / or the effect member driving means, and an effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the lower order and After expressing the effect member, the effect image and / or effect member to be displayed is switched to the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the effect order having the next lowest order in the effect mode.

  In this case, after the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the effect mode having the lower rank is displayed, the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the effect mode having the next lower rank is displayed after the effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the production mode that will be expressed later.

(Solution 34)
In any one of the solving means 29 to 31, the multi-stage effect executing means controls the combined effect display control means and / or the effect member driving means to produce an effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the lowest order. And / or after displaying the effect member, in a state where one of the effect image and the effect member corresponding to the effect mode is displayed, the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the next lowest order of the effect mode and / or Or a production member is expressed.

  In this case, after expressing the effect image and / or effect member according to the effect mode having a lower rank, the effect mode in a state where one of the effect image and / or effect member according to the effect mode is expressed. In order to display effect images and / or effect members according to the effect order of the next lowest order, the number of effect modes that are expressed in the multistage effect can be specified, and the number of effect modes that are expressed Since it can reduce, it can be made to pay attention to the production mode expressed afterwards.

(Solution 35)
In the resolution means 21 to the resolution means 34, the peripheral control means uses the image display means to display specially one of the first special image and the second special image different from the first special image. Image display control means is further provided, and the effect condition establishment determination means determines that the predetermined effect condition is established based on the display control of the second special image by the special image display control means. .

  In this case, since it is determined that a predetermined effect condition is established based on the display control of the second special image, the expression frequency of the effect member is determined according to the type of image controlled by the special image display control unit. The player can recognize that the state is controlled to increase.

(Solution 36)
In any one of the solving means 21 to 35, the effect member driving means drives and controls the effect member so as to cover a part of the image display means in front of the image display means as the appearance position.

  In this case, since the effect member is driven and driven to an appearance position that covers a part of the image display means in front of the image display means, the drive state of the effect member can be easily recognized and the display state of the image display means As a result, it is possible to focus more on the driving state of the effect member, and to improve the player's expectation on the profit provision state.

(Solution means 37)
In any one of the solving means 21 to 36, the effect member corresponding to one of the effect modes is more than the size of the effect image displayed on the image display means by the combined effect display control means corresponding to the one. Simulated with large dimensions.

  In this case, since the effect member is imitated with a size larger than the size of the effect image displayed on the image display means, the drive state of the effect member can be easily recognized, and the effect member is driven more than the display state of the effect image. It is possible to attract attention, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation regarding the state of profit provision.

(Solution means 38)
In the solving means 9 or 10, the first built-in production execution means includes sound information control means for simultaneously controlling sound information corresponding to the basic display pattern in a plurality of modes at the same time.

  In this case, by simultaneously controlling the sound information in a plurality of modes, the sound information can be sensed, and the player can clearly recognize the sound information. Therefore, the sound information according to the basic display pattern is information based on the determination result by the winning determination means, so that the player is interested in the sound information and simultaneously controls the sound information in a plurality of modes. Therefore, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 39)
The solving means 38 further includes sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound, and the sound information control means includes sound information output control means for controlling the output of the sound information to the sound output means.

  In this case, the sound information control means includes sound information output control means for controlling the sound information to be output to the sound output means, so that the player can be bored by at least controlling the sound information to be output to the sound output means. Absent.

(Solution means 40)
In the solving means 38 or 39, the sound information control means includes sound information display control means for controlling display of the sound information on the image display means.

  In this case, the sound information control means includes the sound information display control means for controlling the sound information to be displayed on the image display means, so that the player can be bored by controlling the sound information to be displayed on at least the image display means. Absent. Furthermore, even if the hall (store) where the gaming machine is provided is noisy and the sound information output-controlled by the sound output means is difficult for the player to hear, the sound information can be obtained by viewing the image display means. The sound information can be recognized and can play an auxiliary role for the sound information whose output is controlled by the sound output means.

(Solution 41)
In the solving means 40, the combined effect display control means further includes an effect area display control means for controlling display of an effect area in which the sound information can be displayed by the sound information display control means on the image display means.

  In this case, when the sound information is output-controlled by the sound output means by further providing the effect area display control means for controlling the display of the effect area that can display the sound information by the sound information display control means on the image display means, What is necessary is just to visually recognize the determined production area of the image display means, and the player can easily recognize the place where the sound information is displayed.

(Solution means 42)
In the solving means 41, the effect area is a balloon display portion from the effect mode.

  In this case, when the sound information is output-controlled by the sound output means because the effect area is the balloon display unit from the effect mode, it is only necessary to visually recognize the balloon display unit from the effect mode, and the player receives the sound information. The displayed part can be recognized naturally. In addition, the sound information is controlled to be output to the sound output means, and the display control is performed on the balloon display unit from the production mode, so that the production mode can be seen as if talking to the player, and the sound information is further displayed. It can be recognized naturally.

(Solution means 43)
In the solution means 41 or the solution means 42, the sound information display control means controls display of a comment sentence within 10 characters per line as the sound information in the effect area.

  In this case, in the effect area, the sound information display control means controls display of a comment sentence of about 10 characters per line as sound information, so that too much sound information is not included in the comment sentence, and the player looks at a glance. By setting the amount of information to such an extent that the content of the comment text can be recognized, the player can easily recognize the content of the comment text.

(Solution means 44)
In the solving means 43, the effect area is white, while the comment text is light.

  In this case, by making the effect area white, while making the comment text light, the comment text can stand out with respect to the effect area, and the player can clearly recognize the comment text.

(Solution 45)
Any one of the solving means 38 to 44 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation detection means that detects an operation of the operation means, wherein the sound information control means operates the operation means. The sound information for prompting the user is controlled, and when the operation detecting means detects the operation of the operating means for a predetermined number of times, the sound information is updated and controlled according to the basic display pattern.

  In this case, the sound information that prompts the operation of the operation means is controlled, and when the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means for a predetermined number of times, the sound information is updated according to the basic display pattern and controlled. The sound information corresponding to the display pattern is controlled based on the detection of the operation of the means a predetermined number of times, so that the operation means is operated a predetermined number of times to obtain the sound information, and the player is bored. There is no. Therefore, by preventing the player from being bored by prompting the operation of the operation means, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous and suppresses a decrease in the interest of the game. be able to.

(Solution means 46)
In the solving means 45, the sound information control means includes sound information display control means for controlling display of the sound information on the image display means, and the combined effect display control means is configured to output the sound information by the sound information display control means. The image display means further includes an effect area display control means for controlling the display of the effect area on the image display means, and the sound information display control means detects the operation means by the operation detection means a predetermined number of times. The sound information corresponding to the basic display pattern is updated, and the color scheme of the effect area is also updated.

  In this case, the sound information corresponding to the basic display pattern is updated by updating the sound information corresponding to the basic display pattern and the color scheme of the effect area when the operation detecting means detects the operation of the operating means a predetermined number of times. The update to can be clearly displayed, and the player can easily recognize that the sound information is updated according to the basic display pattern.

(Solution 47)
In the solution means 45 or the solution means 46, the sound information control means detects the first operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and if the detection is not the predetermined detection, the sound information control means Control sound information that further encourages operation.

  In this case, when the first detection of the operation means is detected by the operation detection means, if the detection is not a predetermined detection, the operation means 1 is controlled by controlling sound information further prompting the operation of the operation means. When operated once, it can be clearly recognized that the operation means is further urged.

(Solution 48)
In any one of the solution means 45 to the solution means 47, the first built-in production execution means includes sound information execution determination means for determining whether or not the sound information control means executes control of the sound information; Sound information determining means for determining which of the sound information is to be executed when it is determined by the sound information control means to perform control of the sound information, the sound information determining means, When the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means a predetermined number of times, it is determined which of the sound information is to be executed.

  In this case, when the operation detecting means detects the operation of the operating means for a predetermined number of times, it is determined at the operation timing when the player operates the operating means for the predetermined number of times by determining which sound information is executed. Therefore, for the player who wants to obtain useful sound information, the operation means is operated while being excited. Therefore, by relating the player to the determination of the sound information, even if the player plays for a long time, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 49)
In the solving means 48, the peripheral control means further comprises a plurality of types of first built-in effects determination tables in which a predetermined range of determination values are set, and the sound information determination means includes the plurality of types of first built-in effects. Which of the sound information is to be executed is determined using a built-in effect determination table corresponding to the basic display pattern and the predetermined number of times of detection in the determination table.

  In this case, each determination result (the determination result of the winning determination means) is used to determine which sound information is to be executed using the first built-in production determination table according to the basic display pattern and the predetermined number of times of detection. It is possible to determine which of the sound information is to be executed according to.

(Solution 50)
In the solution means 48 or the solution means 49, the sound information determination means can be determined as the sound information for recognizing that the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means.

  In this case, it can be determined that the sound information for recognizing that the determination that the profit should be given to the player has been made by the winning judgment means, so that the profit grant state is established when the sound information is controlled. Can improve the bliss of the player.

(Solution 51)
In any one of the solution means 48 to the solution means 50, the sound information determination means can determine the sound information that allows the winning determination means to recognize an expectation level at which the player should make a profit.

  In this case, the expectation level is usually suggested by the reach effect by being able to determine the sound information for recognizing the expected level at which the determination that the profit should be given to the player is made by the winning determination means. When the sound information is controlled, the degree of expectation can be known, and the player's sense of expectation regarding the profit granting state can be enhanced.

(Solution means 52)
In any one of the solution means 48 to the solution means 51, the sound information determination means can determine the sound information that causes the composite effect execution means to recognize that a specific basic effect mode is executed.

  In this case, when the sound information is controlled by being able to determine that the specific basic effect mode is executed by the composite effect execution means, the specific basic effect mode executed after the display is performed. And knowing the degree of expectation suggested by the specific basic performance mode can increase the player's sense of expectation regarding the profit provision state.

(Solution means 53)
In the solving means 52, the sound information determining means has an effect mode different from the specific basic effect mode by the composite effect executing means only when the winning determination unit makes a determination that a profit should be given to the player. The sound information for recognizing that it is executed can be determined.

  In this case, it is possible to determine the sound information for recognizing that the effect different from the specific basic effect mode is executed by the composite effect executing means only when the winning determination means determines to give the player a profit. By being, it can be convinced that it will be in a profit granting state when the sound information is controlled, and the bliss of the player can be improved.

(Solution 54)
In the solving means 12 or the solving means 13, the multistage effect executing means performs the multistage effect by the multistage effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the multistage effect, and the multistage execution determining means. Multi-stage effect determining means for determining which of the effect modes to be displayed when it is determined to execute, wherein the second embedded effect executing means executes the second embedded effect. When the determination to execute the second built-in effect is made by the second built-in effect execution determining means for determining whether or not the second built-in effect execution determining means, any of the effect modes is displayed. Predetermined matching conditions for the second built-in effect determining means for determining the effects, the effect mode determined by the multistage effect determining means, and the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determining means Whether or not Matching condition determining means for determining, wherein the composite effect executing means is when the multi-stage effect is determined to be executed by the multi-stage effect determination executing means, and the second built-in effect determining means When the determination to execute the second built-in effect is made, and when the predetermined match condition is satisfied by the match condition determination means, the effect mode determined by the multistage effect determination means is The multi-stage effect displayed by the combined effect display control means is executed by the multi-stage effect execution means, and the second built-in effect determination is performed on a part or all of the effect modes displayed in the multi-stage effect. The second built-in effect executing means for displaying the effect mode determined by the means is displayed by the combined effect display control means.

  In this case, it is determined that the multi-stage effect (in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect) is executed by the multi-stage effect determination execution means, and the second built-in effect (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). Even if it is determined that execution of the intense heat notice is made, the second built-in effect will not be executed if the predetermined matching condition is not satisfied by the matching condition determining means. That is, it can be said that the second built-in effect is an effect (non-priority effect mode) having a lower priority than the multistage effect (priority effect mode). In addition, the ratio at which the second built-in effect is executed is less than the multi-stage effect, and the player's bliss for the execution of the second built-in effect can be improved.

(Solution means 55)
In the solving means 54, the match condition determining means is determined by the effect mode displayed by the combined effect display control means among the effect modes determined by the multistage effect determining means and the second built-in effect determining means. It is determined whether or not the predetermined matching condition is satisfied with the rendered effect mode.

  In this case, the match previously determined by the effect mode displayed by the composite effect display control unit and the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determining unit among the effect modes determined by the multistage effect determining unit. By determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, even if the second embedded effect execution determining unit determines to execute the second embedded effect, the match condition predetermined by the match condition determining unit is satisfied. Otherwise, the second built-in effect is not executed, and the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determining unit is not regularly (periodically) displayed. Therefore, the display of the effect determined by the second built-in effect determination means is accidentally displayed, so that the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed as much as possible.

(Solution 56)
In the solving means 54 or the solving means 55, the second built-in effect execution determination means is configured to reduce the second built-in effect at a rate lower than the rate at which the multi-stage effect execution determination unit determines to execute the multi-stage effect. A determination is made to execute the effect.

  In this case, the determination to execute the second built-in effect at a rate lower than the rate at which the determination to execute the multi-stage effect is made by the multi-stage effect determination means, than the determination rate to execute the multi-stage effect. Since the determination ratio for executing the second built-in effect can be lowered, and the second built-in effect is not executed unless a predetermined matching condition is satisfied, it is executed more rarely than the multi-stage effect. A second built-in effect can be realized.

(Solution 57)
In any one of the solution means 54 to the solution means 56, the second built-in production execution determination means determines whether the player should give a profit to the player by the winning determination means. The determination to execute the second built-in effect is made at a higher rate than when the determination that the profit should not be given is made.

  In this case, when it is determined that the profit should be given to the player by the winning determination means, the second built-in effect is higher than when the determination that the profit determining means should not be given to the player is made. When the predetermined matching condition is established and the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determining means is displayed, the player is expected to be controlled in the profit-giving state. A feeling can be improved.

(Solution 58)
In any one of the solving means 54 to the solving means 57, the second built-in effect determining means is the high-ranking effect mode only when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player. It is possible to determine an effect mode in which the predetermined matching condition can be established.

  In this case, it is possible to determine a higher-ranking performance mode and a performance mode that can satisfy a predetermined matching condition only when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means. It is rare that a high-performance production mode is displayed, and even if it is determined as a production mode in which a high-ranking production mode and a predetermined matching condition are established, it is difficult to establish a predetermined matching condition. When the high-ranking performance mode is displayed, the player can be convinced that the player is controlled in the profit-giving state, and can improve the bliss level of the rarely displayed high-ranking performance mode. .

(Solution 59)
In any one of the solution means 54 to the solution means 58, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of second built-in effect determination tables in which determination values in a predetermined range are set, and the second built-in effect execution determination means. And the second built-in production determining means executes the second built-in production using the second built-in production determination table corresponding to the basic display pattern among the plurality of types of second built-in production determination tables. It is determined whether or not to display any of the effect modes.

  In this case, it is determined whether to execute the second built-in effect using the second built-in effect determination table corresponding to the basic display pattern, and to determine which of the effect modes is displayed. While determining whether to execute the second built-in effect according to the determination result of the means, it is possible to determine which of the effect modes is displayed.

(Solution 60)
In the solving means 59, the peripheral control means includes a random number update means for updating a random number within a predetermined numerical range within an information amount of 1 byte, and an updated random number storage means for storing a random number updated by the random number update means. The second embedded effect execution determination means executes the second embedded effect depending on whether or not the random number stored in the updated random number storage means matches the determination value in the predetermined range. It is determined whether or not.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the second built-in effect depending on whether or not the random number stored by the updated random number storage means matches the predetermined range of determination values. Even if it is determined to be executed, if the predetermined matching condition is not satisfied, the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determining unit is not subjected to display control. For this reason, even if the random number is updated within a predetermined numerical range within the 1-byte information amount, it is determined by the second built-in effect determining means at a ratio (1/256) or less that is possible with the 1-byte information amount. The effect mode can be display-controlled, and the ratio of display control of the effect mode can be sufficiently reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of information necessary for updating the random number by the random number updating means while realizing a rarely displayed effect mode.

(Solution means 61)
In any one of the solving means 54 to the solving means 60, the peripheral control means further includes an effect member driving means capable of driving and controlling the reciprocating motion of the effect operating body by the drive source, and the multistage effect executing means includes: The multi-stage effect for displaying the effect modes in a predetermined order so as to be visible to the player is executed by the combined effect display control means and / or the effect member driving means, and the predetermined matching condition is: A part or all of the effect modes displayed by the composite effect display control unit among the effect modes determined by the multistage effect determining unit, and the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determining unit; It is that the unique information matches.

  In this case, a part or all of the effect modes displayed by the composite effect display control unit among the effect modes determined by the multistage effect determining unit and the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determining unit When the unique information matches, the production mode determined by the second built-in production determination unit is displayed on a part or all of the production mode determined by the multistage production determination unit, and the second built-in production decision It can be made to pay more attention to the production mode determined by the multi-stage production determination unit that may display the production mode determined by the means. In addition, even if it is not a flashy effect such as an effect member, the effect mode determined by the second built-in effect determination unit every time the effect mode determined by the multistage effect determination unit is displayed by the composite effect display control unit May be displayed, and attention can be paid to the effect mode.

(Solution means 62)
In the solving means 14, the multi-stage effect executing means determines whether to execute the multi-stage effect by the multi-stage effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the multi-stage effect. Multi-stage effect determination means for determining which of the effect modes to be displayed when made, and the extinction effect execution means determines whether or not to execute the extinction effect. Means for determining whether to display the effect mode when the determination to execute the destruction effect is made by the determination effect execution determination means, and the multi-stage effect determination execution. When the determination to execute the multistage effect is not made by the means, and the determination to execute the destructive effect is made by the destructive effect determination means, the determination of the destruction effect is made The destruction effect displayed by the composite effect display control means effect mode determined by the step performed by the destruction demonstration execution unit.

  In this case, when it is not determined to execute the multi-stage effect (in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect) by the multi-stage effect determination execution means, the destruction effect (in this embodiment, When it is determined that the lightning lightning effect) is executed, the display effect determined by the display effect determining unit is displayed by the combined effect display control unit. When the execution determination is made, the destruction effect is not executed. That is, it can be said that the destruction effect is an effect (non-priority effect mode) having a lower priority than the multistage effect (priority effect mode). Further, even if the multi-stage effects are not executed, there is a possibility that the destruction effects may be executed, and the opportunities for executing these effects (dependent effect modes) are increased.

(Solution means 63)
In the solving means 62, the display effect display means displays the display mode after displaying the display mode so that the entire area displayed on the image display unit is difficult to view or cannot be viewed. It is executed by the combined effect display control means, and the extinction effect determination means displays any of the effect modes after displaying the extinction mode when it is determined that the extinction effect execution determination means performs the extinction effect. Decide whether to display.

  In this case, until the extinction mode is displayed by displaying the extinction mode after displaying the extinction mode so that the entire area displayed on the image display unit by the extinction production execution unit is difficult to view or cannot be viewed. The player can no longer pay attention to information related to whether or not the privilege can be granted (determination information by the hit determination means and the notice effect), and can effectively make the player want to be aware of the effect (direction mode). it can. Therefore, by making the presentation other than information related to whether or not the privilege can be granted effective, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution means 64)
In the solving means 62 or 63, the extinction effect executing means includes effect condition establishment determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and the peripheral control means determines a predetermined range. A plurality of types of extinction effect determination tables set with values, wherein the extinction effect execution determination means and the extinction effect determination means include the basic display pattern and the effect condition establishment among the plurality of types of extinction effect determination tables; The determination result of the determining means and a display effect determination table corresponding to the determination result are used to determine whether or not to execute the display effect, and to determine which of the display modes is displayed.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the extinction effect using the basic display pattern and the determination result of the effect condition establishment determination means, and which of the effect modes is displayed. In order to determine, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the destruction effect according to each determination result (including the determination result of the winning determination means) and to determine which of the effect modes is displayed.

(Solution means 65)
In the solution means 63 or the solution means 64, the destruction effect execution means may not display the effect mode after displaying the destruction mode as the destruction effect.

  In this case, even when the display mode is not displayed, even if the display mode is displayed, even if the display mode is displayed, the display mode is displayed after the display mode is displayed. Not limited to this, it is possible to focus attention on the effect displayed on the image display means even after the destruction mode is displayed. Therefore, by making attention to the effect displayed on the image display means even after the disappearance mode is displayed, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution means 66)
In any one of the solving means 63 to 65, the extinction effect executing means includes a low extinction effect executing means for displaying a low extinction aspect having a low extinction degree, and a high extinction aspect having a higher extinction degree than the low extinction aspect. High-decay effect execution means to display, after displaying the low-disappearance mode by the low-disappearance effect execution means, and after not displaying the low-disappearance mode, the high-disappearance effect execution means indicate.

  In this case, after displaying the low-disappearance mode by the low-disappearance effect execution means, the high-disappearance effect execution means displays the high-disappearance mode after the low-disappearance mode is hidden, so that the player can determine whether the privilege can be granted It becomes impossible to pay attention to related information step by step, and it is possible to effectively make other effects (effect modes) other than the information related to whether or not to grant a privilege displayed on the image display means. Therefore, by making the presentation other than information related to whether or not the privilege can be granted effective, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 67)
In any one of the solving means 63 to 66, the disappearance effect executing means includes an image display control means at the time of disappearance that displays an image based on the basic display pattern in the effect mode that can be visually recognized in the disappearance mode.

  In this case, as the display mode after the display of the extinction mode, the display mode suddenly displays the display mode based on the basic display pattern in the display mode by the image display control unit at the time of the extinction. It is possible to make it appear as if an image based on the image has appeared, and by deriving an effect mode different from normal by the image display unit, the effect mode determined by the extinction effect determination unit can be noted.

(Solution 68)
In the solving means 67, the rendering device has a light emitting area in which a light emitting operation is performed by light emitted from a predetermined light source so as to perform a dramatic action, and the concealed rendering executing means emits the light in the light emitting area. The light emission operation means performs the light emission operation in the light emission area when the production mode is displayed in the hide mode by the hide-time image display control unit.

  In this case, not only the image based on the basic display pattern is suddenly displayed in the extinction mode by performing the light emission operation in the light emission area when the display mode is displayed by the image display control means during the extinction. The light emitting operation is also performed in the light emitting area, and it is possible to effectively pay attention to the effect mode displayed on the image display means.

(Solution 69)
In any one of the solving means 63 to 68, the peripheral control means displays either one of the first special image and a second special image different from the first special image on the image display means. The display device further includes a special image display control means for controlling, and the extinction effect executing means sets the special image different from the special image displayed before displaying the extinction mode as the display mode after displaying the extinction mode. Special image switching display control means for switching and displaying is included.

  In this case, as an effect mode after displaying the extinction mode, by switching to a special image different from the special image displayed before displaying the extinction mode, the special image is displayed in the effect executed this time. However, it is possible to improve the expectation that some kind of effect will be executed in the effect executed after the next time.

(Solution 70)
In the solving means 69, the vanishing effect determining means is configured such that when the second special image is displayed by the special image display control means, the vanishing effect is displayed at a higher rate than when the first special image is displayed. The effect mode is determined by the hour image display control means.

  In this case, when the second special image is displayed by the special image display control means, the effect mode by the image display control means at the time of disappearance is determined at a higher rate than when the first special image is displayed. When the second special image is displayed, the ratio of displaying the effect mode by the image display control means at the time of disappearance is high, and therefore the effect mode by the image display control means at the time of the disappearance is displayed in the effect executed after the next time. The expectation that it will be done can be improved.

(Solution 71)
In any one of the solving means 62 to 70, the combined effect executing means includes a basic effect executing means for executing a basic effect for displaying the basic effect mode by the combined effect display control means, and the basic effect executing means. The basic display pattern includes an effect after execution of the basic effect, and an expanded effect executing means for executing an extended effect that displays the same basic effect mode as the basic effect by the combined effect display control means. The storage means includes the plurality of types of basic display patterns for executing the basic effects and / or the development effects by the basic effects execution means and / or the development effects execution means, and the basic display pattern selection means includes the basic display patterns By selecting the basic display pattern from the display pattern storage means, the basic effect and / or the Exhibition and determines whether or not to execute an effect, to determine whether to display one of the basic representation embodiment.

  In this case, before the determination result by the winning determination means is displayed, an effect according to the basic display pattern is executed by the composite effect display control means, and when the development effect is executed, the determination result of the winning determination means is displayed. The production will be executed for a long period of time until the game is done, and the player can improve the expectation of being controlled in the profit-giving state.

(Solution means 72)
In the solving means 71, the destruction effect execution means displays an effect mode display at the time of destruction that displays one of the basic effect modes at a part of the destruction mode at a predetermined timing as an effect mode after displaying the destruction mode. Control means, wherein the combined effect execution means executes the basic effect by the basic effect execution means without executing the basic effect when the destruction effect effect display control means is executed as the destruction effect execution means. The development effect for displaying the basic effect mode displayed by the effect mode display control means is executed.

  In this case, by executing the development effect that displays the basic effect mode displayed by the display mode display control means at the time of destruction, the type of execution of the development effect is determined by the basic effect mode displayed in a part of the display area of the destruction mode. Since it is different, it is possible to focus attention on the production mode even after the display of the destruction mode. In addition, when the vanished basic effect mode display control unit is executed as the vanished effect executing unit, the basic effect mode displayed by the vanished time effect mode display control unit is executed without executing the basic effect by the basic effect executing unit. By executing the development effect to be displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that is controlled in the profit-giving state from the stage where the basic effect mode is displayed.

(Solution means 73)
In the solving means 71 or the solving means 72, the composite effect executing means is configured such that when the determination to give a player a profit is made by the winning determination means, a determination to give a profit to the player is not made. A basic effect and / or development effect corresponding to the basic display pattern is executed at a higher rate.

  In this case, when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, the basic effect corresponding to the basic display pattern at a higher rate than when the determination to give the profit to the player is not made. By executing the development effect, and / or when the basic effect and / or the development effect is executed, it is possible to improve the expectation that the player is controlled in the profit-giving state.

(Solution 74)
In any one of the solving means 71 to the solving means 73, the development effect executing means performs only the basic effect by the basic effect executing means when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player. The development effect is executed at a higher rate than the execution.

  In this case, when the decision to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, the development effect is executed by executing the development effect at a higher rate than executing only the basic effect by the basic effect execution means. When this is done, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation that is controlled by the player in the profit-giving state.

(Solution means 75)
In any one of the solving means 71 to the solving means 74,
The development effect execution means executes the development effect that displays the special basic effect mode that can be selected by the basic display pattern selection means only when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. Is possible.

  In this case, since it is possible to execute the development effect that displays the special basic effect mode that can be selected by the basic display pattern selection unit only when the determination that the winning determination unit should give the player a profit is made, When the special basic effect mode is displayed, the player can be confident that the player is controlled to be in a profit-giving state, and can improve the bliss for the special basic effect mode.

(Solution means 76)
In any one of the solving means 71 to the solving means 75, the composite effect execution means is different from the basic effect and the development effect in the case where the effect mode is not displayed after the display of the extinction mode by the extinction effect execution means. Special effect execution means capable of executing the special effect is included.

  In this case, when the display mode is not displayed after the display of the display mode by the display mode, the display mode is displayed after the display of the display mode because the special mode different from the basic mode and the development mode can be executed. By not being displayed, the player's expectation that is controlled to be in a profit-giving state once declines, but the special performance is subsequently executed, so that the expectation can be improved again. Can be given. In addition, for a player who recognizes the possibility that the special effect will be executed, the image is displayed after the display of the destruction mode with the expectation that the special effect will be executed even if the effect mode is not displayed. It is possible to focus attention on the effects displayed on the display means.

(Solution 77)
In the solving means 76, the effect device becomes invisible from the front side by appearing on the front side facing the player so as to perform a stunning operation and retreating from the appearance position. A reciprocating operation between the standby position and a plurality of types of effect members imitating the effect mode; a drive source that configures an operation mechanism together with the effect members; A standby accommodating portion that accommodates the drive source together with the effect member and holds the effect member at the standby position in the accommodated state, and the peripheral control means reciprocates the effect operation body by the drive source. Stage member driving means capable of driving and controlling, and the peripheral control means further includes stage member driving means capable of driving and controlling the reciprocating motion of the stage operating body by the drive source, and the special performance. Executing means executes the special effect to expose the effect member by the effect member driving means.

  In this case, as a special effect, the effect member is expressed by the effect member driving means, and an effect member that is not executed in the normal basic effect and / or the development effect is expressed, thereby benefiting the player. The expectation controlled by the grant state can be improved.

(Solution 78)
In the solution means 15, the selected appearance appearance executing means is an effect mode executed before executing the predetermined basic effect mode, and the winning mode is displayed by alternately displaying the change mode and the result mode multiple times. The selected appearance that suggests in advance one of the predetermined basic performance modes having different degrees of expectation according to the determination result by the determination means is executed.

  In this case, it is an effect that is executed before the execution of the predetermined basic effect mode, and a selection that suggests the execution of the predetermined basic effect mode in advance by alternately displaying the change mode and the result mode multiple times. By executing the production, not only the final result mode but also the process until the last result mode is displayed (displaying the result mode multiple times) indicates a predetermined basic production mode to be executed thereafter. Until the last result mode is displayed for the player, it is impossible to predict which basic production mode will be developed. That is, in the period in which the selection appearance appears, the player wants to display a result mode that develops into a highly promising basic effect mode, but displays all of the multiple result modes. It is impossible to know which of the basic production modes will be developed until, so that the notice of selection will be noted and will not get bored. Furthermore, since the change mode is displayed before the display of the result mode, in the period in which the change mode is displayed, it is waited with excitement which result mode is displayed next. Therefore, by paying attention to the selection notice, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 79)
In the solution means 78, the selection appearance execution means can display a specific result form as the result form when the winning judgment means determines that a profit should be given to the player.

  In this case, when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player, the specific result mode can be displayed as the result mode, and when the specific result mode is displayed, the basic effect mode is executed. Before being played, it will be possible to know the shocking content that would not be normal and give the player a startling feeling. That is, during the period in which the selection appearance is performed, the player can know that the profit granting state is recognized by recognizing the above-described specific result mode together with a startle feeling, and further attract attention to the selection appearance. Production. Therefore, by paying more attention to the selection notice, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 80)
In the solution means 15, the selected appearance appearance execution means is an effect aspect executed before executing the predetermined basic effect aspect, and the determination result by the winning determination means is displayed by displaying a result form of a plurality of times. Specific results when the selection appearance that suggests any one of the predetermined basic performance modes having different degrees of expectation according to the performance is executed, and a determination that the winning determination means should give a profit to the player is made The mode can be displayed.

In this case, it is an effect that is executed before the execution of the predetermined basic effect mode, and a selection appearance that suggests the execution of the predetermined basic effect mode in advance is performed by displaying a result mode of a plurality of times. By this, not only the last result mode but also the process until the last result mode is displayed (display of a plurality of result modes) can be made to suggest a predetermined basic performance mode to be executed thereafter, Until the last result mode is displayed for the player, it is impossible to predict which basic production mode will be developed. That is, in the period in which the selection appearance appears, the player wants to display a result mode that develops into a highly promising basic effect mode, but displays all of the multiple result modes. It is impossible to know which of the basic production modes will be developed until, so that the notice of selection will be noted and will not get bored. Therefore, by paying attention to the selection notice, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. When a specific result mode is displayed by making it possible to display a specific result mode when it is determined that a profit should be given to a person, an impact that cannot be normal before the basic effect mode is executed when the specific result mode is displayed. It will give you a sense of surprise. That is, during the period in which the selection appearance is performed, the player can know that the profit granting state is recognized by recognizing the above-described specific result mode together with a startle feeling, and further attract attention to the selection appearance. Production. Therefore, by further paying attention to the selection notice, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game (solution 81).
In any one of the solving means 78 to the solving means 80, the selection appearance executing means displays a result form corresponding to the basic effect form executable by the combined effect executing means in each of the plurality of result forms. Then, the selected appearance appears.

  In this case, a result appearance corresponding to the basic effect form executable by the composite effect execution means is displayed in each of the plurality of result forms, and the selected appearance is executed, so that the game results are displayed in a plurality of times. Therefore, it is desired that a result mode for deriving a basic effect mode with a high ratio of determining that a profit should be given to the user is displayed, and it is possible to keep a focus on a plurality of result modes.

(Solution means 82)
In any one of the solving means 78 to the solving means 81, the combined effect executing means executes the basic effect mode corresponding to the result mode displayed last among the plurality of result modes displayed in the selected appearance. To do.

  In this case, by executing the basic effect mode according to the result mode displayed last among the plurality of result modes displayed in the selection appearance, the result mode displayed last among the multiple result modes Will want to display a result mode that derives a basic performance mode with a high proportion of judgments that should be given to the player, and can pay particular attention to the result mode displayed last. .

(Solution 83)
In any one of the solving means 78 to the solving means 82, the combined effect executing means is a first basic effect executing means for executing a first basic effect that is executed before the selected appearance performing means executes the selected appearance. And a second basic effect executing means for executing a second basic effect executed after the selected appearance performing means is executed by the selected appearance appearing executing means, wherein the selected appearance appearing executing means is the first basic effect executing means. The selection that is executed before the second basic effect is executed by the second basic effect executing means after the first basic effect is executed, and suggests the execution of the second basic effect in advance. Perform the production.

  In this case, after the first basic effect executing unit executes the first basic effect, the second basic effect executing unit executes the second basic effect before executing the second basic effect. Even if the first basic performance with a low rate of determination that should give a player a profit before the execution of the selection appearance is executed by executing the selection appearance that suggests in advance, multiple times in the selection appearance Depending on the display of the result mode, there is a possibility that the second basic effect with a high rate of determination to give the player a profit after the execution of the selected appearance will be executed, and expecting the result mode of multiple times It can be noticed.

(Solution 84)
In the solving means 83, the combined effect executing means is more than executing only the first basic effect by the first effect executing means when it is determined that the winning determination means should give a profit to the player. The second basic effect is executed by the second basic effect executing means at a high rate.

  In this case, when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player, the second basic effect executing means performs the second basic effect executing means at a higher rate than when only the first basic effect is executed by the first basic effect executing means. 2 When the selection appearance is executed by executing the basic effect, the second basic effect with a high ratio of determining that the player should be given a profit is executed, and the player's profit granting state The expectation for can be improved.

(Solution means 85)
In any one of the solving means 78 to the solving means 84, in each of the plurality of result forms, any one of effect images imitating a plurality of types of effect modes that can be recognized in advance by visual recognition is displayed. .

  In this case, the player can visually recognize the order suggested by the effect mode displayed in the result mode by displaying any one of the effect images imitating a plurality of types of effect modes in which the order determined in advance can be recognized. Can be recognized.

(Solution means 86)
In the solving means 85, the selected appearance appearance executing means displays the plurality of types of effect forms from the low order effect form to the predetermined order effect form so as to be visible to the player as the plurality of result forms.

  In this case, even if an effect mode with a lower rank is displayed by displaying a plurality of types of effect modes from an effect mode with a lower rank to an effect mode with a predetermined rank as a result mode of multiple times, In the next result mode, there is a possibility that a high-ranking performance mode may be displayed, and it is not known which order will be settled until a predetermined-ranking performance mode is displayed. It is possible to gradually increase a sense of expectation that an effect mode from which is derived is displayed.

(Solution 87)
In the solution means 86, the selected appearance appearance executing means displays an effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the lower order, and then the effect corresponding to the effect mode having the same rank as the effect mode or a higher order than the effect mode. Switch to the image to display.

  In this case, after displaying the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having a lower rank, the display is switched to the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the same rank as the effect mode or higher than the effect mode. In the next result mode in which the low-performance effect mode is displayed, at least the effect mode lower in order than the low-performance effect mode is not displayed, and the same rank or the effect as the low-order effect mode An effect mode having a higher rank than the mode is displayed, and the expectation that an effect mode from which a basic effect with a high degree of expectation is derived may be displayed.

(Solution means 88)
In the solution means 86 or the solution means 87, the selection appearance execution means can display the specific result form as the effect form of the predetermined order when the winning judgment means determines that a profit should be given to the player. And

  In this case, when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player, the specific result form can be displayed as the predetermined order of the effect form, so that the effect of the predetermined order among the plurality of result forms Even if an effect mode with a low order is displayed before the mode is displayed, the specific result mode may be displayed as the mode of effect of the predetermined order. It can be noticed especially with expectation.

(Solution 89)
In any one of the solving means 86 to 88, the profit grant state control means displays a specific display mode on the image display means based on a determination result by the winning determination means, and then controls the profit grant state. When the special display mode is displayed as the specific display mode, the main control unit is in a special game state in which it is easy for the winning determination unit to make a determination that a profit should be given to the player after the end of the profit granting state. And a special game state control means for controlling, wherein the winning determination means includes a determination as to whether or not the special gaming state control means controls the special gaming state, and the selection appearance execution means includes the winning determination means When the determination to control to the special gaming state is made, the special result mode can be displayed as the specific result mode.

  In this case, when the determination to control to the special game state is made by the winning determination means, the special result mode different from the specific result mode can be displayed as the effect mode of the predetermined order, so that among the multiple result modes Even if an effect mode with a lower order is displayed before the effect mode with the predetermined order is displayed, a special result mode may be displayed as the effect mode with the predetermined order, and the special result mode is specified. Since the game state is controlled so as to be more profitable for the player than the result mode, the last result mode among the plurality of result modes can be particularly paid attention.

(Solution 90)
In the solution means 86, the selection appearance appearance execution means displays the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having the lower rank when the determination to give the player a profit is made by the winning determination means, and then the effect It is possible to switch and display the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having a lower rank than the mode.

  In this case, when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player, the effect image corresponding to the effect mode having a lower rank is displayed, and then the effect mode having a lower rank than the effect mode is displayed. By switching to the effect image and enabling display, when the effect mode having a lower rank than the effect mode is displayed in the next result mode in which the effect mode with the lower rank is displayed, the state is controlled to be in a profit-giving state. Can be known before the execution of the basic effect, and can be noticed with expectation from the first result mode to the last result mode.

(Solution 91)
In any one of the solving means 83 to the solving means 90, the composite effect executing means further includes an extended effect executing means for executing an extended effect after executing the second basic effect by the second basic effect executing means, The selection appearance execution execution means includes a special appearance control special display control means for displaying any one of the first special aspect and the second special aspect different from the first special aspect together with the plurality of result aspects, The special display control means at the time of appearance appears to be able to display the second special mode together with the result mode of the plurality of times when the development effect is executed by the development effect execution means.

  In this case, when the development effect is executed by the development effect execution means, the second special mode can be displayed together with a plurality of result modes, so that when the second special mode is displayed with a plurality of result modes, After the result mode is displayed a plurality of times, a development effect with a high rate of determination that the player should be given a benefit is derived, and the player's sense of expectation regarding the benefit-giving state can be improved.

(Solution 92)
In the solution means 91, the special appearance control means at the time of selection appearance displays the second special aspect together with the plurality of result aspects at a lower rate than the first special aspect.

  In this case, by displaying the second special mode together with the result mode of the plurality of times at a lower rate than the first special mode, the second special mode which is rarer than the display of the first special mode is the result of the multiple times. When the mode is displayed together with the mode, the result mode of the plurality of times is displayed, and then a development effect with a high ratio of determining that the player should be given a profit is derived, and the player's sense of expectation for the profit granting state is derived. Can be improved.

(Solution means 93)
In any one of the solving means 78 to the solving means 92, the rendering device appears in a visible manner on the front side facing the player so as to perform a rendering action, and the front surface by retreating from the appearance position. A reciprocating operation is possible between the stand-by position that is not visible from the side, and a plurality of types of effect members imitating the effect mode, and an operation mechanism together with the effect members, and the effect members reciprocate. A drive source that is operated, and a standby accommodating portion that accommodates the drive source together with the effect member, and holds the effect member in the standby position in the accommodated state, and the peripheral control means is controlled by the drive source. The display device further includes a production member driving means capable of driving and controlling the reciprocating motion of the production operation body, and when the last result mode is displayed among the plurality of result modes displayed in the selected appearance, Further comprising between the member demonstration execution means for executing member directing to the presentation member forwardly to appear by the presentation member driving means.

  In this case, when displaying the last result mode among the plurality of result modes displayed in the selection appearance, by executing a member effect that causes the effect member to appear by the effect member driving means in front of the result mode, An effect member appearing in front of the last result mode can give a strong impression to the player, and moreover, attention should be paid to the selected appearance rather than only a plurality of result modes displayed on the image display means. And the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 94)
In the solving means 93, the member effect execution means is higher in proportion when the determination that the profit should be given to the player is not made when the determination to give the player the profit is made by the winning determination means. The effect member is caused to appear by the effect member driving means.

  In this case, when it is determined that the profit should be given to the player by the winning determination means, the effect member appears by the effect member driving means at a higher rate than when the determination that the profit should be given to the player is not made. By doing so, when the effect member appears, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the profit provision state.

(Solution 95)
In the solution means 93 or the solution means 94, the member effect execution means causes the effect member driving means to cause an effect member imitating the effect aspect identical to the effect aspect displayed as the last result aspect.

  In this case, the production member that imitates the production mode identical to the production mode displayed as the last result mode is caused to appear by the production member driving means, thereby the same production mode as the last result mode suggesting the second basic production. When an effect member that imitates the appearance, it is possible to strongly impress the second basic effect with a high ratio of determining that the player should be given a profit.

(Solution means 96)
In the solution means 93 or the solution means 94, the member effect execution means causes all of the plurality of kinds of effect members to appear by the effect member driving means.

  In this case, by causing all of the plurality of types of effect members to appear by the effect member driving means, when all of the plurality of types of effect members appear, it is possible to make the effect member pay more attention than to cause the effect members to appear alone. It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation regarding the state of profit provision.

(Solution 97)
In any one of the solving means 93 to the solving means 96, the effect member driving means has, as the appearance position, a first appearance position where all of the effect members can be visually recognized by a player and half of the effect member as a player. And a second appearance position that can be visually recognized.

  In this case, as the appearance position, the second appearance position is controlled by driving the first appearance position where all of the effect members can be visually recognized by the player and the second appearance position where half of the effect members can be visually recognized by the player. When the effect member appears at the first appearance position rather than the appearance position, attention can be paid to the driving state of the effect member, and the player's expectation on the profit provision state can be improved.

(Solution 98)
In the solving means 97, the member effect execution means has a higher rate when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means than when the determination to give a profit to the player is not made. The effect member is caused to appear at the first appearance position by the effect member driving means.

  In this case, when the determination that the profit should be given to the player is made by the winning judgment means, the effect member is driven by the effect member driving means at a higher rate than when the judgment that the profit should be given to the player is not made. When the production member appears at the first appearance position by causing the player to appear at the first appearance position, since the ratio of the determination that the player should be given a profit is high, the player's sense of expectation for the profit granting state is increased. Can be improved.

(Solution 99)
In the solving means 16, the image display means has a plurality of types of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information, and the display control means determines the plurality of types based on a determination result by the winning determination unit. A variable display control means for variably displaying the plurality of kinds of symbol information in the variable display area, and stopping and displaying the symbol information corresponding to the determination result in each of the variable display areas, and the back surface effect executing means includes the image The effect mode is displayed in a manner that is visible to the player in an overlapping area that overlaps the plurality of types of variable display areas on the display means.

  In this case, when the effect mode is displayed by displaying the effect mode in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player in the overlapping area that overlaps the multiple types of variable display region in which multiple types of symbol information are variably displayed, The player does not have to move the viewpoint from a plurality of types of symbol information to the production mode, can naturally put the display of the production mode in a field of view that the player can be aware of, and the game is not monotonous. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Solution 100)
In the solving means 99, the back face effect execution means displays the effect mode in a state where the plurality of types of symbol information by the variable display control means is prioritized over the effect mode.

  In this case, it is possible to visually recognize a plurality of types of symbol information on the front of the effect mode by displaying the effect mode in a state where the plurality of types of symbol information by the variable display control means are prioritized over the effect mode. The player who wants to pay attention to the symbol information is not hindered from watching the symbol information, and the game does not feel uncomfortable.

(Solution means 101)
In the solving means 99 or the solving means 100, the change display control means changes and displays the plurality of types of symbol information in a translucent display mode.

  In this case, by variably displaying multiple types of symbol information in a semi-transparent display mode, it is possible to see the effect mode behind the multiple types of symbol information variably displayed in the semi-transparent display mode. When displayed, the player does not need to move the viewpoint from a plurality of types of symbol information to the production mode, and the display of the production mode can be naturally put in the field of view that the player can be aware of, and the game is monotonous Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Solution means 102)
In the solving means 101, the variable display control means displays, in a translucent display mode, symbol information that is variablely displayed in the variable display area only in the variable display area that overlaps the overlapping area among the plurality of types of variable display areas. Display fluctuating.

  In this case, only in the variable display area that overlaps the overlapping area among the multiple types of variable display areas, the symbol information that is variably displayed in the variable display area is variably displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, thereby making the player aware of it. Only the overlap area where the desired effect mode is displayed can be seen, and the player can easily recognize the location where the effect mode is displayed.

(Solution 103)
In any one of the solving means 99 to the solving means 102, the back surface effect executing means displays the plurality of types of symbol information in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol information to be stopped and displayed in each variable display area at a lower speed than the variable display. In addition, low-speed fluctuation display control means for fluctuating and displaying in an opaque display mode is included.

  In this case, after variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information by the variation display control means, the symbol information to be stopped and displayed in each variation display area is variably displayed in a display mode that is slower than the variation display and opaque. When a plurality of types of symbol information is stopped and displayed, the player does not need to move the viewpoint from the presentation mode to the plurality of types of symbol information, and transitions to the display of the plurality of types of symbol information in a natural manner. Can do. Therefore, a plurality of types of symbol information are not missed together with the effect mode, and the player can watch the effect mode with peace of mind.

(Solution 104)
In the solving means 103, the back face effect execution means hides the effect mode at a timing when the low speed fluctuation display control means fluctuates and displays the symbol information to be stopped and displayed first in the low speed and opaque display mode. .

  In this case, a plurality of types of symbol information are stopped and displayed by hiding the effect mode at the timing when the symbol information to be stopped and displayed first is variably displayed in the low-speed and opaque display mode by the low-speed variation display control means. When this is done, the production mode is not displayed, and it does not prevent the player from gazing at a plurality of types of symbol information.

(Solution 105)
In any one of the solving means 99 to the solving means 104, the back face effect executing means displays the effect mode in the variable display area.

  In this case, by displaying the production mode in the variable display area, when the production mode is displayed, the player does not need to move the viewpoint from the plurality of types of symbol information to the production mode. The display can be naturally put in the field of view that the player can be aware of, and the game does not become monotonous, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 106)
In the solving means 105, the fluctuation display control means variably displays the plurality of types of symbol information in a display mode that passes through the front of the effect mode displayed in the overlap area, and the effect displayed in the overlap area. Each symbol information is stopped and displayed on any front surface of the aspect.

  In this case, when the effect mode is displayed by variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information in a display mode that passes in front of the effect mode displayed in the overlapping area, the viewpoint is changed from the plurality of types of symbol information to the effect mode. It is not necessary to move the game, and the display of the production mode can be naturally put in the field of view that the player can be aware of, the game does not become monotonous, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. In addition, by stopping the display of each symbol information in front of the effect mode displayed in the overlapping area, even for a player who is gazing at the effect mode, It is not necessary to move the viewpoint from a form to a plurality of types of symbol information, and it is possible to shift to a display of a plurality of types of symbol information in a natural manner. Therefore, a plurality of types of symbol information are not missed together with the effect mode, and the player can watch the effect mode with peace of mind.

(Solution 107)
In any one of the solving means 99 to the solving means 106, the effect mode is a plurality of types of effect modes, and is displayed in each overlapping area corresponding to the effect mode.

  In this case, the production mode is a plurality of types of production modes, and is displayed in each overlapping area corresponding to the production mode, so that each of the plurality of types of production modes is determined at a place (overlapping area). Since it is displayed, it is possible for the player to remember the meanings of each performance mode (expected expectation of big hits, etc.) corresponding to the overlapping area where the performance mode is displayed, and the meanings of multiple types of performance modes Can be easily recognized.

(Solution 108)
In any one of the solution means 99 to the solution means 107, the back face effect executing means executes the back face effect by the back face effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the back face effect and the back face execution determining means. And a rear effect determining means for determining which of the effect modes is displayed when the determination is made, and the composite effect executing means determines that the rear effect is executed by the rear effect determination executing means. When done, the back effect display means displays the effect mode determined by the back effect determination means by the composite effect display control means.

  In this case, when it is determined by the back face effect determination executing means that the back face effect (in this embodiment, a mini character notice effect) is executed, the effect mode determined by the back face effect determining means is displayed by the composite effect display control means. By executing the back effect by the back effect executing means, when execution determination is made, it is executed regardless of whether or not another effect (dependent effect mode) is executed.

(Solution 109)
In any one of the solution means 99 to the solution means 108, the back face effect determining means determines all the effect modes of the effect modes only when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. Is possible.

  In this case, only when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, it is possible to determine all the production modes of the production mode, and when all the production modes are displayed, the player It can be convinced that it will be in a state of granting profits, and bliss can be improved.

(Solution 110)
In any one of the solving means 99 to the solving means 109, a first effect period in which display control of the image is started by the image display means, and the first display mode is displayed after a predetermined time has passed through the effect mode; After the first effect period, the second effect period for recognizing whether or not the profit granting state is recognized through the basic effect mode, and the main control means differs from the normal mode in the first display mode. A reach mode determining unit that determines whether or not the reach mode is displayed more rarely than the normal mode, and the back surface effect determining unit sets the reach mode by the reach mode determining unit. Only when the power determination is made, it is possible to determine an effect mode including a specific effect mode among the plurality of types of effect modes.

  In this case, the specific effect mode is displayed by being able to determine the effect mode including the specific effect mode only when the reach mode determination unit determines that the first display mode should be the reach mode. Sometimes, after the player reaches the reach mode, the expectation that the profit is given can be increased.

(Solution 111)
In any one of the solving means 99 to the solving means 110, the back face effect determining means gives a profit to the player by the winning determination means when the winning determining means determines that the player should be profited. It is possible to determine a combination of specific production modes among the production modes at a higher rate than when the determination to be made is not made.

  In this case, when it is determined that the profit should be given to the player by the winning determination means, the specific effect mode is higher in proportion than when the determination that the profit should be given to the player is not made by the winning determination means. By being able to determine the combination, it is possible to enhance the expectation that the player will be in a profit-giving state when a specific combination of effects is displayed. Therefore, the player does not pay attention to only one of the effect modes (for example, a specific effect mode in the solving means 60), and can make all of the effect modes conscious.

(Solution means 112)
In any one of the solving means 99 to the solving means 111, the peripheral control means further includes an effect member driving means capable of driving and controlling the reciprocating motion of the effect operating body by the drive source, and the multistage effect executing means includes: The multi-stage effect that expresses the effect modes in a predetermined order so as to be visible to the player is executed by the composite effect display control means and / or the effect member drive means, and the multi-stage effect execution means In a state where priority is given to the plurality of types of symbol information and the effect mode by the back surface effect execution means, other effect modes of the effect mode are displayed by the composite effect display control means, and displayed on the image display means. The effect member appears by the effect member driving means in front of a plurality of types of symbol information and the effect mode.

  In this case, in a state where priority is given to a plurality of types of symbol information and a rendering mode, other rendering modes of the rendering mode are displayed, or in front of a plurality of types of symbol information and rendering modes displayed on the image display means. By causing the effect member to appear, it is possible to visually recognize effect images and effect members other than the effect aspect on the front face (front) of the plurality of kinds of symbol information and the effect aspect, and the player can obtain from the plurality of kinds of symbol information. There is no need to move the viewpoint to an effect mode or effect member other than the effect mode, and the display of the effect mode other than the effect mode or the appearance of the effect member can be naturally put in a view that the player can be aware of. It does not become monotonous and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, by visually recognizing an effect mode or effect member other than the effect mode on the front (front) of the multiple types of symbol information and the effect mode, an effect mode other than the effect mode can be obtained. Attention will be given to the effect members with priority. Therefore, when the composite effect display control means and / or the effect member driving means are controlled by the multistage effect execution means, the effect modes and / or effect members other than the effect mode that the player wants to pay attention to are effectively noted. Can be made.

(Solution means 113)
In any one of the solving means 108 to 112, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of back face effect determination tables in which a predetermined range of determination values are set, and the back face effect execution determination means and the back face effect determination means. Determines whether to execute the back effect using a back effect determination table corresponding to the basic display pattern among the plurality of types of back effect determination tables, and indicates which of the effect modes is to be displayed. decide.

  In this case, in accordance with the determination result by the winning determination means in order to determine whether to execute the back surface effect using the back surface effect determination table corresponding to the basic display pattern and to determine which of the effect modes is displayed. Then, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the rear face effect and to determine which of the effect modes is displayed.

(Solution 114)
In the solving means 17, the peripheral control means includes a sound output control means for outputting sound by the sound output means, a first special image by the image display means, and a second special image different from the first special image. And special image display control means for controlling display of any one of the special images, and the sound output control means executes display control of the first special image by the special image display control means. A first normal sound output control means for outputting a first normal sound predetermined by the sound output means as the first sound output mode, and the special image display control means for outputting the second special image. Second normal sound output control means for outputting, as the first sound output mode, a second normal sound different from the first normal sound by the sound output means during display control, and the special image display By the control means. Special sound output control means for outputting, as the second sound output mode, a special sound different from the first normal sound and the second normal sound by the sound output means when performing display control of a special image; The sound output effect executing means starts output control by means of output mode determination means for determining whether or not the sound output mode output by the sound output means is the special sound, and the display control means. Sound change determination means for determining whether or not to change the sound output mode output by the sound output means, and the sound change determination means is not a special sound by the output mode determination means. When it is determined, it is determined whether or not the sound output mode is changed to the special sound. When the output mode determination unit determines that the sound output mode is the special sound, the sound output mode is changed to the first sound. Normal Or to determine whether to change to the second normal sound.

  In this case, when the first special image is displayed by the special image display control means, output control of the first normal sound is performed by the sound output means, and display control of the second special image is performed by the special image display control means. Since the sound output means controls the output of the second normal sound different from the first normal sound, the special image can be specified by the sound output mode, and the player can grasp the change of the special image more clearly Is possible. Further, the output control of the first normal sound or the second normal sound is performed according to the image controlled to be displayed by the special image display control means, and the sound change determination means determines when the output mode determination means determines that it is not the special sound. Since the special sound output control is executed based on the determination that the sound output mode is changed, the player is in some state when the special sound is output (particularly in a state in which the player is likely to be in a profit-giving state). )), It is possible to prevent the expectation for the profit-giving state from being lowered when the special sound is output, and the interest for the game is not lowered.

(Solution 115)
In the solving means 114, the peripheral control means uses a first profit as a profit to be given to the player when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, and the first profit And a profit state determining means for determining any one of the second profit with high added value, and the sound change determining means is determined to be the first profit by the profit state determining means, And when it is determined that the sound is not the special sound by the output mode determination means, it is determined that the sound output mode is not changed, the profit state determination means is determined to be the first profit, and the When it is determined by the output mode determination means that the sound is the special sound, a determination is made to change the sound output mode.

  In this case, it is determined that the normal sound is output controlled when the first benefit with low added value is determined, and the first value with high added value is output in the state where the first normal sound and the second normal sound are output. 2 is determined to be a second profit with a high added value only when a special sound is being output. Since the player plays the game with the aim of becoming the second profit, the player determines the second profit from the state in which the first normal sound and the second normal sound that are not determined to be the second profit are output. When the special sound to be determined is output, if the profit granting state occurs during the output of the special sound, the player infers that the second profit will be added, By paying attention to the determination result of the winning determination means displayed on the image display means, it is possible to increase the expectation for the second profit when the special sound is output.

(Solution 116)
In the solving means 115, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of sound output effect determination tables in which a predetermined range of determination values are set, and the sound change determination means includes the plurality of types of sound output effect determination tables. Whether to change the sound output mode using the sound output effect determination table according to the determination result of the winning determination unit, the determination result of the profit state determination unit, and the determination result of the output mode determination unit Determine.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to change the sound output mode using the sound output effect determination table according to the determination result of the winning determination unit, the determination result of the profit state determination unit, and the determination result of the output mode determination unit. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the sound output mode according to each determination result and determination result.

(Solution means 117)
In any one of the solving means 114 to 116, the sound change determination means does not change the sound output mode at a high rate when the winning determination means does not determine that the player should benefit. Make a decision.

  In this case, it is determined that the sound output mode is not changed at a high rate when it is not determined to give a profit to the player, and the sound output mode is not frequently changed when a determination that no profit is given is made. For this reason, the player's interest in the special sound is diminished by frequently changing the sound output mode, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

(Solution means 118)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 117, the image display means variably displays a plurality of types of symbols in accordance with a predetermined arrangement order, and the symbols indicate an arrangement identification information that can identify the arrangement order. An identification unit and a depth display unit that two-dimensionally displays the depth of the array identification unit are provided, and the depth display unit is provided with a decorative pattern that decorates the depth display unit.

  In this case, the symbols are configured by the sequence identification unit so that the player can easily grasp the sequence of the symbols. In addition, since the depth display unit decorates the design so that the depth display unit does not interfere with the recognition of the sequence identification unit by attaching a decorative pattern to the depth display unit that displays the depth of the sequence identification unit two-dimensionally. It does not deteriorate the sex.

(Solution 119)
In the solving means 118, the array identification section has a numerical outer shape as the array identification information.

  In this case, by configuring the sequence identification unit with numbers that can most easily grasp the sequence order, the player can easily recognize the sequence sequence of symbols.

(Solution means 120)
In Solution 118 or Solution 119, the color scheme of the decorative pattern is the same color as the color scheme of the design.

  In this case, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from interfering with the recognition of the pattern (array identifying unit).

(Solution means 121)
In the resolution means 118 to the resolution means 120, a character is attached in the array identification section.

  In this case, by adding a character in the array identification unit, it is possible to enhance the decorativeness of the pattern itself together with the decorative pattern added to the depth display unit.

(Solution means 122)
In the solving means 121, the color scheme of the character is the same color as the color scheme of the symbol.

  In this case, it is possible to prevent the character from obstructing the recognition of the design (array identification unit).

(Solution means 123)
In the resolution means 121 or the resolution means 122, the character is given a different type depending on the type of the sequence identification information constituting the sequence identification unit.

  In this case, since different characters are attached according to the type of the sequence identification information, the symbols can be clearly differentiated according to the type of the sequence identification information.

(Solution 124)
In the solving means 118 to the solving means 123, the decorative pattern is a background image.

  In this case, it is possible to prevent recognition of the pattern (array identification unit) by adding the decorative pattern of the depth display unit casually as a background image.

(Solution 125)
In the resolution means 118 to the resolution means 124, the same decorative pattern is attached regardless of the type of the sequence identification information constituting the sequence identification unit.

  In this case, since a common decorative picture is attached regardless of the type of the sequence identification information, it is possible to give a sense of unity to a plurality of types of symbols having different sequence identification information.

(Solution means 126)
In the solving means 118 to 125, the arrangement identifying unit has a larger occupied area on the display form in the design than the depth display unit.

  In this case, in the visibility of the symbol, the depth display unit can prevent the recognition of the array identification unit from being hindered.

(Solution means 127)
In solution 118,
The display control means sequentially displays the plurality of types of symbols in a normal symbol display mode in which the display ratio of the array identification unit constituting the symbols is higher than the display ratio of the depth display unit, and the variable display Within a period until the display result is displayed after the display of the variation of the symbol is started when the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result of the symbol By rotating the symbol about a virtual axis set in the virtual three-dimensional space of the display area of the image display means, the display ratio of the array identification unit is lower than the display ratio of the depth display unit And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for displaying the symbol in a special symbol display mode.

  In this case, when a specific condition is met, the symbol is displayed as if it is a three-dimensional substance in the display area of the two-dimensional space (plane) by rotating the symbol, unlike normal symbol fluctuations. The visual interest in the symbol display can be improved.

(Solution 128)
In the solving means 127, the specific effect executing means displays the symbol in the normal symbol display mode after executing the specific effect when the first specific condition among the specific conditions is satisfied. When the execution unit and the second specific condition different from the first specific condition among the specific conditions are satisfied, after executing the specific effect, the symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display mode, and then Second specific effect executing means for executing a special effect different from the specific effect.

  In this case, after turning the symbol as a specific effect, the player recognizes whether or not an effect display for shifting from the specific effect to the special effect is performed depending on whether or not the symbol is displayed in a special symbol display mode. Can be made.

(Solution 129)
In the solving means 128, the special symbol display mode is a symbol display mode in which the display ratio of the depth display unit is approximately 100%.

  In this case, the special symbol display mode can be made to be a display mode that is clearly different from the normal symbol display mode, and the player can clearly recognize the shift from the specific effect to the special effect.

(Solution means 130)
In the solving means 127 to the solving means 129, the normal symbol display mode is a symbol display mode in which the display ratio of the array identification unit is approximately 70% and the display ratio of the depth display unit is approximately 30%. .

  In this case, it is possible to achieve a symbol display mode in which both the characteristics of the symbol array visibility by the array identification unit and the symbol decorativeness by the depth display unit (decorative pattern) can be optimally utilized.

(Solution 131)
In the solving means 127 to the solving means 130, the virtual axis is a virtual perpendicular line perpendicular to the symbol.

  In this case, the symbol can be rotated like a frame with a virtual vertical line in the vertical direction as a rotation axis.

(Solution means 132)
In the solving means 128 to the solving means 131, the second specific effect executing means derives and displays the display result of the symbol after the special effect ends when the first special condition is satisfied among the second specific conditions. When the second special condition that is different from the first special condition among the second specific conditions is satisfied, the developed special effect that is different from the special effect after executing the special effect. And a second special effect executing means for executing.

  In this case, by enabling the transition from the special effect to the advanced special effect, the reach effect can be further diversified, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(Solution means 133)
In the solving means 118, the display control means sequentially displays the plurality of types of symbols in a sequence-highlighted display mode in which the decorative design is a symbol display mode in which the visibility of the sequence identifying unit is not hindered. Within a period from the start of the display of the symbol to the time when the display result is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result of the symbol Special effect execution means for executing a special effect for displaying the symbol in a decoration emphasis display mode that is a symbol display mode in which the decorative pattern can be clearly recognized.

  In this case, when the special effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol is displayed in the decoration highlighting display mode, which is different from the normal design variation (array highlighting display mode), and is attached to the depth display unit. Since the decorative pattern can be visually recognized clearly, it is possible to perform an effect display with improved decorativeness of the pattern.

(Solution means 134)
In the solving means 133, the arrangement emphasis display mode is a display mode in which the color scheme of the decorative pattern is the same color as the base color of the symbol.

  In this case, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from interfering with the recognition of the pattern (array identifying unit) by the configuration of the pattern color scheme.

(Solution means 135)
In the solution means 133 or the solution means 134, the decoration emphasis display form is a display form in which the color scheme of the decoration pattern is displayed in a color tone irrespective of the base color of the design.

  In this case, the decorativeness of the symbol can be enhanced by the configuration of the symbol color scheme.

(Solution means 136)
In the solving means 133 to 135, a character is attached in the array identification unit, and the color scheme of the character is the same color as the base color of the symbol in the array highlighting mode.

  In this case, it is possible to prevent the character from obstructing the recognition of the design (array identification unit).

(Solution 137)
In the solution unit 135 or the solution unit 136, the color scheme of the character has a color tone that is not related to the base color of the design in the decoration highlight display mode.

  In this case, it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the character attached in the array identification unit.

(Solution 138)
In the solving means 133 to 137, the special effect executing means includes special addition display means for displaying a display form in which a special picture is added to the decorative picture displayed in the arrangement emphasized display form as the decorative emphasized display form. Including.

  In this case, the decorativeness of the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative highlight display mode can be further enhanced.

(Solution 139)
In any one of Solution 1 to Solution 38, the rendering device is attached to the component member from the front side thereof, and forms a rendering area from the front unit, and the component member from the rear side thereof. And a rear unit having an operation mechanism that is attached and capable of performing an effect operation in the effect area.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the rear unit is located behind the front unit, and the rear unit is configured to be attached from the back side of the constituent members. It has become a thing. The components of the gaming machine main body include a game board, a frame, a housing, etc., but anyway a stunning operation (for example, movement by some mechanical mechanism, rotation / action of a movable body, light emission operation, etc.) ) Is provided in the rear unit, the player is unaware of the existence of the operation mechanism and cannot predict what stage operation will be performed.

  On the other hand, when the production operation is performed by the operation mechanism in such a state, the player can enjoy the game while being excited and touched by the unexpected production operation.

  The advantages of the gaming machine of the present invention can also affect other directions. That is, since the equipment related to the production has a structure in which the front unit and the rear unit are separated, one of them can be repaired and replaced independently, or can be used for maintenance and inspection. In particular, since the maintainability of the rear unit having the operation mechanism is enhanced, it is easy to deal with machine troubles, and the operation and operation of the gaming machine can be performed efficiently.

(Solution 140)
In the solving means 139, the component member is a game board in which a game area in which the launched game ball flows down is formed on the front side facing the player.

  In this case, since the rear unit is located behind the front unit and the rear unit is attached from the back side of the game board, the rear unit is usually difficult for the player to see. Yes.

(Solution means 141)
In the solving means 140, the game board is formed by penetrating a part of the game board in the thickness direction thereof, and has a through-hole that allows the dramatic operation by the operation mechanism of the rear unit to be visually recognized from the front side. Prepare.

  If the operation mechanism is completely hidden behind the game board, nothing can be seen from the front side, but the solution means 69 can visually recognize the effect operation through the through hole. With such a structure, the player sees the production operation by the operation mechanism at a position deeper than the game board, so that the visual depth can be felt.

(Solution 142)
In the solving means 140 or the solving means 141, the rear unit has a mounting surface that is formed on the front side facing the back side of the game board, extends along the back side of the game board, and is in close contact with the back side.

  In this case, since the mounting surface of the rear unit is formed flat so as to match the back surface of the game board, the adhesion to each other is enhanced, and the accuracy is improved along with the ease of assembly.

(Solution 143)
In the solution means 141 or the solution means 142, at least one of the front unit and the rear unit is formed to protrude in the front-rear direction of the game board, and the front unit and the rear unit are attached to the game board in the state of being attached to the game board. It further has an insertion connecting part for connecting the front unit and the rear unit to each other through the through hole by being inserted into the through hole.

  In this case, since the front unit and the rear unit are not only individually attached to the game board but also connected to each other via the game board, the structure as a whole becomes stronger.

(Solution means 144)
In any one of the solving means 141 to 143, the front unit and the rear unit are formed inside the through hole, and the front unit and the rear unit are formed through the through hole in a state where the front unit and the rear unit are attached to the game board. It further has a receiving space part that allows the outer surface of the continuous line to be continuous.

  In this case, the rear unit is not simply hidden behind the front unit, but the presence of the rear unit is not reduced. Is done. In addition, the front unit and the rear unit are integrated in the front-rear direction to create a visual depth, thereby providing a profound feeling and presence with a strong impact.

(Solution 145)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 144, in a state where the rear unit is located behind the front unit, the operation mechanism is shielded from being visible from the front side when the operation mechanism is not operated. A shielding means is further provided.

  As a result, when the operation mechanism is inactive, its existence itself is not visually recognized, so that it is hardly conscious that there is a function of performing some operation there. In this state, when the operation mechanism is actually operated, the player feels a fresh taste due to the appearance of an unexpected performance operation, and can be more and more exciting.

(Solution 146)
In the solving means 145, the shielding means constitutes a part of the outer surface of the rear unit, and shields the operation mechanism of the rear unit in a state of being continuous with the outer surface of the front unit. including.

  In this case, since the operation mechanism of the rear unit is covered with a shielding member visually integrated with the front unit, the player does not notice the presence of the operation mechanism at first glance. Furthermore, since the operation mechanism is protected by the shielding member, for example, even when using a game ball, interference with the operation mechanism (game ball collision, biting, etc.) can be effectively prevented.

(Solution 147)
In the solving means 146, the shielding means shields the operating mechanism by holding the shielding member at a predetermined stop position when the operating mechanism is not operated, while stopping the shielding member when the rear unit is operated. It further includes a movable mechanism that allows the operating mechanism to appear at a position that is visible from the front side by being displaced from the position.

  In this case, the shielding member does not simply cover the operation mechanism, but the operation mechanism appears at a position where the operation mechanism can be visually recognized by the displacement of the shielding member during operation. On the contrary, when the operating mechanism returns to the hidden stop position, the shielding member returns to its original state and covers it, so that even if the operating mechanism touches the player's eyes once, it is still hidden End up. For this reason, the existence of the operation mechanism is not easily recognized, and the fresh taste is not lost for a long time.

(Solution 148)
In the solving means 146 or the solving means 147, the shielding means displaces the shielding member in such a manner that a stunning operation can be performed together with the operation mechanism when the rear unit is operated.

  In this case, the shielding member does not simply cover the operation mechanism, but also performs the performance operation together. For this reason, the movement of the shielding mechanism is added to the movement of the operation mechanism, and a production effect that is large in appearance is performed accordingly.

(Solution 149)
In any one of the solving means 139 to the solving means 148, the front unit and the rear unit can individually perform stunning operations in the staging area.

  That is, the functions of the front unit and the rear unit are independent of each other, and each can operate independently. In this case, because the functions of the two units are independent, it is extremely easy to repair or replace only one of them or to perform maintenance or inspection work.

(Solution means 150)
In any one of the solving means 139 to the solving means 149, the front unit and the rear unit can perform a stunning operation in cooperation with each other in the staging area. In this case, since the two units cooperate with each other, the contents of the production operation can be made various, and the amount can be increased accordingly.

(Solution 151)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 150, the image display means is attached to the rear unit from behind.

  In this case, the units relating to the production are divided into at least three, and each unit is individually targeted for repair, replacement, maintenance, inspection, and the like.

(Solution means 152)
In any one of the solution means 139 to solution means 151, an appearance position that appears visibly on the front side facing the player so as to perform a stunning action, and retreat from this appearance position makes it impossible to see from the front side A plurality of types of effect members imitating the effect mode, and a drive source that constitutes an operation mechanism together with the effect members and causes the effect members to reciprocate. And a standby accommodating portion that accommodates the drive source together with the effect member and holds the effect member at the standby position in the accommodated state.

  In this case, the rear unit can perform the rendering operation by reciprocating the rendering member (movable body, character doll, etc.). The effect member does not touch the eyes at the standby position, but when it appears at the appearance position, it exerts presence on the front side. The rear unit can accommodate all the components (mechanical mechanism, drive source, etc.) necessary for the operation of such an effect member, and also accommodates the effect member in this state.

(Solution 153)
In the solving means 139 to the solving means 152, the effect member includes a plurality of movable members which are arranged so as to overlap each other when viewed in the front-rear direction of the rear unit and which are connected to each other and relatively move.

  In this case, the effect member is not a flat existence but a three-dimensional existence having a thickness corresponding to the overlap of the movable members. For this reason, the production member has a sense of visual depth, and can thereby exert a large presence.

(Solution 154)
In the solving means 139 to 153, the visual approval means for allowing the effect member and the drive source to be visually recognized from the outside of the rear unit in a state where the effect member and the drive source are accommodated in the standby accommodating portion. Is further provided.

  As described so far, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the configuration of the operation mechanism has been enhanced in order to increase the presence of the production member and the fun of the movement. If the configuration is enhanced in this way, further convenience is required for repair, replacement, maintenance, and inspection opportunities. For this reason, even in the state in which the effect member is accommodated, it is possible to visually recognize it from the outside, thereby ensuring convenience at the occasion of repair, replacement, maintenance, and inspection.

(Solution 155)
In the solving means 154, the viewing authorization means is provided at a position which is an outer surface of the rear unit, and is formed by partitioning an outer periphery of the standby accommodating portion at this position, and outside the standby accommodating portion. A transparent member that is visible from the side is included.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably ensure the convenience of repair, replacement, maintenance, and inspection of the operating mechanism by a very simple method.

(Solution 156)
In the resolution means 154 or the resolution means 155, the view authorization means is provided at a position that is an outer surface of the rear unit, and a wall member that is formed by partitioning an outer periphery of the standby accommodating portion at the position, and the wall member And an open hole that opens the inside of the standby storage portion toward the outside of the rear unit.

  In this case, since the periphery of the standby accommodating portion is usually surrounded by the wall member, the operation mechanism is protected inside thereof. On the other hand, if repair, replacement, maintenance, or inspection of the operating mechanism is required, the inside can be actually confirmed through the opening hole, or tools can be accessed, so that workability is further improved.

(Solution 157)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 156, the rear unit is formed to open from the inside of the standby housing portion toward the appearance position, and through the opening, between the standby position and the appearance position. And a chamfered portion that is formed at an opening edge of the entrance and that has a downward slope from the appearance position to the standby position as viewed in the entrance direction of the effect member.

  If the standby housing portion is an aspect that protects the operating mechanism by a wall member or the like, the structure can withstand repeated or long-term use. On the other hand, the fact that the operating opportunity of the operating mechanism increases means that the frequency of mechanical troubles increases accordingly. For this reason, in order to reduce relative contact, friction, and sliding between members as much as possible due to an increase in operation opportunities, chamfered portions (not only flat surfaces but also curved surfaces) may be formed at the opening edges of the entrance / exit of the production members. Yes. Thereby, the damage by friction and contact between members at the time of long-term use is reduced significantly.

(Solution 158)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 157, the rear unit is formed to open from the inside of the standby accommodating portion toward the appearance position, and through the opening, between the standby position and the appearance position. The entrance and exit of the stage member and the entrance and exit of the stage member can be opened and closed, and the stage member is allowed to appear at the appearance position with the entrance open. And an opening / closing member that shields the effect member at the standby position in the closed state and that is continuous with a part of the outer surface of the rear unit.

  The configuration of the opening / closing member is similar to the configuration of the shielding member (may be the same or different). In this case, the entrance / exit of the standby accommodating portion is opened / closed by an openable / closable member, and when the effect member appears, the open / close member opens the entrance / exit, and when the effect member returns to the standby position, the open / close member closes the entrance / exit and opens the effect member. Shield. When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the presence of the opening / closing member is lost on the outer surface of the rear unit and is inconspicuous, so that it is difficult to predict the presence of a mechanism such as an operating mechanism.

(Solution 159)
In the solving means 158, the standby accommodating portion can accommodate the opening / closing member together with the effect member in a state where the opening / closing member closes the entrance / exit. In this case, the opening / closing member can be protected in addition to the effect member, and its presence can be well concealed.

(Solution means 160)
The solving means 159 further includes gripping permission means for allowing the standby accommodating portion to be gripped from the outside in a state where the opening / closing member is accommodated in the standby accommodating portion.

  As described above, even if the opening and closing member is accommodated in the standby accommodating portion, the advantage is great, but this time it becomes difficult to open the standby accommodating portion by human operation. There is also. For this reason, the openability of a standby | waiting accommodating part is ensured by employ | adopting the structure which can hold | grip this from the exterior, with the opening / closing member accommodated in the standby | waiting accommodating part. Such ease is particularly effective when it is necessary to open the standby accommodating portion in a situation where driving by an electric motor or the like cannot be performed.

(Solution 161)
In the solving means 160, the gripper permitting means is formed by notching a partition partitioning the periphery of the entrance / exit from the opening end in the entering direction, and a part thereof in a state where the opening / closing member is accommodated in the standby accommodating portion. It includes a notch that exposes.

  In this case, the function of the gripping permission means can be easily realized by simply performing a simple process on the partition wall of the standby housing portion.

(Solution means 162)
In the solving means 161, the standby accommodating portion is located on a front surface side of the partition partitioning the periphery of the doorway in a state where the rear unit is attached to the game board, and the front side is located on the game board. It has a front bulkhead that is superposed behind the unit when it is attached, and the cutout portion matches the shape of the edge of the front bulkhead viewed from the front side and the outer shape of the front unit. It is formed in the mode which makes it.

  Since notches are formed in the partition walls, this is used from a decorative point of view. Such an aspect is particularly effective when the positions of the entrance / exit of the standby housing portion and the outer surface of the front unit are close to each other.

(Solution 163)
In any one of the solving means 158 to the solving means 162, the operation mechanism is configured by connecting the plurality of movable members constituting the effect member, and receives the power from the drive source to perform the reciprocating operation of the effect member. The opening / closing operation of the entrance / exit can be realized by power from the drive source in a state in which the opening / closing member is connected to the link mechanism.

  In this case, the movement of the effect member is realized by the link mechanism, but since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is also realized, it is not necessary to prepare another power only for the opening / closing member.

(Solution 164)
In the solving means 163, the operating mechanism is swingably provided along the back surface of the game board, supports the first drive source at one of the main bodies extending from the swing center to both sides, and the other A swing member that slidably supports the effect member on the side, a first link mechanism that is installed on the swing member and that receives the power from the first drive source and slides the effect member, The entire attitude of the first link mechanism including the first drive source by operating by receiving power from a second drive source different from the first drive source and being connected to the swing member. And a second link mechanism for displacing.

  In this way, if the link mechanism is configured by two systems, further diversity is added to the operation of the effect member. Furthermore, since the swing member of the first link mechanism supports the effect member and the drive source (first drive source) on both sides of the swing center, the mass of the effect member and the mass of the drive source are supported. As a result, the overall swing can be kept smooth.

(Solution 165)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 164, the rear unit has a plurality of effect members that can appear at different appearance positions in the effect area, and the plurality of effect members are mutually connected. The operation mechanism is operated within a range not causing interference.

  Thus, if it is the aspect with which the production | presentation member is prepared in multiple numbers, the diversity in appearance will increase that much. For that reason, mechanical troubles can be prevented by operating the operating mechanism within a range where the production members do not interfere with each other. It should be noted that the movable range of the operation mechanism may be designed so as not to interfere with each other, or may be an aspect in which interference between the operation mechanisms is avoided in the control.

(Solution 166)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 165, the front unit is formed to protrude to the front side in the effect area, and a plurality of decorative bodies for decorating the outer surface of the front unit in a three-dimensional shape; By arranging the plurality of decorative bodies in a state of being separated in a direction along the front surface of the game board, a space existing between the decorative bodies is formed, and a game ball can roll in this space. And a guide passage for guiding the game ball from above to below the effect area.

  As described above, since the front unit is in an arrangement that is most easily visible to the player, an aspect in which some decorative body is arranged on the front side is preferable. Furthermore, since the decoration body is not simply finished as a decoration, but rather functions as a member for guiding the game ball, it is extremely rational and has an interesting aspect.

(Solution 167)
In the solving means 166, the front unit is formed to protrude from the surface of the plurality of decorative bodies arranged to form the guide passage into the guide passage, and the direction of the rolling destination with respect to the game ball And a braking protrusion for applying a braking force to the game ball by relatively colliding with each other. Such an aspect is extremely effective when the decorative body originally has an uneven shape.

(Solution 168)
In the solving means 166 or the solving means 167, the front unit is formed at a position between the plurality of decorative bodies arranged apart from each other, and a passage wall surface that divides the inner wall of the guide passage as viewed from the front side. A light-transmitting plate-like member that is disposed at a front surface position of the front unit so as to form the passage wall surface, and whose back surface is formed as an uneven braking surface having light diffusibility, and the plate-like member A light-emitting source that is disposed on the back side and transmits light to the front side through the plate-like member.

  In this case, the guide passage also serves as an effect area by decorative light emission, and the effect can be executed by causing the guide passage to emit light even when the game ball is not passing. In addition, the wall surface of the guide passage can exhibit different functions on both sides, which is a very rational aspect.

(Solution 169)
In the solving means 168, the braking surface of the plate-like member is formed in an uneven shape having visual uniformity with the surface shape of the decorative body.

  In this case, since the front unit is decorated with a decorative body, the game ball can be braked while maximizing the use of the decorative shape.

(Solution means 170)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 169, the front unit is formed at a position exposed on the front surface side, and a ball receiving portion that allows a game ball that has been launched to the game area to be temporarily retained; A discharge path formed at a position behind the surface and not exposed to the front surface side, which takes in and guides the game ball launched into the game area and allows the game ball to be discharged toward the ball receiving portion, and a game ball through the discharge path Guidance process visualizing means for making it possible to visually recognize the process of guiding the vehicle from the front side.

  The structure of the discharge passage is that it is as if the game ball has moved between two points instantaneously by passing it through a position where it is difficult to see (position not exposed to the front side) between the entrance and the exit. However, if it is difficult to see the game ball beyond the degree, it may be difficult to recognize that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage. For this reason, such a malfunction is eliminated by making it possible to visually recognize the process of the game ball passing through the discharge passage.

(Solution 171)
In the solving means 170, the guiding process visualizing means includes a front through hole formed through the outer surface of the front unit and leading from the front side to the discharge passage.

  There are various modes for visually recognizing the process in which the game ball is guided through the discharge passage. Here, a through hole (through hole) penetrating the outer surface of the front unit is employed. Since such a through hole can be realized by easy processing, it becomes a very practical aspect.

(Solution 172)
In the solution 171, the opening of the front through hole is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, it is not necessary to form a through-hole that is larger than necessary as long as the presence of the game ball is visually recognized. For this reason, there is an advantage that the through-hole can be formed with a minimum amount of processing, and further, the decoration of the front unit is hardly damaged.

(Solution 173)
In any one of the solution means 170 to the solution means 172, the guide process visualizing means constitutes a part of the outer surface of the front unit and constitutes a wall surface of the guide passage behind the outer surface. The outer surface member and the outer surface member are formed on the outer surface member, and the inside of the guide passage is invisible from the front surface side through the outer surface member by setting the reflectance of light from the front surface side higher than the back surface side, A semi-permeable membrane that makes it possible to visually recognize the process of guiding the game ball from the front side by projecting the outline of the game ball in the guide passage onto the outer surface member.

  Since the semipermeable membrane functions like a mirror due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the back side of the outer member, the inside of the guide passage is not normally seen through. However, since the outline is projected onto the semipermeable membrane when the game ball passes immediately behind the outer surface member, it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes.

(Solution 174)
In any one of the solution means 170 to the solution means 173, the front unit is formed at a position behind the outer surface and not exposed to the front surface side, and takes the game ball launched into the game area and guides it to a predetermined passage opening. And a passage guidance process visualizing means for allowing the process of guiding the game ball through the passage guidance path to be visually recognized from the front side.

  The above-described passage opening causes a certain determination trigger (for example, a normal symbol determination trigger) when a game ball passes through here. If such a passage opening is hidden in the back of the front unit, it is difficult to confirm whether or not a determination has actually been made. Therefore, even a state in which a game ball passes through the passage opening is visible. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the player to miss the trigger of determination related to his / her own interest, and the player can keep his / her concentration on the game.

(Solution 175)
In any one of the solving means 139 to 174, when the winning determination means is performed, the front unit variably displays predetermined determination information and displays the determination result by the winning determination means on the display unit. And a determination information display means (in this embodiment, a special symbol display 41) capable of stopping and displaying the determination information in a manner corresponding to the determination result by the winning determination means. Are formed on the outer surface of the front unit and are arranged at a position deeper than the outer surface of the front unit, and the light emitted from a predetermined light source. A light guide path that guides the light toward the light emitting region.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, when a trigger such as a start prize is generated, profit determination (for example, determination based on random number acquisition) is performed. Then, if the determination result is true, the player is given a benefit of shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, or changing the determination probability relatively high. In order to display such determination information, a light emitting region is formed on the outer surface of the front unit, and the variation display and stop display of the determination information are performed by lighting / flashing the light emitting region. At this time, the light emitting region itself is not a light source, but light emitting operation (lighting or blinking) is performed by guiding light emitted from another light source through a light guide path. The player can read the determination result from such a light emitting operation and know whether or not a profit is given to the player.

(Solution 176)
In the solving means 175, the light guiding path has a relatively high light shielding property on the inner wall so as to suppress the transmission of light to the outside of the light emitting region.

  As described above, since the determination information is a very important concern for the player, the display thereof must always be clear. For this reason, by suppressing the transmission (or leakage) of light from the light guide path to the outside of the light emitting region, it is possible to prevent the light emitting operation from being performed in a non-light emitting region.

(Solution 177)
In the solution unit 175 or the solution unit 176, the determination information display unit is a dark color material that is attached to the front unit and is located behind the light emitting region, and has the light guide path formed therethrough. It has a light guide component.

  When the light guiding path is formed inside the part, the light shielding property can be easily and reliably obtained by making the material of the part itself a dark color system (for example, black, brown, charcoal gray, etc.).

(Solution 178)
In any one of the solving means 175 to 177, the determination information display means can display the determination information by switching the light emitting region to a light emitting state or a non-light emitting state by turning on or off the light source. The light emitting region is shaped as a decorative shape whose contour shape simulates a design.

  As described above, when the determination information is displayed by the light emitting operation (lighting or extinguishing) of the light emitting area, in a extreme case, simple point light emission may be used. However, in this case, the decorative shape of the front unit may be wasted or the determination information may be mismatched. Therefore, a decorative shape imitating a pattern is also added to the contour shape of the light emitting area. Thereby, determination information can be displayed while utilizing the decorative shape of the front unit.

(Solution 179)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 178, the peripheral control means includes a drive board that drives a plurality of electric motors as the operation mechanism, and the interrupt of a fixed-time timer based on a command from the main control means. A sub-integrated board that transfers a control signal for controlling a plurality of electric motors to the drive board by electric communication means, and the sub-integrated board has a control voltage higher than a reference voltage that is a control voltage of the sub-integrated board A first level converter unit that converts the voltage into a predetermined voltage and outputs the voltage, and the drive substrate converts the predetermined voltage control signal output from the first level converter unit into a reference voltage that is a control voltage of the drive substrate. A second level converter unit that outputs the reference voltage control signal and the reference voltage control signal output by the second level converter unit. A signal format converter that converts a signal format into a switching signal based on the reference voltage control signal and outputs the switching signal, and a switching signal converted by the signal format converter is input and the plurality of signals in accordance with the switching signal A drive unit that drives an electric motor, and the control signal is synchronized with the transfer clock, a latch signal that causes conversion of the signal format in the signal format conversion unit, and the transfer clock. Drive data for driving a plurality of electric motors.

  In this gaming machine, a control signal for controlling a plurality of electric motors is transferred from the sub-integrated board to the driving board by an electric communication means based on a command from the main control means for controlling the progress of the game. The control signal is sequentially transmitted to the first level converter unit, the second level converter unit, the signal format conversion unit, and the driving unit. The first level converter unit that inputs the control signal converts the control signal into a predetermined voltage that is higher than the reference voltage that is the control voltage of the sub-integrated substrate, and outputs the second voltage converter unit that inputs the predetermined voltage control signal. Converts the predetermined voltage control signal into a reference voltage which is a control voltage of the driving substrate and outputs the reference voltage. The signal format converter that inputs the reference voltage control signal converts the signal format into a switching signal based on the reference voltage control signal and outputs the switching signal, and the drive unit that inputs the switching signal outputs the switching signal to the switching signal. In response, a plurality of electric motors are driven. At this time, since the control signal is transferred from the sub-integrated board to the driving board by the electric communication means every time the timer is interrupted, the control signal is easily affected by noise, and a control signal different from the regular one is transferred. There is a possibility. Therefore, a predetermined higher voltage than a reference voltage, which is a control voltage of each of the sub-integrated substrate and the drive substrate, between the connection between the first level converter unit and the second level converter unit, that is, between the sub-integrated substrate and the drive substrate. By converting the voltage of the control signal into a voltage, the control signal can be made resistant to noise, and a regular control signal can be reliably transferred from the sub-integrated board to the driving board. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence of noise when transferring the control signal.

(Solution 180)
The game machine according to Solution 179, wherein the drive board includes a pull-up unit that raises the control signal between the sub-integrated board and the board to the noise countermeasure voltage, and the second level converter part includes: The noise countermeasure voltage control signal, which is the output of the first level converter section pulled up by the pull-up section, is input.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the second level converter unit may be input with a noise control voltage control signal that is an output of the first level converter unit pulled up by a pull-up unit provided on the drive board. . In this way, when transferring the control signal from the sub-integrated board to the drive board, the voltage between the sub-integrated board and the drive board becomes a noise countermeasure voltage that is not easily affected by noise. It can be transferred reliably.

(Solution 181)
The gaming machine according to 180, further comprising a power supply device that supplies a common voltage to the main control board, the sub-integrated board, and the driving board, and the noise countermeasure voltage is the common voltage.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, a common voltage may be supplied to the main control means, the sub-integrated board, and the drive board from the power supply device. This is preferable because it is not necessary to newly create a dedicated voltage as a noise countermeasure voltage.

(Solution 182)
The gaming machine according to claim 181, wherein each of the main control unit, the sub-integrated board, and the drive board includes a reference voltage generation unit that generates a reference voltage lower than the common voltage from the common voltage.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means, the sub-integrated board, and the driving board have a reference voltage generation unit that generates a reference voltage that is a control voltage of each board lower than the common voltage from the common voltage supplied by the power supply device May be provided. In this way, various voltages necessary for each substrate can be generated from only the common voltage, and the design of the power supply system between the substrates can be made compact, which is preferable. Further, since the reference voltage of each substrate is generated based on this common voltage, it is expected to supply a stable common voltage to each substrate. Therefore, adopting a power supply device configured to supply a stable common voltage leads to noise countermeasures during transfer. Note that the reference voltage generated from the common voltage is valid only for the generated substrate and is not connected to another substrate. In this way, it is possible to suppress noise that enters the reference voltage.

(Solution 183)
183. A gaming machine according to any one of solution means 179 to 182, wherein the transfer clock is less than 500 kHz.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the transfer clock may be less than 500 kHz. When the control signal is affected by noise, it has been experimentally obtained that the influence time of the noise falls within about 1 μs.

(Solution 184)
184. The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 179 to 183, wherein the reference voltage control signal output from the second level converter unit is input to the drive board and a waveform of the reference voltage control signal is displayed. A waveform shaping unit that shapes and outputs the signal, and the signal format conversion unit receives the reference voltage control signal shaped by the waveform shaping unit and converts the signal format to a switching signal based on the reference voltage control signal. Convert and output.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the waveform of the control signal output by the second level converter unit may be shaped by the waveform shaping unit, and the shaped control signal may be converted into a switching signal by the signal format conversion unit. In this way, even if the control signal waveform is disturbed when converted by the first level converter unit and the second level converter unit, the disturbance can be corrected and a stable control signal waveform can be obtained as a signal. Can be sent to the format converter. Therefore, the signal format conversion unit can reliably convert the control signal into a switching signal without erroneous conversion.

(Solution 185)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 179 to 184, wherein the telecommunication means serially transfers drive data to the signal format converter in synchronization with a transfer clock, and the transferred drive data is: The signal is restored by the latch signal input to the signal format converter.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the telecommunication means serially transfers the drive data to the signal format converter in synchronization with the transfer clock, and the transferred drive data is restored by the latch signal input to the signal format converter. May be. In this way, for example, when connecting a plurality of signal format conversion units in a daisy chain (referred to as “daisy chain connection”), the drive data may be changed according to the number of signal format conversion units. Only one signal line needs to be transferred. Further, even if it is necessary to recreate the drive board due to increase / decrease in the number of electric motors, it is possible to cope with it by changing the drive data to be transferred.

(Solution 186)
The peripheral control means includes a drive board for driving a plurality of electric motors as the operation mechanism, and a control signal for controlling the plurality of electric motors for each interruption of a fixed timer based on a command from the main control board. A sub-integrated board that transfers data to the main control board, the sub-integrated board, and the driving board by using a telecommunication means to supply a common voltage to the main control board, the sub-integrated board, and the driving board. And a reference voltage generation unit that generates a reference voltage lower than the common voltage from the common voltage, and the sub-integrated board converts the control signal into the common voltage and outputs the first voltage converter The drive board includes a pull-up part that raises the control signal between the sub-integrated board and the board to the common voltage; and the first level controller. A second level converter unit that converts the common voltage control signal output by the barter unit into a reference voltage that is a control voltage of the driving substrate and outputs the reference voltage control, and the reference voltage control output by the second level converter unit A waveform shaping unit that shapes and outputs a waveform of the reference voltage control signal while inputting a signal, and the reference voltage control signal shaped by the waveform shaping unit is input and based on the reference voltage control signal A signal format converter that converts a signal format into a switching signal and outputs the signal; a drive unit that receives the switching signal converted by the signal format converter and drives the plurality of electric motors according to the switching signal; The control signal includes a transfer clock whose transfer timing is less than 500 kHz, and a signal format in the signal format conversion unit. A latch signal that causes conversion, and drive data that drives the plurality of electric motors that are synchronized with the transfer clock, and the electrical communication means sends the drive data to the signal format converter in synchronization with the transfer clock. Serial transfer is performed, and the transferred drive data is restored by a latch signal input to the signal format converter.

  In this gaming machine, a control signal for controlling a plurality of electric motors is transferred from the sub-integrated board to the driving board by an electric communication means based on a command from the main control means for controlling the progress of the game. The control signal is sequentially transmitted to the first level converter unit, the second level converter unit, the waveform shaping unit, the signal format conversion unit, and the driving unit. A common voltage is supplied to each substrate by a power supply device. A reference voltage, which is a control voltage for each substrate, is generated from the common voltage by the reference voltage generation unit, and becomes a voltage lower than the common voltage. The first level converter unit that inputs the control signal has the control signal output from the first level converter unit pulled up to a common voltage by the pull-up unit, and the second level converter unit that inputs this common voltage control signal The voltage control signal is converted into a reference voltage that is a control voltage of the driving substrate and output. The waveform shaping unit that inputs the reference voltage control signal shapes and outputs the waveform of the reference voltage control signal, and the signal format conversion unit that inputs the shaped reference voltage control signal receives the shaped reference voltage control signal. Based on the voltage control signal, the signal format is converted into a switching signal and output, and the drive unit that receives the switching signal drives a plurality of electric motors according to the switching signal. At this time, since the control signal is transferred from the sub-integrated board to the driving board by the electric communication means every time the timer is interrupted, the control signal is easily affected by noise, and a control signal different from the regular one is transferred. There is a possibility. Therefore, by converting the voltage of the control signal into a common voltage between the connection between the first level converter unit and the second level converter unit, that is, between the sub-integrated substrate and the drive substrate, the control signal is resistant to noise. Therefore, it is possible to reliably transfer a normal control signal from the sub-integrated board to the driving board. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence of noise when transferring the control signal.

(Solution 187)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 179 to 186, wherein a plurality of effect members driven by the electric motor, a reference portion provided on each of the plurality of effect members, and the reference portion at a predetermined time, respectively. Detection means for detecting, and failure determination means for determining whether or not a defect has occurred in the plurality of effect members, and the failure determination means has a failure when the reference unit is not detected by the detection means. On the other hand, when all the reference parts are detected, it is determined that no defect has occurred.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, a reference portion is provided for each effect member, and the reference portion is detected at a predetermined time by the detecting means. At this time, the failure determination means may determine that a failure has occurred when the detection means does not detect the reference portion, and determines that no failure has occurred when all the detection portions have been detected. In this way, since the reference portions of the effect member are respectively detected, it is possible to grasp the defect of the effect member based on this detection.

(Solution 188)
The gaming machine according to claim 187, further comprising drive data clearing means for clearing drive data of the plurality of electric motors, wherein the drive data clearing means is at least one of the plurality of effect members by the defect determination means. When it is determined that a failure has occurred, all the drive data of the plurality of electric motors is cleared.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined by the defect determining means that at least one of the plurality of effect members has a defect, the drive data clearing means clears all the drive data of the plurality of electric motors. Good. In this way, even if at least one of the effect members has a problem, all the effect members do not operate, so that the problem of the effect member can be promptly notified to the player or the game hall operator.

(Solution 189)
The gaming machine according to claim 187, further comprising drive data clearing means for clearing drive data of the plurality of electric motors, wherein the drive data clearing means has a defect in the plurality of effect members by the defect determination means. When it is determined that the motor is driven, the drive data of the electric motor that drives the effect member in which the malfunction occurs is cleared.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined by the defect determining means that a plurality of effect members are defective, the drive data clearing means clears the drive data of the motor that drives the effect member in which the defect has occurred. May be. By doing so, at least a normal performance member operates, and therefore, it is possible to prevent a player's willingness to play from being impaired. In addition, since the production member having a defect does not operate when the production member operates if it is normal, it is possible to notify the player or the game hall operator of which production member has a defect.

(Solution 190)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 187 to 189, wherein when the reference unit enters the detection region from outside the detection region in the detection region of the detection unit, the reference unit is History information creating means for creating the detected history information is provided, and the defect determining means determines defects of the plurality of effect members based on the history information created by the history information creating means.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the history information creating means creates the history when the reference portion is detected as history information when the reference portion enters the detection area from outside the detection area of the detection means. The defect determination means may determine the defect of the effect member based on the history information. In this way, erroneous detection due to noise can be prevented.

(Solution 191)
The gaming machine according to any one of solving means 187 to 190, wherein the reference portion is slightly larger than a detection area of the detection means.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the reference portion may be slightly larger than the detection area of the detection means. If it carries out like this, the false detection by the fine motion by the play of the machine mechanism which comprises an effect member can be prevented.

(Solution 192)
The gaming machine according to claim 190 or 191, further comprising fine adjustment means for moving the reference unit by a predetermined amount as fine adjustment, wherein the fine adjustment means has history information created by the history creation means being predetermined. When the above condition is satisfied, the position of the reference portion is moved by a predetermined amount as a fine adjustment.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, when the history information created by the history creating unit satisfies a predetermined condition, the fine adjustment unit may move the position of the reference portion by a predetermined amount for fine adjustment. In this way, for example, when the detection means continuously detects the reference portion three times as a predetermined condition, the reference portion has entered the detection region of the detection means, and only a predetermined amount is used as a fine adjustment. By further moving the reference portion, the reference portion can surely enter the detection area. Further, even if the reference portion is finely moved due to mechanical play of the structural member constituting the effect member, the reference member remains in the detection region, so that the reference portion of the effect member can be reliably detected. Furthermore, the reference portion of the effect member can be detected even under the influence of disturbance such as vibration caused by the operation of another effect member.

(Solution 193)
The gaming machine according to any one of solution means 187 to 192, wherein the detection means detects the reference portion at a predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the detection means may detect the reference portion of the movable body at a predetermined position. In this way, the detection position of the detection means is fixed at the predetermined position, so that the operating state of the effect member can be grasped on the basis of the predetermined position.

(Solution 194)
The gaming machine according to claim 193, further comprising a restoration unit that restores a reference portion of the plurality of presentation members to the predetermined position, wherein the restoration unit is not detected at the predetermined position by the detection unit. When there is a reference part of the member, the reference part of the effect member that is not detected is restored to the predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, when the reference part of the effect member is not detected by the detection means at the original position, the effect member whose reference part of the effect member is not detected by the recovery means may be restored to the original position. If it carries out like this, the reference part of all the production members will be in an original position, and will become a standard position of operation of an production member. And the operation of the effect member can be performed based on this original position. Moreover, even if the operation of the effect member stops halfway, the operation of the effect member can be repeatedly performed by restoring the reference portion of the effect member to the original position by the recovery means.

(Solution 195)
195. The gaming machine according to claim 194, wherein the restoration means stops the restoration of the effect member that is not detected to the predetermined position when there is an effect member for which the reference portion is not detected within the time limit from the detection means.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, when the reference portion of the effect member is not detected by the detection means within the time limit, the restoration to the original position by the restoration means may be stopped. For example, when the reference part is not detected by the detection means due to some trouble, it is assumed that the reference part of the effect member is not in the original position even though the reference part of the effect member is actually in the original position. It is restored to its original position. Finally, the effect member may be damaged due to contact with or interference with other structural members. For this reason, breakage of the production member can be prevented by providing the time limit.

(Solution 196)
The gaming machine according to any one of solving means 193 to 195, wherein the predetermined position is a respective original position serving as a reference for operating the plurality of effect members.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the predetermined position may be a respective original position serving as a reference for operating the effect member. For example, if the standby position of the effect member is set as the original position, the standby position is when the effect member is in the original position, which is preferable for grasping the operation state of the effect member.

(Solution 197)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 187 to 196, wherein the electric motor includes an encoder.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the electric motor may include an encoder. In this way, the encoder detects the amount of rotation accurately. For example, in the case of a stepping motor equipped with an encoder, the load torque temporarily increases as the stepping motor starts (at the start of rotation). However, the stepping motor can be rotated accurately by feeding back the detection signal of the encoder.

(Solution 198)
The gaming machine according to claim 197, wherein the electric motor is a four-phase stepping motor.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the electric motor may be a four-phase stepping motor. In this way, the stepping motor has controllability excellent in starting, stopping, and positioning, and can make the effect member have a complicated movement with a large effect.

(Solution 199)
The gaming machine according to Solution 198, wherein the four-phase stepping motor is not excited when stopped.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the four-phase stepping motor may not be excited when stopped. By so doing, heat generation of the stepping motor can be suppressed. Further, at this time, the stepping motor is free of torque and rotates freely. For example, when a mechanical mechanism is provided such that the effect member is fixed using the weight of the effect member, Since it is not necessary to excite the stepping motor when stationary, the power consumption can be reduced.

(Solution means 200)
The gaming machine according to any one of solution means 187 to 196, wherein the detection means is a photosensor.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the detection means may be a photo sensor. In this way, for example, in a transmissive photosensor, both elements face each other so that light from the light emitting element strikes the light receiving element, and is there a light shielding material between the light receiving element and the light emitting element? Detect whether or not. And it is used for position detection, an optical switch, etc., and an optical system is simple and low-cost. Moreover, if it is a light-shielding object, it can detect irrespective of a color, it is easy to attach and detection accuracy is also high.

(Solution 201)
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image as the game progresses, winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on a predetermined determination condition being satisfied, and the winning determination means In a gaming machine provided with a profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state that grants a profit to a player based on the determination result by, a constituent member constituting a part of the gaming machine, and the constituent member An effect device which is attached and forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the components as viewed from the player, a main control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game machine, and the image display Peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the means, and the rendering device displays an image from at least the rendering area toward the front side. And a stand-by position that appears to be visible on the front side facing the player to perform a stunning action and a standby position that becomes invisible from the front side by retreating from this appearance position. A plurality of types of effect members imitating a predetermined form, an operation mechanism together with the effect members, a drive source for reciprocating the effect members, and the drive source together with the effect members A standby storage section for storing and holding the effect member in the standby position in the storage state, wherein the main control means is the winning determination means, the profit grant state control means, and the profit grant state A basic display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of basic display patterns for recognizing whether or not the display is possible, and the basic display pattern from the basic display pattern storage means based on a determination result by the winning determination means. A basic display pattern selection means for selecting a command line, and a command signal transmission means for transmitting the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means to the peripheral control means as a command signal. An image storage means for storing a plurality of types of images, and a display control means for controlling display of the image stored in the image storage means on the basis of the command signal transmitted by the command signal transmission means. And a basic effect mode determining means for determining a basic effect mode according to the basic display pattern transmitted as the command signal, and a plurality of effect modes based on the basic effect mode determined by the basic effect mode determining means. Determined by the selective effect mode determining means and the selective effect mode determining means. A combined effect executing means for executing a combined effect obtained by combining the effect aspect with the basic effect aspect, and the display control means is an effect image corresponding to the combined effect executed by the combined effect executing means. A plurality of presentation modes are associated with the dependence mode so as to increase the degree of expectation of the big hit by the derivation display of the production mode. The first division mode divided into the determined independent mode, the built-in production mode associated so that the expectation degree of jackpot according to the production mode is high, and the single production mode related so as to be low And a third division mode that is divided into an accessory act effect mode that involves driving of the effect member and an accessory non-actual effect mode that does not involve driving of the effect member, The dependency mode has a plurality of types of performance modes that are associated so that the degree of expectation of jackpots according to the performance modes belonging to the dependency mode is different, and the plurality of types of performance modes are based on the derivation display of the performance mode. A high-level attitude effect mode associated with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot and a low expectation level aspect associated with a relatively low expectation level, wherein the single effect mode is an effect belonging to the single effect mode There are a plurality of types of performance modes that are associated so that the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on the mode is different, and the plurality of types of performance modes are associated with each other so that the degree of expectation of the jackpot by the derivation display of the performance mode is relatively high Including a low expectation aspect associated with a relatively low level and a relatively low expectation aspect, wherein the accessory act effect aspect is a bonus based on an effect aspect belonging to the accessory act effect aspect High-level attitudes that have a plurality of types of performance modes associated with different expectations, and that the plurality of types of performance modes are associated with each other so that the degree of expectation of jackpot by the drive for deriving the performance mode is relatively high Including at least one of the plurality of high-expected performance aspects, including a low-expected degree aspect associated with the effect aspect and a low expectation aspect, which is combined with the basic effect aspect. A gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to execute a notice effect that does not cause the player to lose interest, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine of the state which open | released the main body frame and the front frame. It is a front view which shows a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is the front view which showed the rear unit independently. It is the front view which showed the state which removed the cover member from the rear unit. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the right side seeing from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is detail drawing of the character body located upwards from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the left side seeing from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is two perspective views which divided and showed the state which combined the front unit and the rear unit mutually. It is the perspective view which showed the front unit and the rear unit from the angle different from FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a front unit. It is the figure which expanded and showed the right side edge part of the front unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in the left side edge part of a front unit. It is the perspective view which showed the overlapping relationship of a front unit and a rear unit. In FIG. 22, it is a top view of the operation | movement mechanism containing the cross section which follows XX. It is the figure which expanded and showed the lower edge part of the front unit. It is a block diagram which shows a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. It is a block diagram of the 1st electrical decoration control board. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by the main control board. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process performed with a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process used as the subroutine of a special symbol fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the change display pattern setting process used as the subroutine of a special symbol change process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation | variation display pattern selected by the main control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the form of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a notice effect and a reach effect. It is a flowchart which shows the reset process performed with a subintegrated board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with a subintegrated board. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed with a sub integrated board. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception end interruption process performed with a subintegrated board. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process used as the subroutine of a reset process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol setting process used as the subroutine of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the notice selection process used as the subroutine of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the advanced type advance notice selection process used as the subroutine of an advance notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the development type notice pattern for daytime backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the development notice pattern for night backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure which shows an evolution type notice pattern. It is a list figure which shows the comment notice pattern selected by a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a comment notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the intense heat notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the intense heat warning pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure showing an intense heat notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the lightning bolt notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the lightning warning pattern for daytime backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the lightning warning pattern for night backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure showing a lightning bolt notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the mini character notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the 1st mini character notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the 2nd mini character notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a mini character notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the branch production notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the branch production announcement pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a branch production notice pattern. It is a table | surface figure which shows the branch accessory effect notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a branch character effect notice notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control process used as the subroutine of effect control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the sound determination table which determines a sound output aspect. It is a flowchart which shows the sound change determination process used as the subroutine of a sound control process. It is a flowchart which shows the button input process used as the subroutine of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the button notice selection process used as the subroutine of a button input process. It is a list figure which shows the button notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list figure which shows the button notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list figure which shows the button notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list figure which shows a button notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor scheduler starting process for 16 ms. It is a table which shows a stepping motor scheduler. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor scheduler starting process for 2 ms. It is a flowchart which shows a stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor scheduler operation | movement process for 2ms. It is an allocation figure of the 1st excitation data and the 2nd excitation data. It is a flowchart which shows an excitation data clear process at the time of abnormality. It is a flowchart which shows an excitation data transmission process. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the various signals in CPU of a sub integration board | substrate when transmitting 1st excitation data and 2nd excitation data. It is a time chart which shows the mode of the various signals in the serial parallel conversion part of the 1st electrical decoration control board when receiving 1st excitation data and 2nd excitation data. It is a flowchart which shows a stepping motor process. It is a flowchart which shows a character body (Franken) abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a character body (Dracula) abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a shielding member (Dracula) abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a character body (wolf man) abnormality determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine with the main body frame and the front frame opened.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but a game medal is used as a game medium, and a symbol information string (for example, a plurality of reel strings with a plurality of symbol information attached thereto). ) Is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable information control means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information is provided, and the variable information is started to be displayed based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The present invention can also be applied to a spinning-type game machine (slot machine) that stops the change display of symbol information based on the operation of an operating means (for example, a stop button) or the passage of a predetermined time. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine (parrot) in which a pachinko machine that performs a game of a rotary game machine using a game ball as a game medium and a rotary game machine are fused.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a game board 4 (constituent member), a front frame 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed in a vertically rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left and right frame members, and has a lower plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the lower front side of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to the front side of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. Further, the main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 8, the game board mounting frame 9, and the mechanism mounting frame 10 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame 8 formed on the front side of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island, the side that can be visually recognized by the player is the front side, and the opposite side (for example, the main body frame 3 side with respect to the front frame body 8) is the front side. The rear side.

  A game board 4 is attached to the game board mounting frame 9 integrally formed at the rear part of the front frame body 8 so as to be detachable and replaceable from the front. A guide rail 11 having an outer rail and an inner rail is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 4, and a game area 12 is defined inside the guide rail 11. A low-frequency speaker 14 is mounted via a speaker mounting plate 13 near one side of the front lower portion of the front frame 8 positioned below the game board mounting frame 9. A launch rail 15 that guides a game ball toward the launch path of the game board 4 is attached to the upper portion in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 8 in an inclined manner. On the other hand, a lower front member 16 is attached to a lower portion in the lower area of the front surface of the front frame body 8. A lower pan 17 is provided substantially at the center of the front surface of the lower front member 16, and an operation handle 18 is provided closer to one side.

  A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is provided on the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (front frame body 8) opposite to the side where the hinge mechanism 7 is provided. A locking device 19 having a function of locking the front frame 5 is attached. The locking device 19 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 21 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 20 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the main body frame 3 in a closed state, and an open side of the front frame 5. There are provided a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 23 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 22 provided on the rear surface and lock the front frame 5 in a closed state. Then, the key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 24 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released. When the key is locked and the key is rotated in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 23 and the closing tool 22 of the front frame 5 is released, and the front frame 5 is unlocked. ing. The front end portion of the cylinder lock 24 is exposed to the front surface of the lower front member 16 through the front frame 8 and the lower front member 16 so that the unlocking operation can be performed by inserting a key from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Are arranged.

  In this embodiment, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction, the main body frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2, and the key is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. Either the main body frame 3 or the front frame 5 can be unlocked only by changing the direction of the rotation operation so that the front frame 5 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3. The locking device 19 also locks the main body frame locking hook 21 so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is not released by an external operation other than the key when the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state. Further, a lock mechanism for locking 21 is provided. When the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state, the main body frame locking hook 21 is locked by the lock mechanism, and further, the main body frame locking hook 21 is recessed away from the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 (front frame 8). By disposing in the above position, the main body frame locking hook 21 is operated by a wire inserted from the gap to prevent an unauthorized attempt to unlock the main body frame 3.

  A front frame 5 is attached to one side of the front surface of the main body frame 3 by a hinge mechanism 25 so as to be opened and closed forward. The front frame 5 includes a door body frame 26, a side decoration device 27, an upper plate 28, an acoustic lighting device 29, and operation buttons 38 (operation means). The door main body frame 26 is formed of a pressed metal frame member, and is formed to have a size that covers a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 8 to the upper edge of the lower front member 16. A substantially circular opening window 30 through which the game area 12 of the game board 4 can be seen through from the front is formed at substantially the center of the door body frame 26. Further, a window frame 31 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 30 is provided on the rear side of the door body frame 26, and a transparent plate 32 is attached to the window frame 31.

  In this embodiment, the gaming area 12 formed on the game board 4 is formed by disposing the cylinder lock 24 below the game board 4 and thinning the locking device 19 arranged on the right side of the game board 4. Can be expanded more than before, and further, by providing large-sized character bodies 150, 152, and 154, which will be described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in viewing. Further, by enlarging the game area 12, even if an effect device 40 described later is arranged in the central portion of the game area 12, the start prize opening 45 or the electric start prize prize opening 46 arranged below the effect apparatus 40 is provided. It doesn't make it difficult to guide the game ball. In addition, the opening window 30 of the front frame 8 is enlarged in accordance with the enlargement of the game area 12, and the rigidity of the front frame 8 is reduced. However, the front frame 8 that integrally forms the upper plate 28 is used. Thus, a decrease in rigidity of the front frame 8 is suppressed.

  On the front side of the door main body frame 26, an upper plate 28 is provided at the lower portion around the opening window 30, a side decoration device 27 is mounted on the left and right sides, and an acoustic decoration device 29 is mounted on the upper portion. An operation button 38 is provided on the left side of the upper plate 28. The side decoration device 27 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 33 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 33 in the vertical direction, and a lens 34 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 29 includes a transparent cover body 35, a speaker 36, a speaker cover 37, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  Next, various components provided in the game area 12 partitioned on the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board 4.

  An effect device 40 (effect device) is disposed in the central portion of the game area 12. The stage device 40 includes a special symbol display 41 that displays a variety of special symbols by lighting a plurality of light emitters, and a predetermined determination condition is established by lighting the plurality of light emitters (start winning award 45 or electric start winning prize). It consists of a special symbol memory lamp 54 that displays the number of memories (starting memory number) that the game ball has won in the mouth 46 but the variation of the special symbol has not yet started, and three symbols of left, middle and right A front unit 140 and a rear unit 142, which will be described later, are provided with a liquid crystal display 116 (image display means) having a display area 42 that displays various types of decorative symbols in a variable manner and displays various effects. Further, effect lamps 44 a and 44 b are attached to the right side portion of the effect device 40. These effect lamps 44a and 44b (light emitting areas) are turned on in accordance with the effect display by the display area 42.

  Below the stage device 40, a start winning opening 45 and an electric start winning opening 46 having a pair of opening and closing blades 47 below are arranged. When the display result of the normal symbol display 50 is “winning”, the electric start winning prize port 46 has a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times (for example, once in 0.5 seconds in the normal state, or It is controlled so that it is released 3 times in 0.8 seconds during the probability fluctuation state. In this embodiment, the starting winning port 45 can always win a game ball from above, and the electric starting winning port 46 is blocked by the starting winning port 45 at the top, and the open / close wing 47 is closed. In this case, the game ball is in a state where it is impossible to win a prize. Therefore, the game ball can be won only when the opening / closing wing 47 is in the open state.

  In addition, the game balls won in the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 are detected by start opening sensors 55a and 55b (only the reference numerals are shown in FIG. 25), and based on these detections (predetermined determination conditions are met). A predetermined number (for example, three when winning at the start winning opening 45 (detected by the start opening sensor 55a) and four when winning (detected by the starting opening sensor 55b) at the electric start winning opening 46) is paid out. The special symbol display 41 permits the variation display of the special symbol (the decorative symbol variation display in the display area 42). It is to be noted that when a game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 and the game ball is detected by the start opening sensors 55a and 55b, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state to be described later is given. When the determination random number is extracted and it is determined that the big hit gaming state is given, the display result of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is determined to be a hit (specific display mode). Also, the jackpot determination random number extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and is detected by the start opening sensor 55 during the change of the special symbol, is a predetermined number ( For example, up to four) can be stored, and the stored number (starting stored number) is displayed by turning on the special-purpose memory lamp 54 composed of a plurality of (for example, four) light emitters. The special figure memory lamp 54 is disposed below the effect device 40. Further, in this embodiment, two start winning ports, a start winning port 45 and an electric start winning port 46, are provided as winning ports for which the variation display of special symbols is permitted. The number of installation is not limited to these. For example, only one of the start winning opening 45 and the electric starting winning opening 46 may be provided.

  In this embodiment, three game balls are paid out to the start winning opening 45 when winning, and four game balls are paid out to the electric start winning opening 46 when winning. Since the start winning opening 45 can always win a game ball from above, if there are too many payouts for winning a game ball, it will be a loss for the hole. On the other hand, the electric start winning opening 46 is controlled to extend the opening time and the number of opening times of the open wings 47 in a short time state to be described later, and the winning probability to the electric starting winning opening 46 increases. If the amount of game balls consumed in the game is large and the number of game balls to be paid out is too small, it is a loss for a player who does not want to reduce the number of game balls. In consideration of these game balances, the number of payouts for each of the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 is set.

  On the left side of the game area 12, a normal symbol display 50 is provided for variably displaying normal symbols by lighting and blinking of the light emitter. Further, below the normal symbol display 50, a light emitter is turned on according to the gaming state (in this embodiment, the light emitter is turned on in red in the probability variation state, and the light emitter is turned on in green in the short-time state. A game state lamp 51 that is turned off in a normal state is attached. Below the normal symbol display 50, a left gate having a gate switch 53a and a right gate having a gate switch 53b are provided. When the game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a or the gate switch 53b based on the game ball passing through the left gate or the right gate, the normal symbol display 50 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. That is, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 50 is permitted in accordance with the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b. When a game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b, a normal random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol is extracted, and a determination to hit the normal symbol is made. In some cases, the normal symbol display result on the normal symbol display 50 is a hit. In addition, the normal random number per normal symbol extracted based on the fact that the game ball passes the left gate or the right gate during the normal symbol variation and is detected by the gate switches 53a and 53b is a predetermined number (for example, Up to four), and the number of memories is displayed by turning on the general memory lamp 56 composed of a plurality of (for example, four) light emitters. The general memory lamp 56 is arranged on the left side of the game area 12.

  A large winning opening 60 having an opening / closing plate 62 that opens and closes a horizontally long rectangular entrance is disposed below the electric start winning opening 46. The special winning opening 60 includes a solenoid 63 serving as an opening / closing drive source for the opening / closing plate 62 and a count sensor 64 (both are shown only with reference numerals in FIG. 25). Note that the game balls won in the grand prize opening 60 are detected by the count sensor 64, and based on this detection, a predetermined number (for example, a larger number of game balls than when the game balls are won in the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46) (for example, , 14) game balls are paid out. At the bottom of the gaming area 12 below the big winning opening 60, there is provided an out opening 48 through which the gaming balls that have flowed down the gaming area 12 and have not won any winning openings or winning devices are taken in. . Four winning openings 66a to 66d are provided on the left and right sides of the starting winning opening 45, the electric starting winning opening 46 and the large winning opening 60. It should be noted that when a game ball wins a winning opening 66a-66d, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out. In addition, an electric decoration lamp 49 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) is attached to the gaming area 12 so that lighting and blinking are controlled according to the gaming state.

  The game realized by various winning devices provided on the game board 4 will be described. The game is launched by a launch device (not shown) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and passes through the launch rail 15 and the guide rail 11. The game ball released to the upper part of the region 12 flows down toward the out port 48 while colliding with the obstacle nail or the like in the game region 12. When a game ball flowing down the game area 12 passes through the left gate or the right gate and is detected by the gate switches 53a and 53b, the normal symbol display 50 displays the variation of the normal symbol (the light emitters are green and red). Lit alternately). The normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 50 stops after a predetermined period of time, and when the display result of the normal symbol at the time of the stop is “winning” (the illuminant is turned off in green), the electric start winning award 46 open / close blades 47 are opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times (for example, once in 0.5 seconds in the normal state). On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol display 50 is “losing” (the illuminant is red and the lighting is stopped), the open / close wing 47 is not opened, so that the game ball cannot be won at the electric start winning opening 46. However, the start winning opening 45 is in a state where a game ball can be won.

  In addition, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and the game ball is detected by the start opening sensor 55, the special symbol display 41 can start the variation display of the special symbol. (For example, when the game is not in a big hit game and when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not being displayed), the special symbol display 41 starts displaying the special symbol, and the liquid crystal display 116 displays the decoration. The symbol variation display is started. The special symbols and decorative symbols change display is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined period, and the special symbols at the time of the stop are in a specific display mode (specific display mode (a combination of lighting of multiple light emitters that will be a big hit: jackpot symbol)) In some cases, the decorative symbol stop symbol (when all the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped) also has a specific display mode (the same decorative symbol combination: jackpot symbol). "Status)" control is started. That is, the open / close plate 62 of the big prize opening 60 falls to the front side to open the entrance, and the big prize opening 60 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) has been won. To maintain Then, after the special winning opening 60 is closed by the standing of the opening / closing plate 62, a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. A control for repeating an open / close cycle (hereinafter also referred to as a round “R”) 15 times is executed. In this way, when controlled to the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening 60 is opened, and the starting winning opening 45 or the electric starting winning opening 46 is obtained by winning the game ball in the opened big winning opening 60. Since it is possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a shorter time than to win a game ball (giving profit), it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  In this embodiment, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the left decorative symbol 80a (for example, after 6800 msec from the start of variation) → the right decorative symbol 80c → the middle decorative symbol 80b (for example, after the variation starts) It is controlled to stop in the order of (stop after 8000 msec). The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a state in which all of the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by starting the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols and stopping the middle decorative symbol 80b. A combination of symbols.

  In addition, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a special display mode (a combination of lighting of a plurality of light emitters that are probable big hits) among the specific display modes, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is also a special display mode ( The combination of the same specific symbols: Probability variation jackpot symbol), after controlling to the jackpot gaming state, the probability of the next jackpot gaming state increases (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is 1/70, the probability variation state Otherwise, 1/490). That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state (special game state). In the probability variation state, the control for increasing the probability that the result of the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 50 is “win”, and the result of the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 50 is “hit”. Control for extending the opening time of the opening and closing blades 47 opened based on the control is also performed.

  In addition, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a non-special display result (a combination of lighting of a plurality of illuminants that become a non-probable big hit) among the special display results among the specific display results, the decoration symbol is stopped. The symbol also becomes a non-special display result (the same non-specific symbol combination: non-probable big hit symbol), and after controlling to the big hit gaming state, the special symbol indicator 41 is used a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times). Until the special symbol variation display is executed, the control for increasing the probability that the normal symbol variation display result on the normal symbol display unit 50 is “hit”, and the normal symbol variation display result “ Time-shortening control such as extension control of the opening time of the opening / closing blade 47 that is opened based on the fact that it has been “hit” is executed. In the short time state, the probability of winning the electric start winning slot 46 increases until the special symbol display is executed a predetermined number of times by the special symbol display 41, and the number of executions of the special symbol change display in a predetermined period is increased. Can be increased, so that the player is in an advantageous state. In the probability variation state described above, in addition to the time-shortening control, the probability that the normal symbol variation display result is “hit” on the normal symbol display 50 is increased, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-shortening state. It becomes a state. The normal state is a state other than the probability fluctuation state and the short time state described above.

  FIG. 4 shows the game board 4 in a state where it is disassembled into components. However, since only the components necessary for the explanation are taken up here, the illustration of some components is omitted as appropriate.

  The effect device of the present embodiment is composed of two units that are divided forward and backward with the game board 4a interposed therebetween. Specifically, the front unit 140 is located on the front side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a from the front side. Conversely, the rear unit 142 is located on the back side of the game board 4a, and the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a from the back side.

  In the game board 4a, a through hole 144 is formed by punching the plywood material in the thickness direction. The through hole 144 is greatly opened from the center of the game area 12 to a slightly higher range, and the opening shape substantially matches the outer shape of the front unit 140.

  The front unit 140 is formed in such a shape that the second half portion (connecting insertion portion) facing the game board 4a is completely fitted into the through hole 144 when viewed in the front-rear direction. This part is attached to the game board 4a in a state of being fitted in the through hole 144. In the rear half of the front unit 140, the thickness of the front half in the front-rear direction is set to be almost the same as the thickness of the game board 4a. For this reason, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the half part thereafter is flush with the back surface of the game board 4a (so-called flush state).

  Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a boss 140a that protrudes rearward from the second half portion (insertion connecting portion). A total of three bosses 140a are formed at the upper position of the front unit 140 and two at the lower position (only one is shown in FIG. 4), all of which are game boards through the through holes 144. When inserted from the front side of 4a, it protrudes further rearward from the back side of game board 4a.

  On the other hand, with the front unit 140 attached to the game board 4a, the front half of the front unit 140 protrudes to the front side of the game board 4a. The thickness of the front half portion is set to be substantially the same as that of the guide rail 11 or the like, for example. For this reason, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the front half of the front unit 140 projects forward from the board surface in the game area 12, thereby guiding and guiding the flow of the game ball.

  On the other hand, the rear unit 142 on the back side is formed in a substantially flat front surface facing the back surface of the game board 4a, and is attached to the game board 4a with the flat front surface as an attachment surface 142a. When the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a, the attachment surface 142a is in close contact with the back surface of the game board 4a (however, a gap due to manufacturing error or distortion is allowed).

  Further, although the mounting surface 142a is not fitted into the through hole 144, a part of the mounting surface 142a faces the through hole 144. That is, when the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4 a, the attachment surface 142 a partially projects inside the through hole 144 and is exposed to the front side of the game board 4 a through the through hole 144. However, since this exposed part is covered with the front unit 140, it is not directly visible to the player.

  Further, the rear unit 142 has three boss holes 142b corresponding to the bosses 140a of the front unit 140. When the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are attached to the game board 4a from the front and rear, 3 The bosses 140a reach the rear unit 142 through the through holes 144 and are inserted into the corresponding boss holes 142b. In this state, the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are positioned relative to each other.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a display unit is further attached to the game board 4 from behind the rear unit 142. The display unit is configured as a unit in which the liquid crystal display 116 and the second illumination control board 113 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) are integrated, and plays a role of displaying a stunning image on the screen. . When the game board 4 is completed, the screen of the display unit (display area 42) can be viewed from the front side through the through hole 144.

  FIG. 5 shows the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 connected to each other. The front unit 140 plays a role of giving a player a certain visual effect / impact from modeling / decoration applied to the outer surface thereof. In addition, such modeling / decoration of the front unit 140 is coupled with the design of the decorative sheet (cell board) affixed to the front surface of the game board 4a so that the player can clearly recognize the model and game concept of the pachinko machine 1. There is an effect. At the same time, in the present embodiment, the front unit 140 is attached to a substantially central position of the game area 12, so that an effect area in which an effect operation is performed is formed. In the present embodiment, in this effect area, for example, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of an LED, an image display effect by a liquid crystal display, an operation effect by a movable accessory, and the like are performed.

  Further, the central portion of the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 is opened in a rectangular shape so that the above-described display unit can be visually recognized. Therefore, the display area 42 is formed in this opening portion. In the display area 42, an effect is displayed by displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 116.

  The overall appearance of the front unit 140 is formed with a “monster house” as a motif. The “monster house” here is a building where the characters (comic characters imitating imaginary monsters) that appear in creative stories, for example, are inhabited, and the appearance is Western-style bricks It has become. When the front unit 140 is regarded as a “monster house”, the roof decoration portion 140b corresponding to the roof has a shape that widens toward the left and right. In addition, the roof decoration portion 140b serves to distribute the game balls flowing down from above the game area 12 to the left and right (so-called armor cover).

  A comical character body (monster) 140c is arranged immediately below the roof decoration portion 140b on the left side. The character body (monster) 140c corresponds to the character who becomes the master of the “monster house” in the above story, and is visually designed to imitate a human boy. In terms of design, this character body (monster) 140c looks like a wall that penetrates from the attic and looks into both face and both hands.

  Further, the center of the roof decoration portion 140b swells in a dome roof shape, and a window decoration portion 140d imitating a “roof window” is disposed immediately below the roof decoration portion 140b. The window decoration portion 140d can be easily recognized as a window in appearance by adopting transparent parts. Further, an LED 140l is mounted on an LED board (not shown) at the back of the window decoration part 140d. Therefore, the window decoration part 140d performs a light emission effect by turning on and blinking the LED 140l. The LED board is built in the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, the window decoration portion 140d and the LED 140l function as an effect lamp 44a (see FIG. 3). Thus, in this embodiment, the LEDs 140l and 140m are provided as predetermined light sources.

  Another spherical guiding member 140e is attached to the front side of the window decoration portion 140d so as to obliquely close the “roof window”. The ball guiding member 140e is arranged so as to be braided together with the other decorative member 140f on the front side of the window decorative portion 140d. Each of the ball guiding member 140e and the decorative member 140f has a three-dimensional pattern with a wood grain on the front surface.

  The left and right side edges of the front unit 140 extend downward so as to surround both sides of the display area 42, and the right edge of the front unit 140 is wider than the left edge. The roof decoration portion 140b extends from the upper portion of the front unit 140 to the left and right side edges, so that the outer edges of the left and right side edges are outside the game area by the roof decoration portion 140b. 12 (not shown in FIG. 5).

  A wall decoration body 140g is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 along the inside of the roof decoration portion 140b. Further, another wall decoration body 140h is attached to the right edge portion from the upper edge to the right edge of the display area 42, and there is a fixed space between the wall decoration body 140h and the previous wall decoration body 140g. A gap is secured. These wall decorations 140g and 140h are each formed into a shape in which bricks are stacked, and the atmosphere as a “monster house” is created by the formation of these wall decorations 140g and 140h.

  On the other hand, a window decoration portion 141 is formed on the left edge of the front unit 140 so as to be located inside the roof decoration portion 140b. The window decoration portion 141 is a decoration as a “light window” leading to the interior of the “monster house”.

  On the right edge of the front unit 140, a sphere guide passage 148 is formed in the space between the wall decorations 140g and 140h. The ball guide passage 148 extends downward from the upper side of the display area 42 so as to bypass the right side, and is opened toward the game area 12 below. During the game by the pachinko machine 1, the game ball that has flowed down from above the front unit 140 is guided by the ball guide member 140e and sent into the ball guide passage 148.

  A wall surface member 140 i is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 at a position behind the ball guide passage 148 as viewed from the front side. The wall member 140i is light transmissive by employing transparent parts (plate-like members), and an LED 140m is mounted on an LED substrate (not shown) at a position behind the wall member 140i. For this reason, in the ball guide passage 148, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of the LED 140m is performed similarly to the window decoration portion 140d described above. In the present embodiment, the wall surface member 140i and the LED 140m function as an effect lamp 44b (see FIG. 3).

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, the wall surface member 140i has a light diffusion lens cut (for example, prism cut, diamond cut, etc.) on the back surface thereof. On the other hand, the front surface of the wall surface member 140i is processed into a shape having visual uniformity with the surface shape of the wall decorations 140g and 140h. Specifically, since the wall decorations 140g and 140h have a shape in which bricks are stacked, protrusions simulating each brick are also formed on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i.

  The shape, function, and the like of the ball guide passage 148 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  A ball receiving stage 140j is formed at the lower edge of the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, not only the front unit 140 but also a ball receiving stage 142c is formed at the lower edge of the rear unit 142, and both the ball receiving stages are combined in a state where the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined. 140j and 142c are integrated. The ball receiving stages 140j, 142c are divided into upper, middle, and lower three stages. Of these, the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c are formed in the rear unit 142, and the lower ball receiving stage 140j is formed in the front unit 140. Yes. Among these, the upper ball receiving stage 142c is located at the innermost position, and the position is lowered in this order from the middle ball receiving stage 142c to the lower ball receiving stage 140j.

  In relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j, the rear unit 142 is formed with a guide passage 142d. The guide passage 142d is lowered from the center position of the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c, and to the front side. It bends and extends. Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a discharge port 140k of the guide passage 142d at the center position of the lower edge thereof.

  The functions of the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j and the guide passage 142d are substantially the same as those known. That is, the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j roll the game ball so as to swing left and right on the upper surface thereof, and the destination of the game ball cannot be predicted. In this process, the game ball falls to the lower stage or is inserted into the guide passage 142d, so that the game is interesting by the movement of the game ball in the meantime. When the game ball is inserted into the guide passage 142d, the game ball is discharged directly from the lower discharge port 140k, so that it is easy to win the start winning port 45 (see FIG. 3).

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, a warp passage is formed in the front unit 140 in relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j. The warp passages are respectively formed on the left and right side edges of the front unit 140, and both play a role of guiding the game ball to the ball receiving stage 142c. In this embodiment, the form and arrangement of the warp passage are different on the left and right, and the specific form, arrangement, etc. will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  FIG. 6 shows the outer shape of the rear unit 142 in detail. Unlike the front unit 140, most of the rear unit 142 is hidden behind the game board 4a. However, since the part of the ball receiving stage 142c and the part surrounding the display area 42 are exposed to the front side and directly touch the player's eyes, there are decorations similar to the front unit 140. Has been.

  First, a decoration member 142e is disposed above and above the upper ball receiving stage 142c, and this decoration member 142e extends to the left and right so as to define the lower edge of the display area 42. . In addition, the decorative member 142e is formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row, so that the decoration and the visual unity of the front unit 140 are maintained. The decorative member 142e is divided into left and right portions with the guide passage 142d.

  In addition, a decoration member 142f is also disposed on the left portion of the upper edge of the display area 42. The decorative member 142f is also formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row when viewed from the front, but is further formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in the depth direction.

  With respect to the other periphery of the display area 42, the same decoration (decoration simulating the arrangement of bricks) is applied to the right position of the decoration member 142f, and the same decoration is applied to the right edge. ing. On the other hand, the left edge of the display area 42 is slightly different from the others and is decorated like a wooden door. Such a decoration of the rear unit 142 is not so conspicuous because it is located just behind the front unit 140 when viewed from the front, but the player changes the direction and angle of the line of sight to change the display area 42. If the periphery is looked into, the decoration of the rear unit 142 is clearly visible. The decoration of the rear unit 142 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Next, an operation mechanism that is a central element in the rear unit 142 will be described.

  As shown by a broken line in FIG. 6, the rear unit 142 has built-in performance action bodies that can appear and disappear in the display area 42, that is, character bodies 150, 152, and 154. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the periphery of the display area 42 in a state of being located at the back (inside of the rear unit 142) from the above-described attachment surface 142a. It moves from the position toward the display area 42 and appears on the front side of the display screen.

  The rear unit 142 is provided with three cover members 142g at positions corresponding to the mounting surface 142a. The cover member 142g is made of a transparent (or translucent) resin plate having a thin wall thickness (for example, about 2 mm), and the mounting surface 142a is configured from the front surface of these cover members 142g. In FIG. 6, the outer shapes of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are indicated by broken lines. However, since the cover member 142g has transparency, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 (and their attached mechanisms) are actually used. It is visible through the front side.

  FIG. 7 shows a state where the cover member 142 g is removed from the rear unit 142. The three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are arranged so as to surround the display area 42, and one character body 150, 152, and 154 are positioned above, on the right side, and on the left side, respectively.

  Each of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is designed in a different form. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 all resemble some kind of “monster” appearing in a famous mysterious novel, but are visually designed to be deformed. That is, the character body (Franken) 150 located on the right side of the display area 42 is imitating a “Frankenstein monster”, but the expression feels as if it is missing somewhere. The character body (Dracula) 152 located above the display area 42 is similar to the “Vampire Dracula”, but has an impression that it seems somewhat weak from the face. The character body 154 located on the left side of the display area 42 is similar to a “wolf man (man who transforms from a human figure into a wolf)”. Although not shown in detail in FIG. 7, the expression of the character body (wolf man) 154 is mascot-like caress.

  The rear unit 142 is formed with accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 (standby accommodating portions) corresponding to the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154, respectively. The storage unit 156 is provided with a photo sensor 150n, the storage unit 158 is provided with photo sensors 152n and 153n, and the storage unit 160 is provided with a photo sensor 154n. The rear unit 142 has a structure that is entirely covered with the casing 162, and the three accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 are in a state of being partitioned and formed inside the casing 162.

  The casing 162 has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The front surface of the casing 162 is largely open, but the back surface is closed by a back wall 162a. The outer edge of the casing 162 is surrounded by a side wall 162b, and the side wall 162b is formed so as to rise from the peripheral edge of the back wall 162a to the front surface side. And said accommodating part 156,158,160 is formed inside the side wall 162b in the space before this back wall 162a.

  In the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, the side ends adjacent to the display area 42 are the entrances and exits of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. Character bodies 150, 152, and 154 (production members) are housed in housing portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively, and are not visible from the front side (standby position), and the front side of the display screen (opposite to the player). It can be displaced to a state (appearance position) that appears visibly on the front side. At this time, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 enter and exit through the entrances and exits. When the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively, and are in the standby positions (hereinafter referred to as “original positions”), they are detected by the photosensors 150, 153n, and 154n. . The photosensor 152n detects the original position of a shielding member (dracula) 166 described later.

  The rear unit 142 is attached to the back side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached to the front side thereof, so that the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively. When it is in the state, it is hidden behind the front unit 140 and the game board 4a and is not visible from the front.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a shielding member (Franken) 164, a shielding member (Dracula) 166, a shielding member (Dracula) 154 corresponding to each of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, and the character body (Wolf man) 154. Wolf man) 168 is provided, and these shielding members 164, 166, 168 serve to block the exposure of the inside of the accommodating portions 156, 158, 160 through the display region 42 from the front side. Therefore, as indicated by the solid line in FIG. 7, when the character bodies 150, 152, 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, 160, they are accommodated by the corresponding shielding members 164, 166, 168, respectively. The entrances and exits of the portions 156, 158, and 160 are closed.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 7, the shielding members 164, 166, 168 are all displaced toward the display area 42, and the entrances of the corresponding accommodating portions 156, 158, 160 are respectively provided. Can be opened. In this state, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can appear on the front side of the display area 42.

  At this time, with respect to the character bodies 150 and 152 on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, the respective shielding members 164 and 166 are rotated about the one end portion along the front surface of the display screen, thereby opening the entrance. For the character body 154 on the left side of the display area 42, the doorway is opened when the shielding member (wolf man) 168 rotates about the vertical axis toward the display screen.

  In addition, the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 are provided with a decoration that is consistent with the decoration on the outer surface of the front unit 140. For example, the shielding members 164 and 166 positioned on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42 are decorated in the same manner as the decorative member 142f, in the form of a brick arrangement. On the other hand, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 located on the left side of the display area 42 is decorated like a wooden door as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 perform the appearing and appearing operations in the display area 42. However, the respective operation ranges are designed not to interfere with each other, or in control. An operation that does not interfere is performed. For example, the character body (wolf man) 154 on the left side of the display area 42 moves linearly to the right from the left end of the display area 42, but the motion range A1 at this time is the other two character bodies. It is designed not to overlap with the operation range A2 of 150 and 152.

  Regarding the character bodies 150 and 152 located on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, there is a design overlap in the operation range in which the respective shielding members 164 and 166 rotate. However, these character bodies 150 and 152 are controlled so that their movement ranges (angles) B1 and B2 do not interfere with each other during actual movement.

  Next, the details of the operation mechanism for operating the character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, 168 will be described.

  FIG. 8 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164. The motion mechanism including the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 is unitized in a state of being housed in a box-shaped mechanism box 150a. The mechanism box 150a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodation portion 156 is formed inside the mechanism box 150a in this state.

  The character body (Franken) 150 is composed of a combination of three movable parts, and specifically includes a head part 150b, a left arm part 150c, and a right arm part 150d. These parts 150b, 150c, and 150d are pin-bonded to each other to form a link mechanism, and each corresponds to a section of the link mechanism. In addition, an elevating slider 150e is accommodated in the mechanism box 150a, and this elevating slider 150e also constitutes one action mechanism together with the character body (franken) 150. The elevating slider 150e is supported so as to be movable up and down in the mechanism box 150a.

  The head part 150b of the character body (Franken) 150 is supported by the mechanism box 150a via a fulcrum 150f at a portion corresponding to the chest of the “monster”. A lever 150g extends obliquely downward from this portion, and the head part 150b and the lift slider 150e are joined to each other via the lever 150g.

  The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d of the character body (Franken) 150 are connected to each other at a portion corresponding to the base of the arm. The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d operate as a unit on the mechanism without relatively moving. However, the head part 150b is located between the right arm part 150d and the left arm part 150c when viewed in the front-rear direction, and these are housed in the mechanism box 150a so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, an appropriate clearance is secured between the head part 150b, the left arm part 150c, and the right arm part 150d. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the character body (Franken) 150 has a thickness as a whole (which is structurally different from a movable accessory having only one thin plate).

  Although not shown in FIG. 8, the head part 150 b is pin-bonded to the left arm part 150 c and the right arm part 150 d at a portion corresponding to the back of the “monster”. On the other hand, the right arm part 150d is pin-joined to the shielding member (franken) 164 at a portion corresponding to the palm. As a result, a continuous mechanism from the elevating slider 150e to the shielding member (franken) 164 via the head part 150b and the right arm part 150d is configured. As a result, the character body (Franken) 150 as a whole has a thickness as well as a two-dimensional visual effect due to a single action, like a movable object having only one thin plate. A visual effect is obtained as if the body (Franken) 150 is displayed three-dimensionally and the image displayed in the display area 42 on the rear side of the character body (Franken) 150 is also given depth.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a stepping motor 150h (drive source) is attached to the back side of the mechanism box 150a. The character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 can operate using the stepping motor 150h as a drive source.

  In the mechanism box 150a, an open hole 150j is formed in the right side wall 150i as seen in FIG. The opening hole 150j opens the space inside the mechanism box 150a to the right side, and can ensure the visibility to the inside. In addition, since the casing 162 of the rear unit 142 is also formed as a whole from transparent resin, even if the mechanism box 152a is housed in the casing 162, the inside thereof can be visually recognized through the opening hole 150j. Yes.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 show an operation example of the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164. The lifting slider 150e is lifted and lowered by power from the stepping motor 150h. The power from the stepping motor 150h is a rack in which a pinion 150r attached to the output shaft is formed on the lifting slider 150e. Power is transmitted to the elevating slider 150e by giving a rotational motion to 150s.

  The raising / lowering operation of the raising / lowering slider 150e is transmitted to the head part 150b via the lever 150g. When the elevating slider 150e is raised, the lever 150g is pulled up accordingly, and thereby the head part 150b rotates around the fulcrum 150f. By the rotation of the head part 150b at this time, a movement in which the character body (Franken) 150, which is just a “monster”, protrudes the head forward is realized. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, an engaging groove 150k is formed at the lower end of the elevating slider 150e, and the elevating slider 150e and the head part 150b are connected via the engaging groove 150k. It is joined. Further, a character body (Franken) reference plate 150m is formed on the elevating slider 150e below the engaging groove 150k, and the character body (Franken) reference plate 150m is in the recess of the photosensor 150n. It becomes the original position (see FIG. 8A). The size of the reference plate 150m is about twice that of the concave portion of the photosensor 150n.

  When the head part 150b is further rotated, the movement is transmitted to the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d, and the right arm part 150d is connected to the shielding member (Franken) 164 as a connecting node. As a result, the shielding member (franken) 164 is displaced obliquely from the initial posture (hanging state), thereby realizing an operation as if the shielding member (franken) 164 was pushed up in the upper left direction. At this time, the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d work as articulated nodes having no fixed fulcrum, so the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d move in the upper left direction according to the movement of the shielding member (Franken) 164 and the head part 150b. Will do.

  As a result, when the action mechanism is viewed as a whole, the character body (Franken) 150, which is a “monster”, pushes the shielding member (Franken) 164 with both hands, and a stunning operation is realized as if the face is sticking out of it. Will be. In addition, since the shielding member (Franken) 164 is decorated to resemble a brick wall, the movement of the character body (Franken) 150 at this time causes the “monster” to have its monster power, The visual effect is as if the brick wall of the “house” is forcibly pushed up.

  FIG. 11 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166. The motion mechanism including the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is also unitized in a state of being housed in a box-shaped mechanism box 152a. Here, similarly, the mechanism box 152a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodating portion 158 is formed inside the mechanism box 152a in this state.

  The character body (Dracula) 152 is a single component, and a two-system link mechanism is provided in the mechanism box 152a. Of these, one system is for rotating (or swinging) the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 as a whole, and the other system is for the character body (Dracula) 152 being a shielding member. (Dracula) For sliding in the longitudinal direction of 166.

  Of the two link mechanisms, the first one (second link mechanism) includes the main part 152b (swing member) in addition to the main part 152b formed integrally with the shielding member (dracula) 166. In addition, a lever 152c that rotates (or swings) the character body (Dracula) 152 is included. The main part 152b is supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152d, and can swing in the left-right direction around the fulcrum 152d.

  One lever 152c is swingably supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152e. The end of the lever 152c located on the lower side from the fulcrum 152e is joined to the main part 152b. A guide groove 152i is formed at the end of the lever 152c along the longitudinal direction thereof. On the other hand, the main part 152b is provided with an engagement pin (not shown) that protrudes rearward in the front-rear direction. ing. The main part 152b is mechanically connected to the lever 152c by inserting the engaging pin into the guide groove 152i.

  A guide groove 152f is formed along the longitudinal direction on the opposite side, that is, on the end portion located on the upper side from the fulcrum 152e, and the tip of the crank 152g is inserted into the guide groove 152f. . The crank 152g is connected to the output shaft of the stepping motor 152h, and can be rotated or rotated by its power.

  The remaining one system (first link mechanism) includes a connecting rod 153a connected to the character body (Dracula) 152 and a lever 153b connected to the connecting rod 153a. The character body (Dracula) 152 is designed in a posture as if a “vampire Dracula” is flying in the sky. It is joined.

  On the other hand, the character body (Dracula) 152 is slidably supported with respect to another main part 152b. For this reason, a guide groove 153c is formed along the longitudinal direction of the main part 152b. An engagement pin (not shown) is formed behind the character body (Dracula) 152 when viewed from the front side, and this engagement pin is in a state of being inserted into the guide groove 153c.

  The lever 153b is also formed with a guide groove 153d along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the tip of the crank 153e is inserted into the guide groove 153d. The crank 153e is connected to the output shaft of the stepping motor 153f and can be rotated or rotated by its power.

  As for the character body (Dracula) 152, the entire mechanism box 152a is formed of transparent parts. For this reason, the two-link mechanism has an advantage that the state can be easily confirmed from various directions around the link mechanism.

  FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 show an operation example of the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166. First, with respect to one link mechanism (second link mechanism), when the crank 152g is rotated in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the stepping motor 152h (drive source), the lever 152c rotates in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 12). When the lever 150g is rotated, the main part 152b is thereby rotated in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12). As a result, one end of the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is provided. (The right end portion in FIG. 12) rotates downward. Further, a reference plate 152m of a shielding member (dracula) 166 is formed on the lower right side of the main part 152b, and a state where the reference plate 152m of the shielding member (dracula) is housed in a recess of the photosensor 152n is the original position. (See FIG. 11A). The size of the reference plate 152m is about twice that of the concave portion of the photosensor 152n.

  For the remaining one-system link mechanism (first link mechanism), when the crank 153e is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the stepping motor 153f (drive source), The lever 153b rotates in one direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 12). When the lever 153b is rotated, the connecting rod 153a is pushed in one direction (left direction in FIG. 12), so that the character body (Dracula) 152 is moved along the main part 152b in the tip direction (in FIG. 12). Will slide to the lower left). Further, a reference plate 153m of the character body (Dracula) 152 is formed on the right side of the lever 153b connected to the connecting rod 153a, and the reference plate 153m of the character body (Dracula) is in the recess of the photosensor 153n. Is the original position (see FIG. 11A). The size of the reference plate 153m is approximately twice as large as the concave portion of the photosensor 153n.

  As a result, when the action mechanism is viewed as a whole, the character body (Dracula) 152 as “Vampire Dracula” appears together with the shielding member (Dracula) 166 so as to hang down from the back of the ceiling of the “Monster House”, and is suspended as it is. The production operation as if drifting is realized. Since the image of “Vampire Dracula = Bat” is generally established, the aspect in which the character body (Dracula) 152 imitating “Vampire Dracula” appears from the ceiling as in this embodiment is It is easy for everyone to accept it.

  As is apparent from the above description, of the two types of link mechanisms, the link mechanism (first link mechanism) for sliding the character body (Dracula) 152 is a mechanism element including the stepping motor 153f. It is understood that the whole is mounted on a separate link mechanism (second link mechanism). Further, in the present embodiment, the character body (dracula) 152 is located at the left end with the fulcrum 152d of the main part 152b as the center, and the stepping motor 153f is located at the right end on the opposite side. . For this reason, when the main part 152b swings, the character body (Dracula) 152 and the stepping motor 153f are balanced in balance, and the stable swing is realized. In particular, the mass of the stepping motor 153h also acts as a counterweight when the character body (dracula) 152 attempts to return from the state in which the character body (dracula) 152 is displaced downward to the inside of the accommodating portion 158. There is an advantage that no torque is required.

  FIG. 14 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168. Similarly to the above, the operation mechanism including the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is also unitized in a state of being housed in the box-shaped mechanism box 154a. The mechanism box 154a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodation portion 160 is formed inside the mechanism box 154a in this state.

  The character body (wolf man) 154 is composed of a combination of two movable parts, and specifically includes a main body part 154b and a left arm part 154c. In the mechanism box 154a, a slide block 154d and a push / pull rod 154e are disposed as other mechanism elements. Of these, the slide block 154d extends vertically in the mechanism box 154a, and upper and lower ends thereof are supported so as to be slidable in the lateral direction with respect to the mechanism box 154a. Correspondingly, two guide grooves 154f are formed in the mechanism box 154a, and these guide grooves 154f extend in the lateral direction while being kept parallel to each other.

  One push / pull rod 154e extends in the horizontal direction (rightward in FIG. 14) with the base end fixed to the slide block 154d, and the tip of the push / pull rod 154e reaches slightly outside the mechanism box 154a.

  The main body part 54b of the character body (wolf man) 154 is fixed to one side end (right side end in FIG. 14) of the slide block 154d. Therefore, the movement of the character body (wolf man) 154 in the lateral direction is basically realized by the sliding motion of the slide block 154d. On the other hand, the left arm part 154c is in a state where the left arm part 154c is pin-bonded to the main body part 154b and moves relative to the main body part 154b.

  Further, the upper and lower ends of the shielding member (wolf man) 168 are rotatably supported by the mechanism box 154a. As already explained, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is decorated with a wooden door, and its movement is the same as that when the door is opened and closed. Two engaging pieces 168a and 168b for engaging with the push-pull rod 154e are formed at the upper end of the shielding member (wolf man) 168. The engaging pieces 168a and 168b It is located above the decorative member 142f. The engagement pieces 168a and 168b extend in the horizontal direction from the rotation shaft of the shielding member (wolf man) 168. When the mechanism box 154a is viewed from directly above, the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b are just V-shaped. It is arranged to open.

  On the other hand, engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are formed at the tip end portion (right end portion in FIG. 14) of the push / pull rod 154e corresponding to the engagement pieces 168a and 168b. As shown in FIG. 14, in a state where the character body (wolf man) 154 is housed in the housing portion 160, two engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are provided between the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b. Both are located. In this state, the engagement protrusion 154h located on the inner side of the accommodating portion 160 (leftward in FIG. 14) abuts on the engagement piece 168b of the shielding member (wolf man) 168, whereby the shielding member (wolf man) 168 Holds posture. At this time, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is in a state in which the entrance / exit of the housing portion 160 is closed, thereby hiding the presence of the character body (wolf man) 154 located in the housing portion 160.

  In the mechanism box 154a, an open hole 154j is formed in the left side wall 154i as viewed in FIG. The opening hole 154j can open the space inside the mechanism box 154a to the left side and ensure the visibility to the inside.

  FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 show an operation example of the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168. The slide block 154d is slid by the power from the stepping motor 155 (drive source), and the power from the stepping motor 155 is transmitted to the slide block 154d via the crank 155a and the lever 155b. Is done. Therefore, the lower end portion of the lever 155b is pin-joined to the mechanism box 154a, while the upper end portion of the lever 155b is slider-joined to the slide block 154d. A guide groove 155c extending in the vertical direction is formed in the slide block 154d, and a pin 155d that fits into the guide groove 155c is formed at the upper end portion of the corresponding lever 155b. The lever 155b is also formed with a guide groove 155e along its longitudinal direction, and the leading end of the crank 155a is inserted into the guide groove 155e. In addition, a character body (wolf man) reference plate 154m is formed on the slide block 154d above the guide groove 155c, and the character body (wolf man) reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n. Is the original position (see FIG. 14A). The size of the reference plate 154m is about twice as large as the concave portion of the photosensor 154n.

  Therefore, when the crank 155a is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A) by the power of the stepping motor 155, the lever 155e is thereby moved in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A). Rotate. When the lever 155e rotates, the slide block 154d is pushed in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A), and as a result, the character body (wolf man) 154 is moved outwardly from the inside of the housing portion 160 (FIG. 15 (a) will slide to the right).

  In conjunction with such sliding of the slide block 154d, the push / pull rod 154e also slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). Then, the engaging protrusion 154g located at the head in the sliding direction pushes the engaging piece 168a of the shielding member (wolf man) 168, and thereby the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is rotated around the axis. Become.

  The main body part 154b of the character body (wolf man) 154 simply slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A) with the slide operation of the slide block 154d, but the left arm part 154c slides. The movement that rotates with the movement is added.

  For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 15B, a lever 155f is attached to the back of the left arm part 154c, and this lever 155f extends from the tip of the left arm part 154c to the rear of the main body part 154b. It extends and is joined to the mechanism box 154a by a slider. A guide groove 155g is further formed in the mechanism box 154a, and a slide pin 155h that fits into the guide groove 155g is provided at one end of the lever 155f. The guide groove 155g extends horizontally from one side end (left side end in FIG. 15A) toward the other side end in the mechanism box 154a, and is bent obliquely upward in the middle. Therefore, in a state where the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168 are housed in the housing portion 160 (FIG. 14), the slide block 154d is moved in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). ), The vertical displacement of the slide pin 155h of the lever 155f does not appear at the beginning, but when the slide operation of the slide block 154d reaches the final stage, the slide pin 155h is bent in the guide groove 155g. It is gradually displaced upward as it is guided by the part. Thereby, the movement of turning so that the tip of the lever 155f, that is, the tip of the left arm part 154c is lowered, is realized.

  Looking at the above movement as a whole of the motion mechanism, the character body (wolf man) 154 that is a “monster” vigorously pushes out the shielding member (wolf man) 168 that is a “wooden door” and suddenly jumps out of the room. A stage-like production operation is realized. Conversely, when the character body (Dracula) 152 is retracted into the room, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 that is the “wooden door” is closed accordingly, and a natural presentation operation is realized as if the room was shielded. The

  In this embodiment, by controlling the driving of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are set to a stand-by position where the player cannot see the character body, and an appearance position visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized by the player and the stand-by positions that are not visible to the player by controlling the solenoid. You may comprise so that a reciprocating drive may be carried out between positions. Moreover, not only reciprocal driving but also rotational driving may be used. In other words, the driving means and the driving method are not limited as long as the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be moved in and out of the standby position where the player cannot visually recognize the character body 150, 152 and 154.

  FIG. 17 shows a left half ((a) in the drawing) and a right half ((b) in the drawing) in a state where the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined. As shown in FIG. 17, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (wolf man) 168 simulating a “wooden door” is displayed on the left side of the display area 42. Wolf Man) 154 and other operating mechanisms are obscured. On the right side of the display area 42, the character body (Franken) 150 and other motion mechanisms are covered with a shielding member (Franken) 164 simulating a “brick wall”. These shielding members 164 and 166 are visually unified in outer surface shape with the outer surface shapes such as the window decoration portion 141 and the wall decoration body 140h of the front unit 140. , 152 is not reminiscent of the existence of any of them, and there is almost no awareness of any device there.

  FIG. 18 shows the entirety of the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 as viewed from a slightly upward angle in a combined state. As shown in FIG. 18, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (dracula) 166 that imitates a “brick ceiling” is displayed above the display area 42. (Dracula) 152 and other operating mechanisms are covered. Similarly, since the outer surface shape of the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is visually unified with the outer surface shape of the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140, the player is hardly aware of the existence of the operation mechanism. It has become a thing.

  FIG. 19 shows a longitudinal section in the front half of the front unit 140. A portion of the front unit 140 that protrudes from the front surface (board surface) of the game board 4a to the front side includes the roof decoration portion 40b, the ball guide member 140e, the wall decorations 140g and 140h, and the like.

  In FIG. 19, the shape of the sphere guide passage 148 is shown in more detail. In other words, the ball guide passage 148 has an entrance that opens obliquely upward to the left above the front unit 140, and the game ball that has jumped in from there is first guided by the ball guide member 140e and rolls in the lower right direction. To do. As shown in the cross section of FIG. 19, the ball guide member 140e has a cross-sectional shape that is stepped downward along the rolling direction of the game ball, and therefore, the game ball on the ball guide member 140e. Is guided, the rolling speed is first relaxed on the stepped uneven surface.

  On one decorative member 140f, a braking protrusion 141a is formed so as to face the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e. The braking protrusion 141a is in a positional relationship where it collides with a game ball rolling on the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e in such a manner as to hit it. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the ball guiding passage 148 first collides with the braking protrusion 141a and is decelerated.

  Similarly, a braking protrusion 141b is also formed on the wall decoration body 140g, and when proceeding further from the previous braking protrusion section 141a to the back of the ball guide passage 148, this time, the braking protrusion section 141b of the wall decoration body 140g plays a game. The balls collide relative to each other, and the rolling speed is also reduced here.

  Thereafter, when the game ball further advances in the ball guide passage 148, the game ball rolls while contacting the outer surfaces of the two wall decorations 140g and 140h, and the rolling speed is appropriately reduced in the process. . Further, in the present embodiment, since the uneven surface is also provided on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i, the game ball is not only caused by friction with the uneven surface of the wall surface member 140i as well as the two outer surfaces of the wall decoration bodies 140g and 140h. The braking force is also applied. As a result, an appropriate braking force acts on the rolling of the game ball in the ball guide passage 148, and the player can follow the rolling process with his eyes.

  At the right edge of the front unit 140, the warp passage extends obliquely downward to the left through the inside of the front unit 140 (inside the outer surface). A warp inlet 148a is formed at the lower end portion of the ball guide passage 148 so as to open to the wall surface member 140i, and a game ball rolling on the ball guide passage 148 enters the warp passage from the warp inlet 148a. There is.

  Further, a discharge approach 148b is formed on the right edge of the front unit 140, and this discharge approach 148b protrudes from the exit of the warp passage toward the ball receiving stage 142c (not shown in FIG. 19). . The game ball that has passed through the warp passage is discharged to the ball receiving stage 142c through the discharge approach 148b.

  Here, a see-through hole 148c is formed in the wall surface member 140i of the front unit 140, and the see-through hole 148c penetrates the wall surface member 140i in the thickness direction. For this reason, the appearance (part) of the game ball passing through the warp passage is visible to the player through the see-through hole 148c.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the decorative shape of the wall surface member 140i (a shape in which bricks are stacked), see-through holes 148c are formed just at the positions of the gaps between the individual bricks. For this reason, in this embodiment, even if the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized from the front side by forming the see-through hole 148c, the decorative shape of the front unit 140 is not hindered thereby. Benefits arise.

  In the present embodiment, the gate switch 53 is disposed in the game area 12, but the gate switch 170 may be integrally attached to the left and right side edges of the front unit 140 as shown in FIG. In this case, the gate switch 170 is disposed inside the left and right roof decoration portions 140b. Therefore, a passage guide passage 170a communicating with the gate switch 170 is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b.

  FIG. 20 shows a state where a game ball passes through the right gate switch 170 as an example. Usually, since the gate switch 170 is hidden behind the roof decoration part 140b, it is not visually recognized from the front side. However, the through hole 170b is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b, and the player can partially see the appearance of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 through the through hole 170b. As a result, it is clear to the player that the normal symbol determination is firmly performed in the pachinko machine 1, so there is no possibility that the player will be suspicious about the presence or absence of the normal symbol determination. Although not shown here, a similar through hole is formed in the left gate switch.

  FIG. 21 shows a cross section of the left edge portion of the front unit 140. Similarly, the gate switch 170 and the passage guide passage 170a are formed inside the roof decoration portion 140b for the left edge portion. Although not shown, a through-hole is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b also on the left edge, so that the state of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 is visible to the player. A warp passage 172 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the left edge of the front unit 140. The warp passage 172 has a warp inlet 172a at a relatively high position. That is, the warp inlet 172a is formed to open from the roof decoration portion 140b to the upper left, and the game ball that has entered from here rolls as it is to the back side of the roof decoration portion 140b. Although not shown in FIG. 21, a through hole (similar to the passage guide passage 70a) is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b in the vicinity of the warp inlet 172a. The process of rolling forward from there is visible to the player through the through hole.

  Further, when the warp passage 172 is bent from the back side to the back side of the roof decoration portion 140b, the warp passage 172 is bent downward from the roof decoration portion 140b to extend the back side position of the window decoration portion 141 downward. In addition, the warp passage 172 is bent rightward to reach the vicinity of the boundary with the display region 42, and further bent further to the rear side to receive the ball receiving stage 142c (shown in FIG. 21) of the rear unit 142. Not open).

  In this embodiment, a transparent plate (outer surface member) is employed in a portion corresponding to the window glass of the window decoration portion 141, and thereby, a decorative effect that actually imitates a “light window” in the window decoration portion 141. Is emphasized. Further, the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 is provided with a semi-permeable film by, for example, aluminum vapor deposition, and the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 functions as a so-called magic mirror by the semi-permeable film processing. It has become. Therefore, the window decoration portion 141 does not simply show the back side, and is behind due to the difference in light reflectance between the front side and the back side (the rear unit 142 and the character body (wolf man) 154). The presence of is shielded.

  Therefore, even if the game ball flows down behind the window decoration portion 141 in the process of passing the game ball through the warp passage 172, the state of the game ball is not clearly seen through, but the game ball is played by the semipermeable membrane. Is projected on the front side. For this reason, the player does not see the warp passage 172, the rear unit 142, the character body (wolf man) 154, etc. behind the window decoration portion 141, and the game ball passes through the warp passage 172. Is visible by its contour (projection).

  FIG. 22 shows an overlapping relationship between the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142. Here, in particular, the cover member 142g located on the right side portion of the rear unit 142 will be described.

  As described above, since the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a (not shown in FIG. 22) in a state of being superimposed behind the front unit 140, the cover member 142g is directly visible from the front side. It will never be done. However, at the right edge portion of the front unit 140, the boundary line with the display region 42 is not a straight line due to the shape of the wall decoration body 140h, but has a complicated shape designed in a decorative manner. For this reason, if one side edge part (edge part which prescribes | regulates the boundary with the display area 42) is made into a linear shape, the shape of each other when the front unit 140 is piled up on the front side will be provided. No longer match.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shape of the one side edge portion of the cover member 142g viewed from the front side and the outer shape of the front unit 140 (the outer shape of the wall decoration body 140h) are mutually matched, so that the cover member 142g is viewed from the front side. Is prevented from being noticed unnaturally.

  FIG. 23 shows the motion mechanism of the character body (Franken) 150 as seen from above. As described above, the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 enter and exit in the lateral direction (indicated by a double arrow W in the drawing) with respect to the storage portion 156, and thus one side of the mechanism box 150a. The end (the left end in FIG. 23) is an entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156.

  The cover member 142g is attached so as to close the front opening of the mechanism box 150a. Therefore, when the shielding member (franken) 164 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 156, the shielding member (franken) is viewed from the front side. 164 is covered with a cover member 142g. At this time, the cover member 142g also functions as a partition that partitions the periphery of the entrance / exit of the housing portion 156.

  On the other hand, the one side edge (the left edge in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g is formed in an irregular curved shape in accordance with the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140 as described above (FIG. 23), the outer periphery of the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156 is partially cut away in the entering direction (right direction in FIG. 23).

  Further, in this embodiment, a notch 156a is formed in the mechanism box 150a around the periphery of the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156, and the notch 156a is U-shaped in the entry direction (rightward in FIG. 23) from the opening end of the entrance / exit. It extends in a letter shape (refer to (b) in FIG. 8 as appropriate).

  Accordingly, even when the shielding member (franken) 164 is housed in the housing portion 156, the shielding member (franken) 164 is gripped from both sides through the notch portion of the cover member 142g and the notch portion 156a of the mechanism box 150a. (The white arrow in FIG. 23). Therefore, even if some trouble occurs in the operating mechanism, if the shielding member (franken) 164 is grasped and pulled out, the inside of the housing portion 156 can be easily opened. It can be done quickly and easily.

  The above-described configuration of the notch is a suitable example related to maintenance / inspection of the operating mechanism. In addition, the present embodiment has a configuration for smoothing normal movement by the operating mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 23, a chamfered portion 156b is formed at one side edge (the right edge in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g. The chamfered portion 156b forms an inclined surface that guides the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 in the entering direction (right direction in FIG. 23). Further, the operation of the shielding member (franken) 164 (especially the operation when entering the housing portion 156) is performed smoothly.

  Although not specifically shown here, the configuration of the chamfered portion is also applied to the accommodating portions 158 and 160 of the other character bodies 152 and 154.

  FIG. 24 shows the lower edge portion of the front unit 140 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), two light emitting regions 174 are formed on both sides of the emission port 140k in the lower edge of the front unit 140. In these light emitting regions 174, two light emitting regions 174 are formed. The LED 176 shown in (b) of FIG. 24 is turned on / flashed. In the present embodiment, these four light emitting areas 174 and LEDs 176 function as the special symbol display 41 (see FIG. 3).

  For example, if there is a start prize during a normal game (not in a big hit game) in the pachinko machine 1, a special symbol change display will be triggered by that, and the judgment result (winning result) will be displayed specially. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the change display and the stop display at this time are represented by lighting / flashing of the four light emitting areas 174. For example, during the variable display, the light emitting area 174 repeatedly blinks in a constant pattern, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the four light emitting areas 174 are turned on or off to display the determination result. Various patterns can be considered for the display mode, but here, when the determination result is a hit (big hit), all the four light emitting areas 174 are turned on, and any of the cases where the determination is not satisfied (1 to 4). Is turned off.

  Further, below the left and right light emitting areas 174, four lighting areas 178 for performing start hold display are formed. In these lighting regions 178, lighting is performed by the light of the LED 182 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, these four lighting areas 178 and the LED 182 function as the special figure storage lamp 54 (see FIG. 3).

  As shown in FIG. 24B, a light guiding member 180 is attached to the lower edge portion of the front unit 140 on the back side of the outer surface of the front unit 140. Arranged behind the guide member 180. The LED 176 is mounted on an LED board (not shown), and an LED 182 for starting hold display is also mounted on the same LED board.

  The light guide member 180 has a certain depth when viewed from the front side, and the LED substrate is positioned rearward by the depth of the light guide member 180. The light guiding member 180 is formed with four light guiding paths 180a penetrating the inside thereof in the front-rear direction, and these light guiding paths 180a are formed corresponding to the four LEDs 176, respectively. The light guiding path 180a is opened at the front surface of the light guiding member 180 and communicates directly behind the light emitting region 174.

  The light emitted from the individual LEDs 176 is guided forward through the light guide path 180 a and is irradiated to the front side through the light emitting region 174. A transparent member is fitted in the light emitting area 174, and as a result, the light emitting area 174 is visually recognized as if it is surface emitting as a whole.

  In the present embodiment, since the light guiding member 180 is molded from a dark color resin material, the inner wall of the light guiding path 180a exhibits a relatively high light shielding property, whereby the light from the LED 176 passes from the light guiding path 180a to the surroundings. It is hard to leak. For this reason, since the player can visually recognize that only the light emitting area 174 is clearly lit and blinking, the player can clearly recognize the variation display and stop display modes of the special symbol. There is an advantage.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the shape of the outline of the light emitting region 174 is formed as a decorative shape that imitates a symbol (for example, a symbol representing a figure in which a bat flies). For this reason, lighting / flashing of the light emitting area 174 is difficult to be recognized as a simple point light emitting operation, and it is possible to suggest (or teach, appeal, announce, etc.) to the player that some meaning is included therein. .

  Next, the main substrate 100 and the peripheral substrate 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the main board 100 and the peripheral board 110, and FIG. 26 is a block diagram of the first electrical decoration control board 112.

  The main board 100 includes a main control board 101 (main control means) and a payout control board 102 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the main control board 101 is configured around a CPU 101a (a microcomputer mounted on the main control means), and includes a ROM 101b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM 101c that temporarily stores data. Is provided. Detection signals from the gate sensors 53a and 53b, the start port sensor 55, and the count sensor 64 are input to the main control board 101. On the other hand, the main control board 101 outputs drive signals to the solenoid 63, the special symbol display 41, the normal symbol display 50, the special symbol storage lamp 54, and the general symbol storage lamp 56 based on the detection signal. Direct control. Although not shown, the CPU 101a also outputs a drive signal for the probability variation state lamp 51 described above. Specifically, when a probability change state flag, which will be described later, is set, a drive signal is output to the probability variation state lamp 51 so as to be lit, and the probability variation state lamp 51 is reset based on the reset of the probability change state flag. A drive signal is output to turn off the light. Various commands are serially transferred between the main control board 101 and the payout control board 102. Various commands are transferred in parallel from the main control board 101 to the sub integrated board 111 between the main control board 101 and the sub integrated board 111. The main control board 101 is supplied with a stable common voltage Vcom (for example, 12 V) by a power supply device (not shown), and the main control board 101 is controlled from the common voltage Vcom by a power supply IC (not shown) lower than the common voltage Vcom. A reference voltage Vstd (for example, 5 V) that is a voltage is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the payout control board 103 includes a CPU 102a, a ROM 102b, and a RAM 102c. The payout control board 102 controls the payout apparatus 102 based on various commands serially transferred from the main control board 101. For example, when the payout control board 102 receives a command for driving the payout apparatus 103 (discharge motor) serially transferred from the main control board 101, the payout control board 102 outputs a drive signal to the payout apparatus 103 (discharge motor) based on the command. . As a result, the payout device 103 pays out a game ball or a rental ball.

  The payout control board 102 is also connected to a launching device 104 having a launching motor that launches a game ball toward the game area 12. Then, based on the operation handle 18 being operated, the launch motor 135 drives the launch motor to launch a game ball. The operation handle 18 has a built-in touch sensor that detects whether or not the player is in contact. The operation handle 18 is operated while detecting that the player is in contact with the touch sensor. Thus, the firing motor 104 can be driven by the firing device 104. The game balls are paid out from the payout device 103 to the upper plate 28, and the game balls that cannot be accommodated when the upper plate 28 becomes full are stored in the lower plate 17 connected to the upper plate 28. A lower pan full switch for detecting that 17 is full is provided, and when a detection signal is input from the lower pan full switch, the operation of the operation handle 18 is controlled to be unacceptable and fired. The firing motor may not be driven by the device 104. In this case, when the detection signal from the lower pan full switch is no longer input, the operation handle 18 may be controlled so that the operation can be accepted.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the peripheral board 110 (peripheral control means: mainly the sub-integrated board 111) includes the sub-integrated board 111 (peripheral control means) and the first electric decoration control board 112 (in FIG. 25, the electric decoration control). It is comprised by the board | substrate 1 and the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 (it describes with the electrical decoration control board 2 in FIG. 25), and the waveform control board 114. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the sub integrated substrate 111 includes a CPU 111a (a microcomputer mounted on the peripheral control means), a ROM 111b, and a RAM 111c. The ROM 111b stores all data corresponding to the command signal received from the main control board 101 in a 1: 1 correspondence. As shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 has an arithmetic processing unit 111aac for performing various arithmetic processes, an output port 111aop for outputting various signals to the outside, and an input port for receiving detection signals from the outside. The circuit 111aip is connected to the serial units 111aso and 111aso ′ that perform serial transfer to the outside. Since various data transferred from the sub-integrated board 111 to the first electrical control board 112 and various signals output from the sub-integrated board 111 to the first electrical control board 112 are electrical signals, When transferring or outputting an electrical signal to one electrical decoration control board 112, in order to suppress the influence of noise, a level converter unit 111e that boosts and converts the voltage of the electrical signal to a predetermined voltage (for example, 5V to 12V), and a later-described first converter Step-down conversion of the voltages of the detection signals SEN1, SEN2, SEN3, and SEN4 from the photosensors 150n, 153n, 152n, and 154n input to the sub-integrated board 111 via the one illumination control board 112 into a predetermined voltage (for example, from 12V 5V) level converter 111f.

Since the level converter unit 111e is an open collector output, the output of the level converter unit 111e is raised to a common voltage Vcom (for example, 12V) of each substrate by a pull-up resistor 112 _r12 provided in the first electrical control board 112 described later. It has been. On the other hand, in the inter-connection between the level converter portion 111e and the CPU 111a, it is pulled to the reference voltage Vstd is a control voltage of the sub-integrated substrate 111 through a pull-up resistor _{111 r5} (e.g., 5V).

Further, since the level converter unit 112d provided in the first electrical control board 112 described later has an open collector output, the output of the level converter unit 112d is pulled up to the common voltage Vcom by the pull-up resistor _111r12 . Between the connection of the level converter 111f and the CPU 111a, the voltage is pulled down to the reference voltage Vstd via the pull-up resistor 111 _r5 ′. A stable common voltage Vcom is supplied to the sub-integrated substrate 111 by a power supply device (not shown), and a reference voltage Vstd lower than the common voltage Vcom is generated from the common voltage Vcom by a power supply IC (not shown).

  The CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 has a plurality of output ports (not shown), and various commands are transferred in parallel to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and the waveform control board 114, and a drive signal to the side decoration body 33 is transmitted. Is also output. Also, various commands transferred from the sub-integrated board 111 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and the waveform control board 114, and output from the sub-integrated board 111 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and the waveform control board 114. Since various signals are also electric signals, when transferring or outputting electric signals from the sub-integrated board 111 to the second electric decoration control board 113 and the waveform control board 114, a level converter (not shown) is used to suppress the influence of noise. Thus, the voltage of the electric signal is boosted and converted to a predetermined voltage (for example, 5V to 12V). The CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 has a plurality of input ports (not shown), and an operation signal is input based on the operation button 38 being operated.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the arithmetic processing unit 111aac sets data to be output to the output port 111aop and data to be serially transferred to the serial units 111aso and 111aso ′, in addition to various arithmetic processes, while the input port 111aip And the detection signals input to, and signals representing various states are read from the serial units 111aso and 111aso ′.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the serial unit 111aso transmits the transmission data from the arithmetic processing unit 111aac and the transmission data transferred from the transmission buffer register 111asb to the excitation data of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155. The transmission register 111asr serially transfers as SM-DAT, and the transmission control unit 111asc that generates a transfer clock SM-CLK for serial transfer from the transmission register 111asr and outputs signals representing the various states described above. . Here, as signals representing various states, a transmission permission bit Te representing a transmission permission state, a transmission buffer empty flag Tb representing whether or not transmission data has been transferred from the transmission buffer register 111asb to the transmission register 111asr, and a transmission There is a transmission register empty flag Tr indicating whether or not all transmission data has been transmitted from the register 111asr. The transmission buffer register 111asb and the transmission register 111asr are registers having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  The serial unit 111aso ′ has the same configuration as the above-described serial unit 111aso, and supplies the transfer clock PL-CLK and the lamp driving data PL-DAT as transmission data to the effect lamp driving unit 112g of the first electrical control board 112 described later. Serial transfer. The lamp driving data is data for driving the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49 connected to the effect lamp driving unit 112g.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the output port 111aop is a latch signal PL for driving the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49 connected to the effect lamp driving unit 112g of the first electric decoration control board 112 described later. -LAT and the gradation signal mode for gradation control are output to the effect lamp driver 112g. In addition, a latch signal SM-LAT for converting the serially transferred excitation data into parallel data is output to the serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i of the first electrical control board 112 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the input port 111aip has a photo sensor 150n for detecting the original positions of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man), respectively. Detection signals SEN1, SEN2, SEN3, and SEN4 from 153n, 152n, and 154n are input, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the first electrical decoration control board 112 includes a decoration lamp 49 and effect lamps 44a and 44b based on lamp drive data such as gradation data and lighting data serially transferred from the sub-integrated board 111. An effect lamp driving unit 112g to be driven, serial / parallel conversion units 112h and 112i for converting excitation data of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 serially transferred from the sub-integrated substrate 111 into parallel data, and a serial / parallel conversion unit 112h The parallel data converted by the above is input as an excitation signal, and the parallel data converted by the serial / parallel conversion unit 112i and the drive circuit units 112j and 112k that respectively drive the stepping motors 150h and 153f according to the excitation signal are the excitation signal. As It is a force, comprising a drive circuit unit 112m for respectively driving the stepping motor 152h, 155 in response to the excitation signal, and 112n. In addition, the first electrical decoration control board 112 converts the voltage of the serially transferred control signal or the various signals output to the reference voltage Vstd of the first electrical decoration control board 112 between the sub-integrated board 111 and the sub-integrated board 111. A level converter 112e (for example, 12V to 5V), a Schmitt trigger 112f that shapes the waveform of the electric signal stepped down to the reference voltage Vstd by the level converter 112e, and a photosensor 150n, A level converter 112d that performs step-up conversion of the voltages of the detection signals SEN1, SEN2, SEN3, and SEN4 from 153n, 152n, and 154n to the common voltage Vcom of each substrate (here, used to maintain, for example, 12V). Is provided. The photosensors 150n, 153n, 152n, and 154n are transmissive types. Note that the Schmitt trigger unit 112f inverts the logic of the latch signal PL-LAT, the gradation signal mode, and the latch signal SM-LAT output from the output port 111aop of the sub-integrated board 111 and also latches the signal PL-LAT. And the gradation signal mode are output to the effect lamp driver 112g, and the latch signal SM-LAT is output to the serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i described later.

Here, the connection between the level converter unit 111e and the level converter unit 112e included in the sub-integrated substrate 111 is raised to the common voltage Vcom of each substrate via the pull-up resistor _112r12 . The connections between the level converter portion 112e and the Schmitt trigger unit 112f, the reference voltage is the control voltage of the first electric decoration control board 112 outputs of the level converter portion 112e via a pull-up resistor _{112 r5} Vstd (eg, 5V) Has been lowered. A reference voltage Vstd lower than the common voltage Vcom is generated from the common voltage Vcom by a power supply IC (not shown). Further, motor power (not shown) is supplied to the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i are composed of shift registers 112hs and 112is and storage registers 112ht and 112it, respectively, and stepping motors 150h, 153f, and 152h serially transferred from the sub-integrated board 111. , 155 of the excitation data SM-DAT is transferred to the storage registers 112ht and 112it via the shift registers 112hs and 112is. Thereby, it is converted into parallel data. The parallel data is output as excitation signals to drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, and 112n, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 26, the serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i are connected in a daisy chain, that is, in a daisy chain, and the excitation data SM-DAT of the stepping motors 152h and 155 is shifted via the shift register 112hs. Transferred to the register 112is.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, and 112n are connected to the phase coils (φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ3) of the stepping motor 150h that operates the character body (Franken) 150, respectively. Excitation signal SM1- output from the serial / parallel converter 112h for switching of the excitation current for each phase coil (φ1, φ2, φ3, φ4) of the stepping motor 153f that operates φ4) and the character body (Dracula) 152 1 to SM1-4, SM2-1 to SM2-4, respectively. On the other hand, the drive circuit units 112m and 112n are each phase coils (φ1, φ2, φ2) of the stepping motor 152h for operating the shielding member (dracula) 166. φ3, φ4) and character body (wolf man) 154 Excitation signals SM3-1 to SM3-4 and SM4-1 to SM4 output from the serial / parallel converter 112i for switching the excitation current to the phase coils (φ1, φ2, φ3, φ4) of the stepping motor 155. -4, respectively. Here, the stepping motor 150h is connected to the mechanism box 150a, and a reference plate 150m of a character body (Franken) is housed in the mechanism box 150a. The stepping motors 153f and 152h are connected to a mechanism box 152a, and a character body (Dracula) reference plate 153m and a shielding member (Dracula) 166 reference plate 152m are housed in the mechanism box 152a. The stepping motor 155 is connected to the mechanism box 154a, and a character body (wolf man) reference plate 154m is housed in the mechanism box 154a.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the second electrical decoration control board 113 includes a CPU 113a, a ROM 113b, a RAM 113c, and a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) (not shown). The second electrical decoration control board 113 performs display control of the liquid crystal display 116 based on various commands transmitted from the sub integrated board 111.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the waveform control board 114 includes a ROM 114b and a RAM 114c for storing voice and performance data, and a sound source IC (not shown). The waveform control board 114 controls the sound wave device 115 (sound output means) based on various commands transmitted from the sub-integrated board 111. For example, sound effects are output from the sound wave device 115 (the low-frequency speaker 14 and the speaker 36) in accordance with various effects displayed in the display area 42.

  Next, various control processes executed in accordance with the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed on the main control board. FIG. 28 is a table showing random numbers updated on the main control board. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing special symbol processing executed on the main control board. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a big hit determination process as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a variation display pattern setting process which is a subroutine of the special symbol variation process. FIG. 32 is a list showing the variable display patterns (plural types of basic display patterns) selected on the main control board 101. These processes show a part of the processes executed by CPU 101a mounted on main control board 101 at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms) according to the game control program stored in ROM 101b. It is a thing. The variable display pattern is stored in a ROM 101b (basic display pattern storage means) mounted on the main control board 101.

  When the game ball that is launched by the launching device 135 and flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12 wins the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, the start winning process shown in FIG. 27 is executed. In the start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 (step S1). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the start port sensor 55. If a detection signal is output from the start port sensor 55, it is determined that a prize has been won (YES). If the detection signal from is not output, it is determined that no winning is made (NO). When it is determined that the game ball has won the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46, various random numbers (for example, a jackpot determination random number, a probability variation determination random number, a reach determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, etc. described later) are used. It is acquired and it is discriminate | determined whether the value of the reservation ball number counter provided in RAM101c is smaller than 4 used as an upper limit (step S2). If the reserved ball number counter is less than the upper limit value (YES), the reserved memory storage process is executed (step S3). In the reserved memory storing process, a process of adding “1” to the held ball number counter and a process of changing the lighting display mode (the number of lamps to be lit) of the special figure memory lamp 54 in accordance with the addition of the held ball number counter. And a process of storing the obtained random number value in the storage area of the start winning memory provided in the RAM 101c in correspondence with the count value of the reserved ball number counter. If a game ball has not won in the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 in step S1, or if the number of held balls is greater than or equal to the upper limit in step S2, the start is performed without executing the following processing. The winning process is terminated. Here, if the number of reserved balls is greater than or equal to the upper limit value in step S2, the acquired random number value is discarded. Also, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46, various random numbers are not acquired, and various random numbers are acquired after determining that the retained ball number counter is less than the upper limit value. May be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28, the jackpot determination random number, the probability variation determination random number, the various random numbers updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms) by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, There are reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, and the like. The big hit determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (big hit determination). When it is determined that a big hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination, the probability variation determination random number is changed to a probability variation state after the big hit gaming state ends based on whether or not it matches a determination value set in a probability variation determination table described later. It is a random number for determining whether or not the probability variation big hit to be controlled is determined (probability variation determination). The reach determination random number is a random number for determining (reach determination) whether or not to make a detachment with a reach mode when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is not generated in the big hit determination. The variation display pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol and the decorative symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 101 are not limited to those described above, and the normal symbol per-determination random number and the big hit determination random number for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a hit are updated. There is also a random number or the like for determining an initial value of a jackpot determination random number that starts counting when the counter makes one round.

  In the special symbol process shown in FIG. 29, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter is 0 (step S11). When the value of the reserved ball number counter is 0, it is determined that the jackpot determination random number is not stored in the RAM 101c, that is, it is determined that the condition for starting the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not satisfied, and will be described later. The process proceeds to step S15. On the other hand, when the value of the reserved ball number counter is not 0, it is determined that the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is satisfied, and the variable symbol of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started to be displayed. It is determined whether or not the game is possible, that is, whether the game is not in the big hit game, and whether the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not being displayed (step S12). When it is not possible to start the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol), the process proceeds to step S15.

  When it is possible to start the special symbol (decorative symbol) variation display in step S12, a hold memory transfer process is executed (step S13). In the hold memory transfer process, a process of subtracting 1 from the hold ball number counter, and after shifting various random numbers stored in the save area of the start winning memory provided in the RAM 101c, the hold memory counter in the save area of the start winning memory is stored. And reading various random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, etc.) stored in the storage area corresponding to 0. That is, various random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) of the reserved ball number counter in the storage area of the start winning memory are stored in the storage area of the start winning memory. The counter is stored in a storage area corresponding to n-1 (n = 0, 1, 2, 3).

  Thereafter, special symbol variation processing (step S14), special symbol variation processing (step S15), information output processing (step S16), and jackpot game processing (step S17) are sequentially executed. In the special symbol variation process (step S14), a jackpot determination process and a variation display pattern setting process, which will be described later, are performed, and the variation control of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is performed based on the variation display pattern determined in the variation display pattern setting process. Start and set the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer. In the special symbol variation processing (step S15), when the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 is started, the variation time set in the variation timer is monitored, and the variation set in the variation timer is monitored. When time elapses (the variation timer expires), a process of stopping (determining) the variation display of the specific symbol and the decorative symbol is performed. In the information output process (step S16), a drive signal related to the special symbol variation display determined in the special symbol variation process (step S14) and the special symbol variation process (step S15) is output to the special symbol display 41. Then, a process of transmitting various information related to the decorative symbol variation display to the sub-integrated board 111 is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, the function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, the variable display pattern determined in the variable display pattern setting process is converted into the sub integrated board by the information output process (step S16). Command signal transmission means for transmitting to 111 is provided.

  In the jackpot game process (step S17), it is determined whether or not a jackpot flag, which will be described later, is ON. If it is ON, control of the jackpot game state is started. More specifically, the drive signal is controlled to be output to the solenoid 63, and the entrance of the big prize opening 60 is opened by tilting the open / close plate 62 to the near side, and the opening time of the big prize opening 60 is set to the big prize opening opening timer. Perform the setting process. Then, the opening time set in the big prize opening timer is monitored, and when the opening time (for example, 30 seconds) set in the big winning opening timer has elapsed (the big opening opening timer is up), or When there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings (detected by the count sensor 64) in the big winning opening 60 before the opening time elapses, the drive signal to the solenoid 63 is controlled to stop, and the open / close plate The entrance of the grand prize opening 60 is closed by the standing of 62. If all the rounds (for example, 15 rounds) have not been completed, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, control for repeating the open / close cycle for opening the special winning opening 60 is executed again. As described above, in the present embodiment, the function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, which is a profit grant for executing the jackpot game process (step S17) and controlling the jackpot game state to give a profit to the player. State control means is provided. In addition, the main game control such as the special symbol processing described above is executed by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 to control the progress of the game.

  In the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 30, first, it is determined whether or not a probability variation state flag set in step S37 described later is in an ON state (step S31). If the probability variation status flag is ON, a probability variation big hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S32). If the probability variation status flag is not ON (if OFF), the non-probability variation big hit determination table is selected. (Not shown) is selected (step S33). In the probabilistic jackpot determination table, 14 determination values among 980 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 979 are set, and the jackpot probability that is the probability of a jackpot is 1/70. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, two determination values are set out of 980 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 979, and the jackpot probability is 1/490.

  Then, the judgment value set in the probability change jackpot determination table selected in Steps S32 and S33 or the normal time jackpot judgment table matches the jackpot determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in Step S13. Whether or not to make a big hit is determined depending on whether or not to do (step S34). The judgment value set in the probability change jackpot determination table selected in steps S32 and S33 or the normal time jackpot determination table, and the value of the jackpot determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in step S13 (starts the fluctuation display) When it is determined that a big hit is made based on the fact that the big hit determination random number to match) is set to ON (step S35), a probability variation determination table (not shown) in which a predetermined determination value is set is set. ) To determine whether or not to make a probable big hit (step S36). Specifically, whether or not to make a probable big hit based on whether or not the value of the probability variation determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in step S13 matches the determination value set in the probability variation determination table. judge. In this embodiment, the probability variation intrusion rate (the proportion of the big hits as the probability variation big hit) is 2/3, that is, six decision values among nine probability variation determination random numbers from 0 to 8. Is set in the probability variation determination table.

  If it is determined in step S36 that the determination value set in the probability variation determination table and the value of the probability variation determination random number read in the hold storage shift processing in step S13 match, the probability variation state is determined. If it is determined that the flag is in the ON state (however, if the probability variation state flag is already in the ON state, the ON state is continued) (step S37), and that the big hit is not the probability variation big hit (non-probability variable big hit) The probability change state flag is set to the OFF state (however, if the probability change state flag is already OFF, the OFF state is continued) (step S38). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34 that a big hit is not made (defeated), the process is terminated without executing the following process. Note that the ON / OFF states of the big hit flag and the probability variation state flag are stored in the RAM 101c. In addition, a value of “0” is set when the big hit flag and the probability change state flag are OFF, and a value of “1” is set when the big hit flag and the probability change state flag are ON.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 is to execute the jackpot determination process and determine whether or not the jackpot is determined based on whether the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value. A winning determination means for determining whether or not to perform is provided. Further, it is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and after the big hit game state is finished, the probability variation state flag is turned ON in the big hit game process (step S17), and based on the ON state, in step S32 Special gaming state control means is provided for controlling to a probability-changing gaming state that increases the rate at which the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value by selecting the probability variation jackpot determination table.

  In the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 31, first, as a result of the current variable display, whether or not to make a big hit, that is, whether or not the big hit flag set in step S36 of the big hit determination process is ON. It discriminate | determines (step S41). If the big hit flag is in the ON state, the big hit hour fluctuation display pattern table (a table in which a fluctuation display pattern marked with a circle in the fluctuation display pattern table shown in FIG. 32 described later is set) is selected ( Step S42). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not in the ON state (if it is in the OFF state), the determination value set in the reach determination table in which the predetermined determination value is set, and the reach determination read in the hold storage transition process in step S13 Whether or not to reach is determined by whether or not the value of the random number matches (step S44). In the reach determination table, the reach probability (reach mode ratio) is 1 / 12.5, that is, two determination values out of 25 reach determination random numbers from 0 to 24 are reach determination. Set in the table.

  When it is determined in step S44 that the reach mode is selected, the variation display pattern table at the time of reach (the variation numbers 1 and 2 among the variation display patterns marked with “X” in the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. The table in which the changed display pattern is excluded is selected (step S45), and when it is determined in step S44 that the reach mode is not selected, the change display pattern table at the time of detachment (the change display pattern table shown in FIG. 32 described later). (The table in which the change display patterns of change numbers 1 and 2 marked with “x” are set) is selected (step S46). Then, the judgment value set in any one of the variation display pattern tables of the big hit variation display pattern table, the reach variation display pattern table, or the loss variation display pattern table selected in steps S42, 45, and 46. And a variable display pattern that matches the value of the random number of the variable display pattern read out in the hold storage transition process in step S13 is determined (step S43).

  The deviation fluctuation display pattern table has a table in which only a fluctuation display pattern of normal fluctuation of fluctuation number 1 described later is set, and a table in which only a fluctuation display pattern of shortening fluctuation of fluctuation number 2 is set, When the time reduction control described above is executed, a table in which only the change display pattern of the short fluctuation of the fluctuation number 2 is set is selected. When the time reduction control is not executed, the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation number 1 is changed. A table in which only the variable display pattern is set is selected. That is, when the time reduction control is not executed, the fluctuation display pattern of the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation number 1 is determined, and when the time reduction control is executed, the fluctuation display pattern of the fluctuation fluctuation of the fluctuation number 2 is determined. Is done.

  Further, in this embodiment, by determining one of the variable display patterns set in the variable display pattern table in step S45, a reach such as a super reach effect and a super reach development effect, which will be described later, is achieved. It is decided whether or not to perform the production. For example, a random number for determining whether or not to perform the reach production such as the super reach production or the super reach development production is provided. When it is decided to perform the reach effect, the variable display pattern table in which the variable display pattern for performing the reach effect is selected is selected, and any one of the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number is selected. Such a variable display pattern may be determined.

  Next, the variable display pattern command is set as a display command for designating the variable display pattern determined in step S43 (step S47). By setting the variable display pattern command in step S47, it is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16). Further, when the variable display pattern command is output to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16), a drive signal is output to the special symbol display 41 to start the special symbol variable display. The sub-integrated board 111 executes a symbol setting process (step S102) and a notice selection process (step S103), which will be described later, based on the fact that the variable display pattern has been received. Information indicating the result (for example, the type of notice effect, the type of variable display pattern, the stop symbol) is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 and the command is received by the second electrical control board 113 In addition, the CPU 113a performs control to start the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the variation time of the special symbol is set substantially coincident with the effect time included in the variation display pattern transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111, and has an effect time corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol in step S43. The variable display pattern is determined. Note that the variation time of the special symbol and the effect time included in the variation display pattern may not coincide with each other. Then, in step S43, processing for setting the variation time of the special symbol to the variation timer provided in the RAM 101c mounted on the main control board 101 is also performed. This variation timer starts when a variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16), and a special symbol indicator is displayed when the variation timer times out in the special symbol variation processing (step S15). A drive signal is output to 41 to stop the special symbol fluctuation display by the main control board 101, and a display command for instructing the sub-integration board 111 to stop the decoration symbol fluctuation display is transmitted. The sub-integrated board 111 transmits the display command to the second electrical control board 113 based on the reception of the display command instructing to stop the decorative display of the decorative symbols, and the second electrical control board 113. When the display command is received, the CPU 113a controls to stop and display the decorative symbol.

  Further, the CPU 101a checks whether or not the probability variation status flag is set (step S48). When the probability variation status flag is set, the CPU 101a sets a probability variation big hit command which is a display command indicating that the probability variation big hit is set. (Step S49). By setting the probability variation jackpot command in step S49, the command is transmitted to the sub integrated substrate 111 together with the variation display pattern command. As a result, it is possible to make the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111 recognize that it is a probable big hit. As described above, in this embodiment, the basic display pattern selection is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 and determines the variable display pattern according to the result of the big hit determination process in the variable display pattern setting process. Means.

  The variable display pattern selected in steps S42, 45, and 46 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the display command is 2-byte data transmitted from the main control board 101 to the sub-integrated board 111, and the special symbol display 41 starts the special symbol variation display after starting the special symbol display. Includes data for specifying the variation time and reach production until the variation display is stopped (from the start of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the display area 42 until the variation display of the decoration symbol is stopped). It is.

  However, the announcement effect is basically determined by the sub-integrated board 111 in accordance with the display command transmitted from the main control board 101. However, data for specifying a part of the announcement effect is provided only when the spotlight announcement is performed. When it is included in the display command and the sub-integrated board 111 receives the display command, the spotlight notice is always executed. That is, only the spotlight notice in the notice effect is determined by the main control board 101. Note that the spotlight notice may not be determined by the main control board 101 but may be determined by the sub-integrated board 111, for example, by setting it in the lightning notice table as one of the lightning notice patterns described later.

  In addition, the display device is provided with a plurality of display areas, the symbols are variably displayed in each display area, and the display is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination process described above. In the case of having a plurality of lines, when a symbol that has not been stopped on any display line stops at a predetermined symbol, the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display line becomes a specific display mode, or A state in which all symbols are variably displayed in a combination such that all the symbols are in a specific display mode on any display line is referred to as a reach mode. In other words, the reach mode is a mode (a mode immediately before a big hit) representing a step before the big hit display. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a and the right decorative symbol 80c among the left, middle and right decorative symbols which have only one display line and are displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 ( A combination of two arbitrary decorative symbols) is stopped at the same symbol, and a medium decorative symbol 80b (the remaining decorative symbol when the combination of two arbitrary decorative symbols is stopped) is variably displayed. Or a state in which all the decorative symbols displayed in the display area 42 are variably displayed in synchronization with the same symbol combination (for example, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are always the same symbol). The state in which the variable display is synchronized is referred to as a reach mode. Flops 44a, 44b of the lighting or blinking in a predetermined manner, a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 116, a predetermined voice output at wave device 115) that the reach demonstration.

  Further, in this embodiment, the special symbol change display on the special symbol display 41 does not place a load on the control on the main control board 101, and therefore the LED is variably displayed only for the change time corresponding to the change display pattern. It is a monotonous display and does not display reach. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is referred to as a reach mode, it indicates that the decorative design of the display area 42 has reached the reach mode. Further, the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 sets the decorative pattern of the display area 42 as the reach mode when it is determined to be a big hit in the above-described big hit determination process, but is determined to be out of place. Even if it is time, the process (reach determination process) which determines whether a decoration symbol is made into a reach aspect is performed, and when the determination as a reach aspect is made, a decoration symbol is made into a reach aspect. That is, even when it is determined that the big hit determination process is out of place, the reach mode can be achieved.

  The “normal fluctuation” with the fluctuation number 1 is a fluctuation display pattern without a reach mode. The variation number 2 “shortening variation” is a variation display pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shorter than the “normal variation”, and the jackpot determination extracted based on the detection by the start sensor 55. This is a variation display pattern that can be selected when any one of the conditions such as the upper limit value, the probability variation state, and the short-time state is established as the value of the reserved ball number counter indicating the stored number of random numbers. The “normal reach” of the variation numbers 3 and 4 is a variation display pattern that does not perform reach effects such as a super reach effect and a super reach development effect after the reach aspect is formed.

  Further, “wolf man reach” with variation numbers 5 and 6, “Dracula reach” with variation numbers 11 and 12, and “Franken reach” with variation numbers 17 and 18 are defined after each reach has been formed. Fluctuation display for performing a super reach effect executed by image display control (for example, in “Wolf Man Reach”, an effect executed by image display control in which a wolf man in the form of a human being is good at cooking a decorative design) It is a pattern. Further, “wolf man reach development” with variation numbers 7 and 8, “Dracula reach development” with variation numbers 13 and 14, and “Franken reach development” with variation numbers 17 and 18 are executed by image display control of each character. Super Reach Development directed by these characters (for example, in “Wolf Man Reach Development”, the wolf man transformed from a human figure into a wolf, and a wolf man in the form of a wolf. However, it is a variable display pattern in which image display is controlled by continuing the effect of dynamically cooking a decorative pattern with a specialty dish. In this way, basic effect execution means for executing a super reach effect in the display area 42 based on the change display patterns of change numbers 5, 6, 11, 12, 17, and 18 is provided. In this embodiment, it is a super reach development effect as a development effect (wolf man reach development effect, Dracula reach development effect, Franken Reach development effect, Monster-kun reach development effect), variation numbers 7-10, 13-16, There is provided a development effect executing means for executing a super reach effect and a super reach development effect in the display area 42 based on 19 to 22 variable display patterns.

  “Wolf man reach-monster” with variation numbers 9 and 10, “Dracula reach-monster” with variation numbers 15 and 16, and “Franken reach-monster” with variation numbers 21 and 22 Unlike the super reach development effect corresponding to these characters, after performing the super reach effect executed by the image display control of the character, it is executed by the image display control of the character (monster) image 70 imitating a human boy. This is a variable display pattern that continues with Super Reach development.

  In addition, the “spotlight notice” of the variation numbers 23 to 31 is a super-reach effect after performing a notice effect for notifying that a super-reach development effect corresponding to each character is performed before the reach mode is formed. This is a variable display pattern for performing a super reach development effect according to a character whose image display is controlled by a notice effect without executing the. Further, the “actual object reach” of the variable numbers 32 and 33 (special effect after the first display mode) means the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 built in the rear unit 142 described above after the reach mode is formed, and The variation display pattern performs a reach effect by driving and controlling the shielding members 164, 166, and 168. As described above, in this embodiment, the display mode display control at the time of disappearance that controls display of any of the character images 70 to 74 in the image of the spotlight 88 based on the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 23 to 31. Means. The character reach 150, 152, and 154 are controlled and displayed on the display area 42 based on the change display patterns of the change numbers 32 and 33 and the lightning notice pattern of the lightning notice pattern No. 2 for executing the accessory reach effect. The first display mode post-special effect executing means for controlling the driving is provided.

  The “full rotation reach” of the fluctuation number 34 is a fluctuation display pattern that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination process described later, and the left displayed in the display area 42. -A variable display pattern that displays the decorative patterns on the middle and right in synchronization with the same combination of symbols, and stops the display with either one of the probable big hit symbol or the non-probable big hit symbol. It is. The “super reach branch premier” with a variable number 35 is a variable display pattern that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination process described later. Is a variable display pattern for deriving which super-reach effect (or super-reach development effect) is performed among a plurality of types of super-reach effects in a manner different from the super-reach branch effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is a variable display pattern that can be selected according to the determination result of the jackpot determination process and the reach determination process described above (one of the jackpots, the detachment with the reach mode, or the detachment without the reach mode). A plurality of set variation display pattern tables (not shown) are set. For example, all random numbers are assigned to the variable number 1 in the table selected when the above-mentioned time-shortening control is not executed, among the variation display pattern tables at the time of loss, which are selected when the loss is not accompanied by the reach mode. All random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 2 in the table selected when the time-shortening control is executed among the deviation fluctuation display pattern tables. The CPU 101a selects the variable display pattern table corresponding to the determination result of the big hit determination process and the reach determination process in steps S42, 45, and 46 of the variable display pattern setting process, and one variable display random number is allocated. The variable display pattern is determined in step S43. Note that the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 31, 34, and 35 can be selected only when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when the performance is performed according to these variation display patterns, the player can display the decorative symbols. It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the game becomes a jackpot symbol (the jackpot is confirmed), so that the interest of the player can be improved when these fluctuation display patterns are executed. In addition, since the variation display patterns other than the variation numbers 31, 34, and 35 are performed in the same or similar production manner at the time of losing the big hit, it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is true only by looking at the production. The player can be thrilled without lowering the interest of the game. As described above, in this embodiment, after the reach mode is displayed, the basic effect as the reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, super reach development effect, etc.) by the character image (character images 70 to 75 to be described later). An aspect is made feasible.

  Next, a decorative design variably displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the form of a decorative design.

  In this embodiment, ten types of symbols “0” to “9” are used as decorative symbols (plural types of images). Further, the decorative symbol is composed of a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol, and the decorative symbols are “1”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6” shown in FIG. , “7”, “9” are specified symbols, and three types of “0”, “2”, “8” shown in FIG. 33B are non-specific symbols. It is stored in the ROM 113b of the control board 113. Thus, ROM113b mounted in the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 is an image memory | storage means which memorize | stores the decoration design as a multiple types of image.

  When the big hit determination random number is a winning value in the big hit determination processing described above and the probability variation determination random number is a probability variation value, that is, when the probability variation big hit is made, the CPU 111a performs the symbol setting processing (step S102). The same combination of specific symbols is selected as a stop symbol (probable variation big hit symbol) for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. If the value is not a value, that is, if a non-probable big hit (ordinary big hit) is used, the CPU 111a uses the symbol setting process (step S102) to stop the same non-specific symbol from left, middle and right decorative symbols (non-probable change). Selected as a jackpot symbol). The CPU 111a stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols selected as the stopped symbols in the symbol setting process (step S102) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after executing the variable display of the decorative symbols in the display area 42. In the symbol setting process (step S102), information indicating whether or not the jackpot determination random number is a winning value, and if it is a winning value, whether or not the probability variation determining random number is a probability variation value is displayed on the second electrical decoration control board. It may be executed by the CPU 113a when it is transmitted to 113 and the command is received by the second lighting control board 113.

  The ratio of the specific symbol to the total number of decorative symbols (7/10 in this example) is determined that the probability variation determination random number is a probability variation value when the jackpot determination random number is a winning value in the jackpot determination processing described later. This is different from the probability variation rush rate (2/3 in this example). That is, in this embodiment, the probability variation entry rate is two-thirds, but the decorative symbol that can be a probability variation symbol, that is, the proportion of the specific symbol is seven tenths, the proportion of the specific symbol and the probability variation There is no one-to-one correspondence with the rush rate. Thus, by making the ratio of the specific symbol displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 higher than the probability variation rush rate, it is possible to make it appear as if the probability variation rush rate is higher than the actual probability variation rush rate. The expectation that the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and the probability variation jackpot is achieved can be improved. Note that the probability variation rush rate may not be 2/3, and the ratio of the specific symbol and the probability variation rush rate may be matched.

  In addition, the left and right decorative symbols are arranged in the order of “0”, “1”, “2”,..., “9” from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. Liquid crystal with a random pattern different from the order of “0”, “1”, “2”,..., “9”. The display is changed in such a manner as to jump around the center of the display area 42 of the display 116. Further, the color scheme of the decorative symbol is set so that the specific symbol is colored red and the non-specific symbol is colored blue, so that the player can easily identify the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol.

  Moreover, the form of the decorative design is comprised in the aspect with thickness (the inside of a number, a side part) so that various numbers can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. Hereinafter, the form of the decorative design will be described with reference to FIG. However, in the following description, without limiting to the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, when the decorative symbols are generally described, the decorative symbols 80 are described for convenience. As shown in FIG. 33C, the decorative design 80 two-dimensionally displays an array identification unit 121 indicating the shape of a number as sequence identification information that can identify the sequence of the sequence, and the depth of the sequence identification unit 121. And a depth display portion 122 that is a thick portion to be processed. FIG. 33C illustrates an example of a decorative pattern 80 that includes an array identification unit 121 that indicates the number “7” and a depth display unit 122 that forms a thick portion of the number “7”. Yes. In the array identification portion 121 (inside the number) in the decorative pattern 80, various characters such as “Wolf Man”, “Dracula”, “Franken”, “Monster-kun”, “Kyoko-chan”, and “Moon and Bat” are described. 123 is depicted. Specifically, in the specific symbol shown in FIG. 33A, “wolf man” is depicted in the decorative symbol 80 of “1”, “Franken” is depicted in the decorative symbol 80 of “3”, and “4” "December and bats" are depicted on the decorative design 80 of "", "Dracula" is depicted on the decorative design 80 of "5", "Moon and bats" are depicted on the decorative design 80 of "6" “Monster-kun” is depicted on the decorative symbol 80 of “7”, and “Kai-chan” is depicted on the decorative symbol 80 of “9”. On the other hand, in the non-specific symbol shown in FIG. 33 (B), “month and bat” are depicted in the decorative symbols 80 of “0”, “2”, and “8”, respectively.

  In addition, a background image 124 as a decorative pattern for decorating the depth display portion 122 is depicted on the depth display portion 122 (number side surface portion) in the decorative design 80. In the background image 124, the “monster house and bat” pattern is depicted in common in all the decorative patterns 80 of “0”, “1”, “2”,. It should be noted that the depth display portion 122 which is a thick portion is a wide area so that the background image 124 (“monster house and bat” pattern) is sufficiently depicted (so that the player can recognize the background image 124). Has been taken. The color scheme of the various characters 123 and the background image 124 is the same color as the color scheme of the decorative design 80 (for example, in the case of a specific design, the color scheme of the various characters 123 and the background image 124 is based on the red color of the specific design by gradation or the like). Image display control is performed so that recognition of numbers (array identifying unit 121) in the decorative design 80 is not hindered. In addition, the array identification unit 121 has a larger occupied area on the display form in the decorative design 80 than the depth display unit 122. In other words, the display surface of the numerical part constituting the decorative design 80 is larger than the display surface of the thick part. For this reason, in the visibility of the decorative design 80, the thick part (depth display part 122) does not prevent recognition of the numerical part (array identification part 121). Note that the arrangement identification unit 121 is not limited to a numeric shape, and may be any shape as long as it indicates the shape of the arrangement identification information. However, the sequence identification information here refers to information that is composed of a plurality of types of identification information and that can generally identify the sequence order. Specifically, numbers such as “0, 1, 2,...” “1, 2, 3,...”, “A, b, c,...” “A, B, C,. ... Information such as English characters such as “a, i, u,...” “A, i, u,.

  Moreover, the form of the decorative design is comprised in the aspect with thickness (the inside of a number, a side part) so that various numbers can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. And the various characters (wolf man, Dracula, Franken, Monster-kun, Kai-chan) described above are described inside the numbers in the decorative design, and the background image is described on the side of the numbers. Yes. The color scheme of each character and background image is the same color as the color scheme of the decorative pattern (for example, in the case of a specific symbol, the red color based on the red color of the specific symbol by gradation etc. The display of the image is controlled so that the recognition of the numbers in the decorative design is not hindered.

  Next, the flow of the notice effect and the reach effect that are performed after the decorative pattern change in the display area 42 is started until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the notice effect and the reach effect. In the notice effect and the reach effect, a character A (hereinafter referred to as a wolf man), a character B (hereinafter referred to as a Dracula), a character, which are stored in a ROM 113b mounted on the second electrical control board 113. Image display using C (hereinafter referred to as Franken), character D (hereinafter referred to as Monster), and character E (hereinafter referred to as Monster), for example, a character image simulating a human boy (Monster) 70, character image 71 imitating a wolf man, character image 72 imitating Dracula, character image 73 imitating Franken, character image imitating a human girl (Kai-chan) 74), mini character A (Hereinafter referred to as Hiroshi), mini character B (hereinafter referred to as Hiroshi sister), mini Character C (hereinafter referred to as a triplet combining a wolf man (character A described above), Dracula (character B described above), Franken (character C described above)), mini character D (hereinafter referred to as Kaiko-chan) (Referred to as character E described above) (for example, a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi older sister, a three character mini character image simulating a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken) 92, a mini character image imitating a human girl (kaiko-chan) 93), the character body 154 described above (a member imitating a wolf man (character A described above)), and a character body 152 (dracula (character described above) B), a character body 150 (Franken (described above) Character C) counterfeit the member), there is a case where the drive control, the effect of is carried out.

  In addition, the notice effect is an effect for suggesting the possibility of being in a big hit gaming state to the player, and the expectation level for the big hit game state according to the type of the notice effect to be executed (the big hit expectation degree: The ratio at which the notice effect is executed / the jackpot and the ratio at which the notice effect is executed when it is off are set to be different. In general, when a big hit gaming state is reached, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is controlled to be high, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced by executing the notice effect. In addition, because it is possible to grasp the jackpot expectation level according to the type of the notice effect, it is possible to increase the player's expectation when a notice effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed, and a notice effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. It is possible to raise the player's sense of expectation when a notice effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is executed compared to when it is performed.

  The notice effect in this embodiment is executed before the right decorative symbol 80c is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variable display is started. This increases the player's expectation until the reach form in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped at the same design as the left decorative design 80a is formed, and gives further expectation when the reach form is formed. Even if the right decorative design 80c does not stop at the same design as the left decorative design 80a, it is possible to increase the player's expectation until the notice effect is finished. Thereby, it is possible to reduce boredom in the idle time until all the symbols of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, first, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice is executed as the notice effect. The mini character notice (back effect) means that each of the above-mentioned mini characters A to D is displayed on the back side of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a and the right decorative pattern 80c in the display area 42. A display area for the display area 42 is narrower than the variable display area with the decorative pattern 80c, and is smaller than a character that is image-displayed in an advanced notice or the like described later (a display area for the display area 42 is narrow). This is an effect that appears as a character (mini character). However, a wolf man (Character A), Dracula (Character B), Franken (Character C) does not appear as a single character as in the advanced notice described later, and a three-person mode combining these characters Appear in Then, one of Hiroshi (mini character A), Hiroshi sister (mini character B), three-person group (mini character C), Kai-chan (mini character D), or a combination of these mini characters is controlled by image display control. Make it appear.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice is executed as the notice effect regardless of whether or not the above-described mini character notice is executed. The advanced notice means that each of the above-mentioned characters A to D is visually recognized by a plurality of types of characters by controlling either image display control or drive control of the character bodies 150, 152, 154. In this embodiment, it is controlled to appear in the order of wolf man → Dracula → Franken → Monster-kun. The character displayed by the image display control is controlled not to appear by the character body drive control, and the character appearing by the character body drive control is controlled not to appear by the image display control. For example, when the wolf man is displayed as an image, the character body 154 imitating the wolf man is not driven to appear after the image display of the character image 71 simulating the wolf man.

  In addition, when the above-described advanced notice is executed, comment notice or button notice is executed as a notice effect. The comment notice is executed as a part or all of the advanced notice, and if it is a part of the advanced notice, a plurality of types of characters can be sequentially viewed through image display control or drive control of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. This is an effect of displaying the comment clearly and clearly using a balloon from the monster who is always displayed during the advance notice. The button notice is executed as an advanced notice, and a comment requesting the operation of the operation button 38 is displayed using a balloon similar to the comment notice, and the operation button 38 is operated a predetermined number of times within the valid period. Is an effect of updating and displaying comments. Note that, unlike the comment notice, the button notice does not appear such that a plurality of types of characters are sequentially visible after the button notice is executed and the image display control or the drive control of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is performed.

  When the above-described advanced type notice is executed, it is determined whether or not the intense heat notice is executed as a notice effect. The intense heat notice is executed as a part of the advanced notice, and any one of the characters A to D displayed as an image in the advanced notice is changed to the color scheme of clothing displayed as an image in the normal advance notice. Unlike, it is an effect that appears in the color scheme of clothing based on white. However, when a wolf man is made to appear by this intense heat notice, the character of the wolf man after changing from a human figure to a wolf figure is made to appear, instead of changing the color scheme of clothing. In this way, when the intense heat warning is executed as part of the advanced notice, more attention is paid to the advanced notice that may be executed than the advanced notice. Can be made. Characters with intense heat warnings appear different from the color scheme of clothing displayed in the image of the normal development type notice, but they appear with the color scheme of clothing based on white, but the character has decorations etc. Any difference can be used as long as the player can clearly recognize the difference from the character mode according to the advanced notice.

  In addition, control is performed so that a character with an intense heat notice appears in combination with an advanced notice, that is, an image display of the character determined by the intense heat notice corresponds to an image display of the character determined with the advanced notice. Even if it is determined to execute the intense heat advance notice, control is performed so that the character due to the intense heat advance notice does not appear unless there is a character corresponding to the image display of the character determined by the advanced advance notice. For example, even if it is determined to display an image of Franken whose clothing color has been changed as a notice of intense heat, it is determined that the character body 150 imitating Franken is driven and controlled to appear, If it is determined that the advance notice is to be terminated at an earlier stage, the frankene whose clothing color scheme has been changed will not appear on the image display.

  Further, when the above-described advanced notice is not executed, as a notice effect, a lightning flash notice, which is an image display control that causes lightning lightning (lightning) to run on the dark image and causes the stop display of the decorative symbols to emerge due to lightning, is displayed. The background image (for example, a daytime background image 81 (first special image) and a night background image 82 (second special image) described later) displayed at the rear of the decorative pattern is changed (for example, the daytime background in the display area 42). When the image 81 is displayed, the background change notice is an image display control to be changed to the night background image 82, and four types of characters (wolf man, dracula, franken) corresponding to the super reach development effect described later. , Monster-kun), or a character that can only appear when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol (the jackpot is confirmed) as a result of the variable display (Kai-chan) There it is determined whether to perform one is an image display control appearing while the spotlight spotlight notice of. When these notice effects (lightning flash notice, background change notice, spotlight notice) are executed, blackout effects that display a dark image that darkens the display area 42 for a predetermined time are performed twice.

  When the above-described notice effect is not executed, and when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed after the above-described notice effect is executed, the reach mode (in this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a and the right After the decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed with the same design and the middle decorative design 80b is not yet stopped), the normal reach effect (first basic effect) is performed with the reach mode displayed. Is called. When it is determined that the super reach effect is performed after the normal reach effect is executed, first, the super reach branch effect (branch effect notice) is performed. The super reach branching effect is a character image imitating a wolf man, a character image imitating Dracula, a character image imitating Franken, a character image imitating Monster, One of the character images imitating a human girl (Kai-chan) is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90, and the super reach effect based on the character image displayed in the final branch effect (third branch effect) ( However, in the case of a character image that imitates a human boy (monster), in the case of a character image that imitates a human girl (monster), This is an effect for deriving a full rotation reach effect to be described later. In this embodiment, the first basic effect execution means capable of executing the normal reach effect as the first basic effect, and the super-reach effect and the effect after the super reach effect as the second basic effect (super reach of the monster-kun reach development effect) A second basic effect execution means capable of executing a reach development effect, a full rotation reach effect, and the like.

  In the case of executing the above-described super reach branch effect, it is determined whether or not a branch accessory effect notice is executed as a branch effect. The branch effect presentation notice is to drive the same character bodies 150, 152, and 154 as the character displayed by the image display control when the third branch effect is image-controlled as part of the branch effect. It is an effect that appears by control. As described above, when the branch effect announcement is executed as a part of the branch effect announcement, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are displayed rather than the branch effect announcement only by controlling the image display of the character. By controlling the driving, it is possible to pay more attention to the branch effect notice. In addition, in the branch effect notice, the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (the reach is formed, but the middle decorative symbol 80b is not stopped and displayed), and the game is watching the decorative symbol. Although there is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced for the player, the execution of the branching effect effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear in front of the display area 42 causes the user to get bored with the branching effect notice. I won't let you.

  Then, after executing the above-described super reach branch effect, the image display control of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man is executed based on the character image displayed in the final branch effect (third branch effect). Wolf man reach effect, which is an effect to be performed, Dracula reach effect, which is an effect executed by image display control of the character image 72 simulating Dracula, and an effect executed by image display control of the character image 73 simulating Franken One of the super-reach productions is performed. In the case of a character image imitating a human boy (monster), a monster-kun reach development effect which is an effect executed by image display control of a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy, which will be described later. When the super reach development effect is a character image imitating a human girl (Kyoko-chan), a full rotation reach effect described later is executed. Also, in the super reach branching effect, if the background color of the portrait 90 is red, no outlier symbol is derived in the super reach effect, and a big hit symbol is derived in the super reach effect, or will be described later. Continue to Super Reach development.

  In addition, when it is determined to execute a super reach development effect that is continuously executed from the above-described super reach effect (for example, if a wolf man reach effect is performed) Performs one of the Wolf Man Reach Development, Dracula Reach Development, and Franken Reach Development from the production performed in the Super Reach Production. Note that, in the super reach development effect, image display control of the same character as the character whose image display is controlled in the super reach effect is executed. In addition, in the super reach development effect, in addition to the effect of controlling the image display of the same character as the super reach effect, the monster is an effect executed by the image display control of the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy. Kun reach development production may be performed. As a special basic effect mode, a super reach development effect using the character image 74 of Kai-chan may be performed. In this case, only when the determination result is a big hit in the variable display pattern table. The variation display pattern table may be configured so that the variation display pattern can be selected.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned spotlight notice is performed, a super reach development effect corresponding to a character whose image display is controlled by the spotlight notice (normal reach effect, super reach branch effect, and super reach effect are not performed ( For example, when the display of the monster is controlled by the spotlight notice, the monster-kun reach development effect) is performed.

  In addition, after the display area 42 is darkly displayed as a blackout effect, if neither a lightning flash notice, a background change notice, nor a spotlight notice is performed, the super reach branch effect is passed after a predetermined time has elapsed. In some cases, an effect that is not performed, and an accessory reach effect that is executed by controlling the drive of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 described above may be performed. . Note that there is a case where an accessory reach effect is also performed when the above-described advanced notice is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the actuating action effect mode (actual object reach, character body 150 of the advance notice) with the drive control of the shielding members 164, 166, 168 are provided. 152, 154 and a pattern for driving and controlling the shielding members 164, 166, and 168, a branching effect effect, a pattern for driving the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 for button notification, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154, and It is possible to execute an accessory non-acting effect mode (a pattern in which the character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, 168 are not driven and controlled) without driving control of the shielding members 164, 166, 168. In addition, the actor action effect mode includes a single actor action effect mode in which any one of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is driven (the character body 150, 152, 154 of the advance notice). A pattern for driving any one of them, a pattern for driving any one of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 for branching effect production, a pattern for driving any one of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 for button announcement) , Driving a plurality of character bodies among the character bodies 150, 152, 154, and performing an effect (a plurality of character bodies among the character bodies 150, 152, 154 of the advance notice are driven) Patterns that drive a plurality of character bodies among the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 of the pattern and branching effect production And down, etc.), it is included.

  In addition, as a reach effect, it is an effect that is not performed when passing through a normal reach effect and a super reach branch effect, and the variable display is synchronized so that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols become the same symbol In other cases, a full-reach reach effect that stops display with a big hit symbol may be performed. The full-reach reach effect uses a combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols as the stop symbol, that is, when the big hit determination random number is a hit value in the big hit determination processing described later because the big hit is determined. It is a reach production that can only be performed.

  Note that the expected degree of jackpot when the above-described reach effect is executed (the ratio at which the reach effect is executed when the jackpot is reached / the ratio at which the reach effect is executed when the jackpot is lost or ) Normal Reach Production, Wolf Man Reach Production, Dracula Reach Production, Franken Reach Production, Wolf Man Reach Production Production, Dracula Reach Development Production, Franken Reach Development Production, Monster-kun Reach Development Production, Property Reach Production, Full Rotation Reach Production When the reach effect is set so as to increase in the order of and the expectation level for jackpot is high, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol as a result of the reach effect increases.

  Next, various processes of the sub-integrated board 111 that receives various commands from the main control board 101 will be described. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the reset process, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 38 is a command reception end interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example.

  First, when the reset process is started, as shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 performs an initial setting process (step S240). This initial setting process includes a process for initializing the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. Note that interrupts are prohibited during the initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is 0 (step S242). This 16 ms elapsed flag T is a flag for measuring 16 ms in a timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed. When the 16 ms elapsed flag T is 1 in step S242, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed flag is set to 0 (step S244), and the 16 ms processing flag P is set to 1 (step S246). The 16 ms processing flag P is set to a value of 1 when starting a 16 ms steady process described later, and to a value of 0 when ending. Subsequently, a steady process of 16 ms is performed (step S248). The 16 ms steady process executes a command analysis process for analyzing a command output from the main control board 101 and a control based on the command input from the main control board 101 (controls various effect settings and state transitions for the command). ) Production control process, 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process for setting the driving pattern of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, 155 in the scheduler, serial output for transmitting lighting data to the production lamps 44a and 44b, and the decoration lamp 49 The process and a watchdog timer process for monitoring whether a steady process of 16 ms is performed. Subsequently, the 16 ms processing flag P is set to a value of 0 (end of 16 ms steady processing) (step S250), and the process returns to step S242 again, every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes 1, ie, every 16 ms has elapsed. Steps S244 to S250 described above are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not 1 in step S42 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is 0), that is, if 16 ms has not elapsed, step S242 is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes 1, ie, 16 ms elapses. Repeat the above determination.

  Next, when timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 36, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 performs 2 ms timer interrupt processing (step S260). This 2 ms timer interruption process is performed by photosensors 150n, 153n, 152n, which detect the original positions of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154, respectively. A history creation process for creating the detection history of the original position of 155n, a stepping motor process for driving the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are performed.

  Subsequently, the value 1 is added to the 2 ms update counter UC (step S262). The 2 ms update counter UC is a counter that counts the number of times this timer interrupt process has been performed. A value 1 of the 2 ms update counter UC corresponds to a time of 2 ms. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter UC has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter UC × 2 ms) (step S264). If 16 ms, a value 1 is set to the 16 ms elapsed flag T (step S266), and the 16 ms processing flag P is 0, that is, whether the 16 ms steady processing of step S248 of the reset processing shown in FIG. Determine whether or not. When the 16 ms processing flag P is 0, that is, when 16 ms steady processing is not performed, the work area is backed up (step S270), and this routine is terminated. In this work area backup, the information processed in the steady process of 16 ms in step S248 of the reset process shown in FIG. 35 is copied to a copy area provided on the work area. On the other hand, if 16 ms has not elapsed in step S264 or if no information is set during the steady process of 16 ms in step S268, this routine is terminated as it is.

  Next, when the command reception interrupt process is started, as shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 starts receiving a command from the main control board 101 (hereinafter referred to as “WR signal”). It is determined whether or not a signal for selecting various boards from the main control board 101 (hereinafter referred to as “SEL signal”) is a value 1 (step S280). The CPU 101a of the main control board 101 first transmits a command to the sub-integrated board 111 by setting the SEL signal corresponding to the sub-integrated board 111 to the value 1 and the WR signal to the value 1, respectively.

  This command is composed of 4 nibbles per packet. This “nibble” means 4 bits, which is 8 bits (1 byte) in 2 nibbles, that is, 16 bits (2 bytes) in 4 nibbles. In the extraction of 1 nibble data, after the WR signal rises from the value 0 to the value 1 (referred to as “up edge”) and is held for a predetermined time (for example, 20 to 50 microseconds (hereinafter referred to as μs)), This is performed when the WR signal falls from the value 1 to the value 0 (referred to as “down edge”), and is performed a total of four times in one packet.

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S280, that is, when the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 transmits a command to the sub-integrated board 111, command reception processing is performed (step S282), and this routine is finished. To do. In this command reception process, the received 1 nibble command (one of the four divided commands) is stored in a ring buffer provided in the RAM 111c of the sub-integrated board 111. This “ring buffer” is a buffer used so that the end and the head of the buffer are connected to each other. Data is sequentially stored from the head of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, the data is returned to the beginning and stored. After storing in the ring buffer, the buffer write counter is incremented by 1. This buffer write counter is incremented by 1 each time a command reception process is performed, so when 1 packet (4 nibbles) is stored, the buffer write counter becomes 4.

  On the other hand, when both the SEL signal and the WR signal are 0 in step S280, that is, when the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 does not output a command to the sub-integrated board 111, this routine is finished as it is. At the time of command transmission from the main control board 101 to the sub integrated board 111, as described above, a predetermined time (for example, 20 to 50 μs) from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal, the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 Bit) is held constant, but the signal may be disturbed due to the influence of noise, and the command may not be received normally. Therefore, as a countermeasure against the noise, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 receives the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 bits) (first time), and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 μs), the SEL signal, the WR signal, Receive data (4 bits). Then, it is determined whether or not it matches the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time. If the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 bits) received at the first time match, it is determined whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S80 described above. On the other hand, when it does not match the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time, the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) are received again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and received at the first time. The determination is repeated until it matches the selected SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits).

  Next, when the command reception end interrupt process is started, as shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 (step S290). ). When the output of the command to the sub-integrated board 111 is completed, the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 sets the WR signal to 0 and then sets the SEL signal to 0 (down edge). When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 in step S90, that is, when the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 completes outputting the command to the sub-integrated board 111, a command reception end process is performed (step S292). Exit the routine. In this command reception end process, the buffer write counter added in the command reception interrupt process described above is set to 0. When the command is successfully received, the buffer write counter has a value of 4 because one packet is 4 nibbles. Further, when reception of one packet cannot be performed, that is, when the buffer write counter is less than 4, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, when both the WR signal and the SEL signal are not 0 in step S290, that is, when the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 has not finished outputting the command to the sub-integrated board 111, this routine is finished as it is. As described above, as a noise countermeasure, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated substrate 111 receives the SEL signal again (first time) and then receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time (for example, 1 μs) and receives it for the first time. It is determined whether or not it matches the SEL signal. If it matches the SEL signal received for the first time, it is determined in step S90 described above whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are zero. On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the SEL signal received for the first time, the SEL signal is received again after a predetermined time, and the determination is repeated until it coincides with the SEL signal received for the first time.

  The priority order of each process is set in the order of command reception interrupt process, command reception end interrupt process, timer interrupt process, and 16 ms steady process.

  Next, various effect control processes executed on the sub-integrated board 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an effect control process executed on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 40 is a list showing random numbers updated by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a symbol setting process (step S102) which is a subroutine of the effect control process. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process (step S103) which is a subroutine of the effect control process. These processes are executed in the above-described 16 ms steady process (step S248 of the reset process), and the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 has a predetermined timing (this implementation) according to the effect control program stored in the ROM 111b. In this embodiment, a part of the processing executed every 2 ms) is shown.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not a display signal (including a display command) has been received from the main control board 101 (step S101). When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 receives the display signal from the main control board 101, the CPU 111a executes a command reception process (step S282 of the command reception interrupt process), and the display signal is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 111c. The reception signal indicating that the display signal is received and the display signal is received is set. In step S101, it is determined whether or not the reception flag is set, and it is determined that the display signal is received when the reception flag is set.

  When it is determined in step S101 that a command (display signal) has been received, a symbol setting process (step S102), a notice selection process (step S103), a sound control process (step S104), and a lamp control process (step S105) which will be described later. ) And symbol variation setting processing (step S106), button input processing (step S107), symbol variation control processing (step S108), jackpot display processing (step S109), and sub information output processing (step S110). Are executed sequentially. In the advance notice selection process (step S103), the advanced advance notice selection process, the intense heat advance notice selection process, the lightning notice advance selection process, the mini character advance notice selection process, and the branching effect advance notice selection process, which will be described later, are executed and determined by these processes. Whether or not to execute a notice effect based on the notice pattern, and if a notice effect is to be executed, which notice effect (notice effect pattern) is to be executed is determined. Although details will be described later, when it is determined in the advanced notice selection process that an advanced notice pattern requiring operation of the operation button 38 is executed, a button input waiting time corresponding to the evolved notice pattern is determined. Is set as a button input waiting timer, and the button input waiting timer is started.

  In the sound control process (step S <b> 104), the control data of the sound wave device 115 is selected at the timing when the variation display pattern command is received from the main control board 101. In the lamp control process (step S105), the variable display pattern designated by the variable display pattern command received from the main control board 101 (display command for instructing the variable display pattern) and the notice selection process (step S103) are used. The control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49 is selected based on the selected notice effect.

  In the symbol variation setting process (step S106), the variation display pattern designated by the variation display pattern command (display command for instructing the variation display pattern) received from the main control board 101 and the notice selection process (step S103). The control data of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 is selected based on the selected notice effect, and the variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern designated by the variation display pattern command is set in the variation timer. Start the variable time timer.

  In the button input process (step S107), it is monitored whether or not the button input waiting timer set in the advanced notice selection process of the notice selection process (step S103) has timed out. When an operation signal is input once, it is determined which comment update content is to be displayed (button notice pattern is executed).

  In the symbol variation control process (step S108), a process corresponding to the control data selected in the sound control process (step S104), the ramp control process (step S105), and the symbol variation setting process (step S106) is executed. Monitor the set variation timer. That is, a drive signal is output to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound device 115 at a predetermined timing based on the control data, and whether or not the variation timer has timed out. To monitor. Also, stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decoration lamp 49, sound wave device, which are executed when receiving a display command for instructing to stop changing the decorative symbol display from the main control board 101, are provided. While stopping the drive control of 115, the display command which instruct | indicates the change display stop of a decoration symbol is transmitted to the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113. FIG. The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives the display command for instructing to stop the display of the decorative symbols, and the symbol specified when the sub integrated substrate 111 starts the variable display ( The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at a symbol determined in the symbol setting process (step S102) and instructed when the variable display is started. In this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 outputs the drive signals of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to the first electric decoration control board 112, and is driven by the first electric decoration control board 112. There is effect member driving means for outputting a drive signal to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 when the signal is inputted a predetermined number of times.

  Further, the effect control of the notice effect based on the notice effect pattern determined in the notice selection process (step S103) is also performed in the symbol variation control process (step S108). In the jackpot display process (step S109), when a command for instructing the start of the jackpot gaming state is received from the main control board 101, the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 is controlled to display that the jackpot is displayed. The display area 42 in the jackpot gaming state displays the number of rounds and the jackpot symbol (stop symbol of the decorative symbol that has been stopped) for each round, and also instructs the main control board 101 to win the grand prize port 60. When the command to be received is received, display control of the number of counts (number of detections by the count sensor 64) won in the special winning opening 60 is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined which of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 appears at the start of the big hit gaming state, and the effect lamps 44a, 44b are displayed while the number of rounds is being displayed (when the big winning opening 60 is opened). In addition to the drive control of the decoration lamp 49 and the sound wave device 115, an effect of driving and controlling the determined character bodies 150, 152, 154 by the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 is executed.

  In the sub information output process (step S110), the decorative symbol stop symbol determined in the symbol setting process (step S102), the decorative symbol variation display determined in the symbol variation setting process (step S106), and the notice selection process (step S110). The process which transmits the various information which concerns on the display of the notice effect, etc. determined by S103) to the 1st electrical decoration control board 112, the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113, and the waveform control board 114 is performed. Specifically, the stepping motor 150h selected based on the variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern command received from the main control board 101 and the notice effect selected in the notice selection process (step S103), 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decorative lamp 49, and a stepping motor 150h, by transmitting a drive signal to the first electrical control board 112 and the waveform control board 114 based on the control data of the sound wave device 115. Operation control of 152h, 153f, and 155, lighting / flashing control of the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49, and voice control of the sound wave device 115 are performed. Furthermore, by transmitting information such as the variable display pattern, the type of notice effect, and the stop symbol to the second electrical decoration control board 113, the variable symbol display is started in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. Note that the decorative symbol stop symbol is not determined in the symbol setting process (step S102), and is included in the information on whether or not to use the variable display pattern and the probability variation jackpot (specified by the probability variation jackpot command received from the main control board 101). It may be determined by the second electrical decoration control board 113 on the basis. As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the process according to the variation display pattern, and the information corresponding to the result of the process is the sub-information output process (step S110). Display control means for transmitting to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and controlling the display of the variation display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. I have. Further, it is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and includes branching effect presentation notice random numbers and determination values set in the branching effect presentation notice table in steps S208 and S209 of the branch effect notice selection process. Based on (in this embodiment, based on whether or not the decision value distributed to the branch role effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 and the branch role effect notice pattern random number match), the branch feature effect notice A pattern is determined and the branching effect presentation notice pattern determined in this process is output to the first electrical control board 112 in the sub information output process (step S110), and the drive signals of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 are output. When a drive signal is input a predetermined number of times on the first electrical control board 112, a drive signal is sent to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. And a member demonstration execution means for executing a branch won game presentation notice that by force is performed with branch effect notice.

  When the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives information such as a variable display pattern, a type of notice effect, and a stop symbol from the sub-integrated board 111, the CPU 113a displays the information in the display area 42 corresponding to the information. Then, process data describing a process of effect display control to be executed is selected, and control such as a decorative pattern and the above-described character image display is performed based on the contents described in the process data. The process data is stored in the ROM 113b mounted on the second lighting control board 113, and the CPU 113a reads the process data corresponding to the information received from the sub-integrated board 111 from the ROM 113b, and performs processing based on the process data. Execute. The stop symbol information is stored in the RAM 113c, and is stored in the RAM 113c when the display command instructing the stop display of the decorative symbol change display transmitted from the main control board 101 via the sub-integrated board 111 is received. The control which stops a decoration symbol with the stop symbol which is being performed is performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 40, various random numbers updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 2 ms) by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 include a specific symbol random number and a non-specific symbol random number. Random design random numbers, advanced notice pattern random numbers, comment notice pattern random numbers, button notice pattern random numbers, intense heat notice pattern random numbers, lightning notice pattern random numbers, mini character notice pattern random numbers, branch effect notice pattern random numbers, branch character effect notice pattern random numbers There are sound determination random numbers and the like. When the specific symbol random number is received a variation display pattern command that indicates a variation display pattern that is a big hit (a variation display pattern that is marked with ○ in the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. 32), Is received, that is, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined, the probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of the same specific symbol (FIG. 33 (A))) is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42. It is a random number to do. The non-specific symbol random number is a decoration in the display area 42 when the variable display pattern command that is a big hit is received and the probability variable big hit command is not received, that is, when it is determined to be a non-probable big hit. This is a random number for determining a non-probable big hit symbol (combination of the same non-specific symbols (Fig. 33 (B))) as a symbol stop symbol. The out-of-order design random number indicates an out-of-order without a reach mode and a variable display pattern that is out-of-bound with a reach mode (a variable display pattern marked with “x” in the win in the variable display pattern table shown in FIG. 32). This is a random number for determining the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42 when the variable display pattern command is received.

  The advanced notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the aforementioned advanced notice and determining the advanced notice pattern. The comment notice pattern is a random number for determining the comment notice pattern for executing the comment notice described above. The button notice pattern random number is a random number for determining a button notice pattern for executing the above button notice. The intense heat notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above intense heat notice pattern and for determining the intense heat notice pattern. The lightning warning pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the lightning warning effect described above and for determining the lightning warning pattern. The mini character notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-described mini character notice and determining the mini character notice pattern. The branch effect notice pattern random number is a random number for determining the branch effect notice pattern for executing the above-described super reach branch effect (branch effect notice). The branch role effect notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the branch role effect notice and determining the branch feature effect notice pattern for executing the branch feature effect notice. The sound determination random number is a random number for determining the sound output mode during the fluctuation display.

  In addition, various random numbers (development type notice pattern random number, comment notice pattern random number, intense heat notice pattern random number, lightning notice pattern random number, mini character notice pattern random number, branch effect notice pattern random number, branch for determining notice effect other than button notice Is obtained when a variable display pattern command is received from the main control board 101, but only for the button notice pattern random number, a predetermined number of operation signals are input within the valid period. Has been acquired when.

  In the symbol setting process (step S102) shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the received display signal is a variable display pattern command (step S111). If the variable display pattern command has not been received, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. If the variable display pattern command has been received, it is determined whether or not the variable display pattern designated by the variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern that is a big hit (step S112). If the display pattern is a variable display pattern that is not a big hit (if it is out of reach without reach or out of reach), the left decorative design 80a, the middle decorative design 80b, and right After selecting the decorative symbols 80c (step S118), the process returns to the main routine. Here, the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c are selected so as to be different from each other when they are out of reach with no reach, and left decorative symbols 80a are selected with different reach. The right decorative design 80c is the same design, and the middle decorative design 80b is selected to be a different design from the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c.

  If the variation display pattern is a big hit in step S112, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (step S113). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot command is received. If the probability variation jackpot command is received, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot command is received. Determine that there is. If it is not a probabilistic big hit in step S113 (if it is a non-probable big hit), the same non-specific symbol is selected for the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42. (Step S117). If it is a probable big hit, it is determined whether or not a re-lottery effect is performed (step S115). If the re-lottery effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S116. When a re-lottery effect is performed, the same non-specific symbol is selected as the temporary decorative symbol for the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c (step S115), and the decorative symbol is stopped as a decorative symbol in the display area 42. The same specific symbol is selected as the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c (step S116).

  The re-lottery effect means that after the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 and the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 are started, only the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 is temporarily stopped. This is an effect of stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol in the display area 42 when the variable symbol is displayed again and the special symbol display 41 is stopped. Specifically, after starting the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 and the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42, the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the display area 42 as a temporary stop symbol of the decoration symbol. After that, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are again displayed in a variably displayed manner, and when the special symbol display on the special symbol indicator 41 is stopped, the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area 42 as a decorative symbol stop symbol. It is a production to make. In this case, the re-lottery effect is performed within one effect mode so as not to give the player a misunderstanding as to whether the variable display is performed a plurality of times in the one-time decorative symbol variation display. In the symbol setting process (step S102), there is provided basic effect mode determining means for determining a stop symbol of the decorative symbol and selecting an effect pattern (basic effect mode) based on the received variable display pattern command.

  In the notice selection process (step S103) shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the received display signal is a variable display pattern (step S211). If the variable display pattern command has not been received (if no effect pattern has been selected in the symbol setting process), the process ends and the process returns to the main routine. If a variable display pattern command has been received (if an effect pattern has been selected in the symbol setting process), an advanced notice selection process (step S212), an intense heat notice selection process (step S213), and a lightning notice selection will be described later. By sequentially executing the process (step S214), the mini character notice selection process (step S215), and the branch effect notice selection process (step S216), the advanced notice pattern, the comment notice pattern, the intense heat notice pattern, and the lightning notice pattern Select a mini character notice pattern, a branch effect notice pattern, and a branch character effect notice pattern, and whether or not to execute the notice effect based on these notice patterns, and any notice when executing the notice effect. Whether or not to produce an effect (notice pattern) is determined by the processing after step S217. It should be noted that in the advanced effect notice selection process (step S212), a comment notice pattern is selected only when a comment notice effect is executed as a part of the evolved notice effect, so that a comment is based on this comment notice pattern. Rather than deciding whether to execute the notice effect, if a comment notice pattern is selected, the process is executed in steps S217 and subsequent steps based on this comment notice pattern. Also, in the branch effect notice selection process (step S216), since the branch effect notice pattern is selected only when the branch effect notice is executed, it is determined whether the branch effect notice is executed based on the branch effect notice pattern. When the branch effect notice pattern is selected instead of being determined, the process is executed in the processes after step S217 based on the branch effect notice pattern.

  The advanced notice selection process (step S212) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the advanced notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. FIG. 44 is a table showing the daytime background advanced notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 45 is a table showing the night-background advanced notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 46 is a list display diagram showing an advanced notice pattern. FIG. 47 is a list showing comment notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 48 is a list showing comment notice patterns.

  In the advanced notice selection process (step S212) shown in FIG. 43, it is determined whether or not the daytime background flag is ON (step S131). The daytime background flag is turned on when the background image in the display area 42 is the daytime background image 81, and is turned off when the background image in the display area 42 is the night background image 82. Then, the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is switched in a lightning bolt notice selection process (step S214) described later. This is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and includes an effect condition establishment determination unit that determines whether or not the daytime background flag is ON in step S131 of the advanced notice selection process.

  In step S131, if the daytime background flag is in the ON state, the daytime background development notice table (FIG. 44) is selected (step S132), and if the daytime background flag is not in the ON state (if it is in the OFF state), The night background development type advance notice table (FIG. 45) is selected (step S133). Then, an advanced type advance notice pattern random number is acquired, and one advanced type advance notice pattern is determined from the advanced type advance notice pattern set in each advanced type advance notice table based on the acquired value of the advanced type advance notice pattern random number ( Step S134). This is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and is based on the development type advance notice pattern random number and the judgment value set in the advance type notice table in step S131 to step S134 of the advanced notice selection process. In this embodiment, a multi-stage effect selection determining means for determining an advanced notice pattern) is provided. It is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process is the advanced notice pattern number 18, 20, 21 for executing the button notice effect. Sound information execution determination means for determining whether or not there is provided. A function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, and a multi-stage effect determining means for determining any one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 21 in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process. I have.

  Note that FIG. 44 shows a development notice table for day background, and FIG. 45 shows a development notice table for night background. In these advanced notice tables, 22 kinds of advanced notice pattern numbers 0 to 21 are prepared as advanced notice patterns of the advanced notice effect. Further, when the advanced notice pattern No. 0 is determined among the advanced notice patterns, the advanced notice effect is not performed. That is, in the advanced notice table, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice effect is to be executed based on the evolved notice pattern random number, and the evolved notice pattern of the developed notice effect is determined. For example, when it is determined that the development type advance notice pattern number is 1 to 21, the execution type advance notice effect is decided to be executed, and the developed type notice pattern determined as the advanced type notice pattern of the advanced type notice effect is determined. Decide on the advance notice pattern of numbers. A separate random number for determining whether or not to execute the advanced notice effect is provided, and when it is determined that the advanced notice effect is executed based on this random number, the advanced notice pattern number based on the evolved notice pattern random number is determined. You may make it determine in any one of 1-21. As described above, in this embodiment, whether an advanced notice pattern other than the advanced notice pattern number 0 is determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. In addition to the multi-stage effect execution determination means for determining whether or not, at step S134 of the advanced notice selection processing executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, any one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 21 is developed. Multi-stage effect determining means for determining the mold notice pattern is provided. The multi-stage effect determination table in the present embodiment is a daytime background advance notice table provided according to a variable display pattern and a background image (day background image 81, night background image 82), night background. It is a development type advance notice table.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the advanced notice pattern number 1 is an advanced notice pattern that provides an effect of displaying a balloon from the monster in the display area 42 when the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the balloon from the monster, the comment content based on the comment notice pattern for performing the comment notice effect is displayed (however, in the case of the advanced notice pattern numbers 18, 20, and 21, the button for performing the button notice effect) The comment content based on the notice pattern is displayed.)

  The advanced notice pattern number 2 displays a balloon from the monster in the display area 42 when starting the display of the decorative symbol, and performs a staged effect by displaying the wolf man after a predetermined period of time. The advance notice pattern No. 3 is an advance notice pattern number 3 that displays a balloon from the monster when starting to display the decorative pattern, and controls the stepping motor 155 to drive the wolf man after a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern in which a stylized character body 154 appears in front of the display area 42 to provide a staged effect.

  The advance notice pattern number 4 is displayed for a predetermined period after the image display of the balloon from the monster and the character image 71 imitating the wolf man are sequentially executed in the same manner as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 2. In this case, the advance notice pattern No. 5 has a staged effect by displaying a Dracula image, and the advance notice pattern number 5 is a balloon from the monster like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 2. The image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man is sequentially executed, and then the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f are driven and controlled in a predetermined period, and the character body 152 imitating the dracula is displayed in the display area 42. It is an advanced notice pattern that produces staged effects by appearing in front.

  The advance notice pattern number 6 is similar to the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 3 and displays the image of the balloon from the monster, and the drive control of the stepping motor 155 capable of operating the character body 154 imitating the wolf man. An advanced notice pattern that performs stepwise effects by driving the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f to drive the stepping motor 152h and imitating a dracula in the front of the display area 42 after the sequential execution. The advance notice pattern number 7 is similar to the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 4, and the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and imitating the Dracula. After the image display of the character image 72 is sequentially performed, a predetermined period of time is displayed. It is evolved notice pattern to perform stepwise presentation by image display Franken when.

  The advance notice pattern number 8 imitated the image of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man after a predetermined period of time, and imitating Dracula after displaying a balloon from the monster when starting the variable display of decorative symbols. It is an advanced notice pattern that provides an effect of displaying Franken images without executing the image display of the character image 72. The advance notice pattern number 9 is the same as the evolved notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 4 and is a monster. After sequentially executing the image display of the balloon from the image, the image display of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man, and the image display of the character image 72 imitating a dracula, the stepping motor 150h is driven and controlled when a predetermined period has elapsed. By making the imitated character body 150 appear in front of the display area 42, a staged effect is produced. Cormorant is a development-type notice patterns.

  The advance notice pattern number 10 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 5, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character body 152 imitating the dracula. The stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f that can operate the stepping motor are sequentially executed, and then the stepping motor 150h is driven and controlled so that the character body imitating the flanken appears in the front of the display area 42 after a predetermined period. The advanced notice pattern No. 11 is a step-by-step presentation pattern, and the advance notice pattern number 11 is similar to the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 6 and imitates the wolf man with the image display of the balloon from the monster. Stepping motor capable of operating the character body 154 55, control of stepping motor 152h capable of operating character body 152 imitating Dracula and drive control of stepping motor 153f are sequentially executed, and then the stepping motor 150h is driven and controlled for a predetermined period, thereby imitating a flanken character. This is an advanced notice pattern in which a stage 150 is produced by causing the body 150 to appear in front of the display area 42.

  The advance notice pattern number 12 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 7, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula. Is an advanced notice pattern in which a step-by-step effect is produced by displaying a picture of a monster after a predetermined period of time, after sequentially executing the image display of the image and the character image 73 imitating Franken. Pattern No. 13 is an image display of a balloon from a monster, an image display of a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, and a character image 72 imitating a dracula, like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 8. After executing the image display of the character image 73 imitating Franken without executing the image display, It is evolved notice pattern to perform stepwise presentation by image display monsters kun when constant period.

  The advance notice pattern number 14 is a predetermined period after the image display of the balloon from the monster and the character image 71 imitating the wolf man are executed in the same manner as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 2. The advance notice pattern No. 15 is a developed notice pattern that performs stepwise effects by displaying the image of the monster sometimes. The evolve notice pattern number 15 is a balloon from the monster like the evolve notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 9. Image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, image display of the character image 72 imitating the dracula, and drive control of the stepping motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating the flanken Developed type that provides step-by-step effects by displaying monster-kun images after a certain period of time It is a tell pattern.

  The advance notice pattern number 16 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 10, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character body 152 imitating the dracula. The stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f capable of operating the character and the driving control of the stepping motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating the flanken are sequentially executed, and then a monster is displayed as an image after a predetermined period. The advanced notice pattern No. 17 is a step-by-step advance notice pattern, and the advance notice pattern number 17 is similar to the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 11 and the image display of the balloon from the monster is imitated as a wolf man. Which can move the character body 154 The drive control of the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f capable of operating the character body 152 imitating the Dracula, and the drive control of the stepping motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating the Franken were sequentially executed. After that, it is an advanced notice pattern in which a monster-like image is displayed step by step when a predetermined period is reached.

  The advanced advance notice pattern number 18 is an advanced advance notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image of a balloon from the monster like the advanced advance notice pattern of the advanced advance notice pattern number 1. Unlike the comment contents based on the comment notice pattern displayed in the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 17 in the balloon from the monster, the player requests the player to operate the operation button 38 "Press the button! After the comment content is displayed, the comment content based on the button notice pattern is updated and displayed when the first operation signal is input from the operation button 38. After the comment content “Press the button!” Is displayed, if no operation signal is input from the operation button 38, the comment content is continuously displayed.

  The advance notice pattern number 19 is used for displaying the character images 70 to 73, and the background image without performing the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 capable of operating the character bodies 150, 152, 154. This is an advanced notice pattern that produces an effect that changes to

  The advanced advance notice pattern number 20 is an advanced advance notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image of a balloon from the monster like the advanced advance notice pattern of the advanced advance notice pattern number 1. In the balloon from the monster, the comment content “Press the button!” Requesting the player to operate the operation button 38 is displayed, and then the first operation signal is input from the operation button 38. Sometimes, the comment content of “Let's hit again!” That requires further operation of the operation button 38 is updated, and when the third operation signal is input from the operation button 38, the comment content based on the button notice pattern is updated and displayed. The Note that after the comment content “Press the button!” Or “Let's hit repeatedly!” Is displayed, when the third operation signal is not input from the operation button 38, the comment content is continuously displayed. .

  The advanced advance notice pattern number 21 is an advanced advance notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a balloon from a monster like the advanced advance notice pattern of the advanced advance notice pattern number 1. In the balloon from the monster, the comment content “Press the button!” Requesting the player to operate the operation button 38 is displayed, and then the first operation signal is input from the operation button 38. Sometimes, the comment content of “Let's hit again!” That requires further operation of the operation button 38 is updated, and when the seventh operation signal is input from the operation button 38, the comment content based on the button notice pattern is updated and displayed. The In addition, after the comment contents “Please press the button!” And “Please hit repeatedly!” Are displayed, when the seventh operation signal is not input from the operation button 38, the comment contents are continuously displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, the daytime background advance notice table is acquired in step S134 described above when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image indicating the daytime state (daytime background image 81). It is a table for determining an advanced notice pattern based on an advanced notice pattern random number. In the daytime background advanced notice table, the values of the developed notice pattern random numbers are assigned to 22 kinds of developed notice patterns of the developed notice pattern numbers 0 to 21 corresponding to the variable display patterns.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the night background development type advance notice table is displayed at the above-described step S134 when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image (night background image 82) indicating the night state. It is a table for determining an advanced notice pattern based on the acquired advanced notice pattern random number. In the night background development type advance notice table, similarly to the day background background advance notice table, the developed type advance notice patterns are divided into 22 types of developed type advance notice patterns corresponding to each of the variable display patterns. Random values are distributed.

  In the daytime background development notice table, the above-mentioned development notice pattern numbers 3 to 21 are developed for the night background only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decoration display fluctuation display pattern. In the type advance notice table, the determination value is distributed so that the above-described advanced notice pattern numbers 4 to 21 can be selected only when the reach display form is designated as the change display pattern of the decorative design. It has been. In other words, when the normal variation of the variation display pattern number 1 is designated as the variation display pattern of the decorative design, only the development type advance notification pattern numbers 1 and 2 from the day background development type advance notice table are displayed. The determination values are assigned so that only the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 3 can be selected. When the development type advance notice pattern Nos. 1 to 21 is executed when the reach display form is specified as the change display pattern of the decoration design, the decoration design pattern is displayed after the effect is executed. The reach mode is displayed.

  Further, the above-described advanced notice pattern is only provided when a variation display pattern (variation display patterns of variation numbers 4, 6, 8,. A judgment value is assigned so that number 19 can be selected. When the development type advance notice pattern No. 19 is performed when the variable display pattern that is a big hit is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the reach form of the decorative design is changed after the effect is executed. After the reach effect based on the variable display pattern is displayed, the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 23 to 31) instructing execution of the “spotlight notification”, only the advanced notification pattern of the above-described advanced notification pattern number 0 can be selected. That is, the determination values are distributed so as not to execute the advanced notice. Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 32 and 33) for instructing the execution of “actual reach”, any one of the above-described advanced notice patterns of the advanced notice pattern numbers 0, 7, and 8 is used. The determination values are distributed so that is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the character body 154 imitating a wolf man by the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 and the Dracula in the night background development type advance notice table than in the day background advance type notice table. Developed advance notice pattern (Development advance notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 15, 16, 17) including the effect of appearing character body 152 imitating character body and character body 150 imitating Franken The mold notice pattern) is set to be high.

  In addition, since the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is changed by the change of the background image, it is easy for the player to recognize that the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 changes. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated monsters such as a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken, and the background image is displayed as the night background image 82, they are generally recognized to act at night. Improving the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the monster (nocturnal creature) that has been made can give the impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  In this embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitate the same character, but the character image 71 is changed when the background image is changed to the night background image 82. It is possible to more realistically express the state that the character body 150, 152, 154 that actually moves rather than the appearance rate of ~ 73 starts to move, so that the monsters start moving at night. Can be recognized. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, since a character that is generally recognized to act at night is used, the background display is changed to the night background image 82 without explaining the game of the gaming machine in the present invention. The player can easily recognize that the action rate of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is improved.

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are executed in the display area 42 in order to appear in front of the display area 42 (player side) so that a part of the display area 42 is covered. It is possible to grasp the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 even when paying attention to the effect. Further, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear in front of the display area 42, a sense of depth can be given, a three-dimensional effect (three-dimensional) can be performed, and the character body suddenly appears in front of you. Can give the impression of appearing. In addition, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated with dimensions larger than the dimensions of the character images 71 to 73 that are display-controlled in the display area 42, the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be further focused. .

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are normally built in the rear unit 142 and are invisible to the player, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear. Since it moves to the outside of the rear unit 142 and changes to a state that can be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to give an impression that the character body suddenly appeared, and pay attention to the effect executed in the display area 42. A strong impression can be given to the players.

  Specifically, 2907 judgment values are set in the development type advance notice pattern numbers 2 to 17 of the daytime background use type advance notice table, and 1094 of these judgment values are developed type advance notice pattern numbers 3 and 5. , 6, 9-11, 15-17. That is, about 38% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the daytime background advance notice table controls driving of any of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. Is assigned to the advanced notice pattern that causes the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear.

  On the other hand, 3164 judgment values are set in the development type notice pattern numbers 2 to 17 in the night background development type notice table, and 2387 of these judgment values are developed type notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, and so on. 9 to 11 and 15 to 17 are allocated. In other words, about 75% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the night background advanced notice table controls driving of any of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. Is assigned to the advanced notice pattern that causes the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear.

  Further, in the advanced notice effect executed in this embodiment, an effect of causing characters set in a plurality of stages to appear in sequence from a character set in a lower stage toward a character set in a higher stage is executed. . In this embodiment, the balloon from the monster is set at the lowest level (Step 1), and the wolf man is set at Level 3 (Step 3, Step 3 '). Dracula is set to Franken in 4 stages (Step 4, Step 4 '), and Monster is set to 5 stages (Step 5), the highest. In the mysterious novels in which these characters appear, the top-to-bottom relationship (dominance rank) is set in the order of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man, The character is set.

  Further, each of the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 corresponding to each character is set with a big hit expectation degree corresponding to the vertical relationship of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. In other words, the big hit expectation is set to be higher as the vertical relationship of the character that is finally displayed or appears in the advanced notice effect is increased.

  Specifically, in the above-described daytime background development notice table and night background development notice table, the higher the vertical relationship of the characters that are finally displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation level. Judgment value is assigned to. For example, when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern No. 4 described above is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, the big hit expectation is about 42% (196 (assigned to the variable display pattern when the big hit is reached). Total number of determination values) / 471 (total number of determination values assigned to all variation display patterns) × 100), whereas the advanced type of the advanced type notice pattern number 7 described above in the daytime background type advanced notice table The big hit expectation degree when the notice pattern is executed is about 50% (280/556 × 100). Therefore, if it is a player who has the knowledge about the strange novel in which these characters appear, while being able to specify a stage with a character, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In this embodiment, a player who does not have knowledge of the strange novel in which the above-mentioned character appears cannot recognize the hierarchical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man, but is a player who does not have knowledge of these. Even if it exists, you may use the character which can recognize predetermined order | rank. For example, when performing an effect to compete for weightlifting, the player uses a muscular character, a medium character, and a slim character to give the player a predetermined rank (in this case, a muscular character> It may be configured to be able to recognize (in order of meat character> slim character).

  Further, in this embodiment, as an advance notice effect, an advance notice that the player is visible to the player in order from the wolf man with the lowest vertical relationship among the monster man> Franken> Dracula> wolf man's vertical relationship. There is a pattern and an advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from any character in the vertical relationship of Monster-> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man Although it is provided, in the advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from the wolf man with the lowest vertical relationship, the player who has more characters visible to the player But the big hit expectation is high.

  Further, in each of the 2nd to 5th stages, the character is caused to appear by any one of the image display of the character in the display area 42 and the drive control of the stepping motor capable of operating the character. In this embodiment, when the advance notice pattern numbers 2 to 17 are determined among the advance notice patterns, the advance stage of the advance notice effect (that is, up to the character of any stage) based on the developed notice pattern random number. At each stage, it is determined whether to display the character in the display area 42 or to control the driving of the stepping motor that can move the character. In addition, the development stage determination random number that determines the development stage of the development type notice effect and the character mode determination random number that determines the appearance mode of the character in each stage are provided, and the development stage is determined based on the development stage determination random number. In each of the determined stages, either one of character image display in the display area 42 and drive control of a stepping motor capable of operating the character may be determined based on the character mode determination random number. .

  Further, in the above-described daytime background advance notice table and night background advance notice table, than the big hit expectation when the character appearing at each stage is displayed by displaying it in the display area 42, The determination value is assigned so that the big hit expectation is higher when the stepping motor appears by controlling the driving of the stepping motor. For example, when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 7 described above (executed step 2, step 3, and step 4 are sequentially executed) in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, the big hit expectation is about 50%. In contrast to (280/556 × 100), the advanced notice pattern of the evolved notice pattern number 9 described above in the developed background notice table for daytime background (step 2, step 3, and step 4 ′ are sequentially executed). The expectation of jackpot when it is executed is about 66% (94/143 × 100).

  Further, in the character images 71 to 73 corresponding to each character and the character images and character bodies corresponding to the same characters of the character bodies 150, 152 and 154, the jackpot expectation set for the character body is higher. The character body corresponding to each character in the vertical relationship of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man is set to the jackpot expectation set in the character image corresponding to the character one level above. It is set to be substantially the same.

  That is, in the above-mentioned daytime background advance notice table and night background advance notice table, the character is controlled by the drive control of the stepping motor at one stage lower than the predetermined stage (n stage) ((n-1) stage). The determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation when the body appears and the degree of expectation when the character body is image-displayed in the display area in a predetermined stage (n stages) are substantially equal. For example, the development type advance notice pattern of the advance type advance notice pattern number 9 described above (step 2, step 3, and step 4 ′ are sequentially executed) in the day type background advance notice table is executed, and the character body 150 imitating Franken is displayed. The expected degree of jackpot when it appears is approximately 66% (94/143 × 100), and the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 12 described above in the developed notice table for daytime background (step 2, step 3, step) 4 and step 5 are sequentially executed), and after controlling the display of the character image simulating Franken, the expectation of jackpot when the display of the character image simulating a human boy (monster) is about 68% ( 170/251 × 100). Thereby, when the character body 150, 152, 154 appears when the advanced notice effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the expectation level when the character body is caused to appear by the drive control of the stepping motor at the stage ((n−1) stage) lower by one stage than the predetermined stage (n stage), and the predetermined stage (n The determination value is assigned so that the expectation when the character body is displayed on the display area in the display step is substantially equal, but one step lower than the predetermined step (n step) ((n-1) ) Stage), the degree of expectation when the character image display control is performed at a predetermined stage (n stages) is one stage lower than the predetermined stage (n stages) (( In the (n-1) stage), a determination value may be assigned so as to be close to the expected level when the character body appears by the drive control of the stepping motor. When the character image is displayed and controlled in the predetermined stage (n stage) Expectation of , Predetermined steps (n steps) one step than a lower stage ((n-1) step) regardless the expected degree when allowed to appear character body by the drive control of the stepping motor, the hierarchical relationship with.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 is the advanced notice pattern number 1 to 17 (step S135). If the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 17 are selected, the comment notice table (FIG. 47) is selected (step S136). Then, a comment notice pattern random number is obtained, and one comment notice pattern is determined from the comment notice pattern set in the comment notice table based on the value of the obtained comment notice pattern random number (step S137).

  In step S135, if it is not the advanced notice pattern number 1 to 17, it is determined whether or not it is the advanced notice pattern number 18, 20, 21 (step S138). In the case of the advanced notice pattern numbers 18, 20, and 21, a button notice pattern for displaying the comment “Please press the button!” Is set in the balloon from the monster (step S139), and this corresponds to the evolved notice pattern. The button input waiting time is set in the button input waiting timer, and the button input waiting timer is started (step S140).

  The comment notice table is shown in FIG. Fifteen types of comment notice pattern numbers 1 to 15 are prepared in the comment notice table as comment notice patterns for comment notice effects. Here, it has already been determined to execute the comment notice effect on the balloon from the monster based on the developed notice patterns of the developed notice pattern numbers 1 to 17. That is, in the comment notice table, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the comment notice effect is executed, and only the comment notice pattern of the comment notice effect is determined. In addition, when the variable display pattern including the advanced notice pattern and the comment notice pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern including the advanced notice pattern and the comment notice pattern is determined, the comment notice pattern is executed together with the advanced notice pattern. You may make it do.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 48, comment notice pattern numbers 1 to 15 are “N ??”, “Ehehehe”, “Oh!”, “What? ”,“ Wow ~~~. ”,“ Maybe ...!? ”,“ Oh, it smells ugly ~ ”,“ I'm suspicious about going to the clouds ~ ”,“ I wonder if someone will come ~ ” , "Wolf man ~. Did you cook ??", "Dracula! Get up!", "Franken! Come out!", "Reach!", "It's a big hit!" This is a comment notice pattern that provides an effect to display the content of each comment.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the comment notice table is a table for determining a comment notice pattern based on the comment notice pattern random number acquired in step S137 described above. In the comment notice table, there are 15 types of comment notice patterns Nos. 1 to 15 corresponding to each of the advanced notice patterns. The comment notice pattern random numbers are assigned to the comment notice pattern. In other words, “in normal fluctuation” is when a variation display pattern with a variation number 1 that is out of reach without performing a reach effect is specified, and “in normal reach is out” means that a normal reach effect is not performed. When the variation display pattern of variation number 3 is designated, “when super-reach is off” means that variation numbers 5, 7, 9,... , 21 when the variable display pattern is designated, and “when the uncertain change big hit” is one of the fluctuation numbers 4, 6, 8,... When the fluctuation display pattern is designated and the big hit is a probable big hit, the “probable big hit” is a change number 4, 6, 8, ..., is specified variable display patterns 22 and 35, and is when the big hit with probability variation big hit.

  In the comment notice table, at least when “normal reach breaks”, “super reach breaks”, “non-probable big hit”, or “probable big hit” is specified, which will be reached after execution of the advanced notice effect. Only, the determination value is distributed so that the comment notice pattern of the comment notice pattern number 13 can be selected. When the comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern number 13 is executed, a comment “Leach is!” Is displayed in a balloon (step 1) from the monster displayed in the advanced notice effect, and the relevant advance notice is displayed. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a reach manner after the performance is executed.

  Here, when “non-probable big hit” and “probable big hit” are specified, comments with the comment notice pattern number 13 are at a higher rate than when “normal reach break” and “super reach break” are specified. The judgment value is distributed so that the notice pattern is selected. The rate at which the comment notice pattern of the comment notice pattern number 13 is selected is, for example, {10 (comment notice pattern when the super-reach breaks) and the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 1 are designated. No. 13 judgment value assigned to the comment notice pattern) / 198 (total number of judgment values assigned to all comment notice patterns)} × 100 = about 5%, whereas “non-probable big hit” And the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 1 is designated, (20/198) × 100 = about 10%. Thus, when the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 13 is executed, the comment “Leach is!” Is displayed in the balloon from the monster (step 1), and the player can decorate the left and right decorations. It can be recognized that the reach state is reached before the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  Also, the comment notice pattern of the comment notice pattern number 14 can be selected only when “non-probable big hit” and “probable big hit”, which are big hits after the execution of the advanced notice effect, are designated. Judgment values are distributed. When the comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern number 14 is executed, the comment “Big hit!” Is displayed in the balloon (step 1) from the monster displayed in the advanced notice effect. After execution, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a non-probable big hit symbol or a big hit symbol.

  In addition, the judgment value is distributed so that the comment notice pattern of the comment notice pattern number 15 described above can be selected only when “probable big success” is designated after execution of the advanced notice effect. Yes. When the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 15 is executed, a comment “Probably!” Is displayed in a balloon (step 1) from the monster displayed in the advanced notice effect, and the developed notice effect is displayed. After execution, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a probable big hit symbol.

  In addition, the comment notice patterns of comment notice patterns Nos. 4 and 6 in which the comment contents of “That !? What ??” and “Maybe ...!?” Are displayed after execution of the advanced notice effect. Higher percentages when “non-probable big hit” and “probable big hit” are specified, which are big hits than when “normal fluctuation”, “out of normal reach”, and “out of super reach” are specified. The judgment values are distributed so that they can be selected with. When the comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 is executed, a balloon from the monster (step 1) displayed in the advanced notice effect will be displayed as "That !? What?" The comment “!?” Is displayed, and after executing the advanced notice effect, the player can be associated with “Maybe it will be a big hit !?” to increase the expectation of the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, comment notice notices for comment pattern numbers 10, 11, and 12 are displayed with the comment contents "Wolf man ~. Did you cook ??", "Dracula! Get up!" And "Franken! Come out!" When “normal fluctuation”, “normal reach off”, or “super reach off” is designated, the comment content based on the comment notice pattern is displayed in a balloon from the monster (step 1). In the effects after step 2 of the developed advance notice pattern to be executed, the determination value is distributed so as to be selected only for the advance notice pattern in which the character corresponding to the comment content appears. That is, for the advanced notice pattern that does not cause the character corresponding to the comment content based on the comment notice pattern to appear, the determination value is assigned so that the comment notice pattern is not selected. For example, when “Don't super-reach” is specified, “Dracula! Wake up !!”, “Franken! The comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern numbers 11 and 12 in which the comment content of “Come!” Is displayed is not selected, and similarly, the comment notice pattern for the evolved notice pattern of the evolved notice pattern number 3 is selected. The comment notice pattern number 12 or the like is not selected for the numbers 11 and 12 and the advanced notice pattern number 4.

  On the other hand, when “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit” is designated, even for an advanced notice pattern that does not cause a character corresponding to the comment content based on the comment notice patterns of comment notice pattern numbers 10, 11, and 12 to appear. The determination values are distributed so that the comment notice pattern is selected. For example, when “non-probable big hit” is specified, “Dracula! Wake up !!”, “Franken! The comment notice pattern with comment notice pattern numbers 11 and 12 in which the content of the comment “Come!” Is displayed may be selected. In this case, after the comment contents based on the comment notice pattern are displayed in the advanced notice effect, the character corresponding to the comment contents does not appear, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the character mismatch. By making a big hit after execution of the advanced notice effect, the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  The intense heat notice selection process (step S213) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing intense heat notice selection processing which is a subroutine of notice selection processing. FIG. 50 is a table showing the intense heat notice pattern selected by the sub-integrated board. FIG. 51 is a list display diagram showing the intense heat notice pattern.

  In the intense heat notice selection process (step S213) shown in FIG. 49, the intense heat notice table (FIG. 50) is selected (step S141). Then, an intense heat warning pattern random number is acquired, and one intense heat warning pattern is determined from the intense heat warning pattern set in the intense heat warning table based on the acquired value of the intense heat warning pattern random number (step S142). ). Built-in effect execution that is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 and that determines whether or not the intense heat notice pattern other than the intense heat notice pattern number 0 is determined in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process Judgment means is provided. In addition, a built-in effect determining means for determining any one of the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 1 to 6 in step S142 of the intense heat announcement selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111. I have.

  Note that the intense heat notice table is shown in FIG. In this intense heat notice table, seven types of intense heat notice pattern numbers 0 to 6 are prepared as the intense heat notice patterns of the intense heat notice effect. In addition, when the intense heat notification pattern number 0 is determined among the intense heat notification patterns, the intense heat notification effect is not performed. That is, in the intense heat notice table, whether or not to execute the intense heat notice effect is determined based on the intense heat notice pattern random number, and the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice effect is determined. For example, when it is determined that the intense heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 6 are used, it is determined that the intense heat notification effect is executed, and the determined intense heat notification pattern is used as the intense heat notification pattern of the intense heat notification effect. The number is determined to be a hot fever notice pattern. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect is separately provided, and when it is determined to execute the intense heat notification effect based on this random number, the intense heat notification pattern number based on the intense heat notification pattern random number You may make it determine in any one of 1-6. When the above-described advanced notice is not executed (when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 0 is determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process), the intense heat notice effect is executed. Therefore, the process for determining the intense heat warning pattern based on the intense heat warning pattern random number may not be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 51, the intense heat warning pattern number 1 is an advanced warning pattern (an advanced warning pattern number 1 to 18, 20, When executing 21), the color of the balloon from the monster is changed to the rainbow color, unlike the white balloon from the monster who is displayed as an image with the normal advanced notice pattern (step 1 of the advance notice pattern). The intense heat warning pattern No. 2 is an advanced heat warning pattern in which an image of a wolf man is displayed in the display area 42 (an advanced warning pattern number 2, 4, 5). , 7,9,10,12,14,15,16), a wolf man in the form of a human being displayed as an image with a normal advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern) And step 2) of different, and is a super heat prior notice patterns that the wolf man after transformed into a figure of the wolf from the human form to display image.

  The intense heat notice pattern number 3 is an advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern numbers 1 to 18 including an effect of displaying a balloon from a monster in the display area 42 and / or an effect of displaying a wolf man as an image. , 20, 21), a rainbow-colored balloon from the monster is displayed in the same manner as the intense heat warning pattern No. 1 and / or the intense heat warning pattern No. 2 It is an intense heat advance notice table that displays an image of a transformed wolf man in the same manner as the heat advance notice pattern. When executing the notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10, 12, 15), the Dracula (development-type Unlike Step 3) of the pattern is white was changed to clothing color scheme, which is based Dracula a super heat notice patterns to display images.

  The intense heat advance notice pattern number 5 is a normal advance notice when the advanced notice pattern (development notice pattern numbers 7, 8, 12 and 13) including an effect of displaying Franken in the display area 42 is executed. Unlike Franken, which displays images as patterns (Step 4 of the advanced notice pattern), it is a fiery heat notice pattern that displays images of Franken that has been changed to the color scheme of clothing based on white. When executing an advanced notice pattern (development notice pattern numbers 12 to 17) including an effect of displaying a monster in the display area 42, an image of the monster displayed in the normal advance notice pattern (development) Unlike the step 5) of the mold notice pattern, this is an intense heat notice pattern that displays an image of a monster who has been changed to a white-based clothing color scheme.

  In addition, in the intense heat warning pattern of the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1, 2, 4 to 5, the intense heat warning pattern for displaying any one of steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat warning pattern is set. In the intense heat notice pattern of the notice pattern number 3, an intense heat notice pattern for displaying a plurality of steps (steps 1 and 2) of the intense heat notice pattern is set. In the case of the intense heat advance notice pattern of the intense heat advance notice pattern No. 3, when determining whether or not to execute the intense heat advance notice effect to be described later, the ratio that matches the step executed in the advanced notice pattern increases. It is possible to execute the intense heat notification effect over a plurality of stages in the advanced notification effect, and it is possible to execute a plurality of image displays based on the intense heat notification pattern.

  Further, as the intense heat announcement pattern, an intense heat announcement pattern for displaying an image of any one of steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat announcement pattern corresponding to steps 1 to 5 of the evolution type announcement pattern is set. An intense heat warning pattern corresponding to pattern steps 2 ′, 3 ′, and 4 ′, which is different from the action of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 driven by the normal development type warning pattern (character body 150, The intense heat warning pattern that drives any one of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 may be set by increasing the number of movements of 152 and 154 or vibrating in small increments. Also in this case, the character bodies 150, 152, 154 (steps 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ of the advanced notice pattern) driven by the advanced notice pattern and the character bodies 150, 152 determined from the intense heat notice pattern are used. , 154, whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect is determined, and is similar to the intense heat announcement effect that displays any one of steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat announcement pattern. In addition to obtaining the effect, it is possible to diversify and diversify the intense heat announcement effect.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the intense heat notice table is a table for determining the intense heat notice pattern based on the intense heat notice pattern random number acquired in step S142 described above. In the intense heat announcement table, the values of the intense heat announcement pattern random numbers are assigned to seven types of intense heat announcement patterns 0 to 6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  In the intense heat notice table, the determination value is set so that the above-mentioned intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 can be selected only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern. Is distributed. When the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the variable display pattern of the decorative design, the development of the advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20, and 21 is executed as the advance notice pattern. Balloons and characters (images of advanced notice patterns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) displayed in the notice pattern and balloons and characters determined from the intense notice patterns 1 to 6 When the steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5) of the heat announcement pattern are matched, the presentation of the intense heat announcement pattern is executed, and a balloon or character that is different from the color scheme displayed in the image in the normal development type announcement pattern (However, in step 2 of the intense heat notice pattern, a character having a different form rather than a color scheme) is displayed.

  In addition, among the variation display patterns that reach as the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol, the variation that can be executed only when the reach determination random number becomes the winning value without the big hit determination random number being the winning value in the big hit determining process When a display pattern (variable display patterns of variation numbers 3, 5, 7,..., 21, 32) is designated, only the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 0 to 2 described above can be selected. However, a variation display pattern (variation display patterns of variation numbers 4, 6, 8,..., 22, 33) that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a winning value in the big hit determination processing is designated. Sometimes, the above-described intense heat notice pattern numbers 3 to 6 can be selected. In other words, when a character (Dracula, Franken, Monster) that is different from the color of the clothing displayed as an image in the normal advance notice pattern is displayed, it is understood that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a jackpot symbol. can do.

  Also, in the fluctuation display pattern (variation display patterns of fluctuation numbers 23 to 31) instructing execution of “spotlight notice” and “full rotation reach”, only the intense heat notice pattern No. 0 described above is included. The determination values are assigned so that selection is possible, that is, the intense heat notice is not executed. Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of the variable number 33) instructing the execution of “actual reach, hit”, only the advanced type advance pattern numbers 0, 7, and 8 are determined as the above-described advanced type advance notice pattern. Since the monster character (step 5 of the advanced notice pattern) is not displayed, the variable display that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes the win value in the big hit determination processing Although it is a pattern, the determination value is not distributed so that the intense heat notification pattern of the above described intense heat notification pattern number 6 is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the ratio of the development type advance notice patterns of the advanced type notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20, and 21 (the developed type notice pattern for executing the developed type notice effect) selected from the developed type notice pattern. Are set so that the ratio of the intense heat announcement pattern Nos. 1 to 6 (the intense heat announcement pattern for executing the intense heat announcement effect) selected in the intense heat announcement table is low.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed, the advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20,. The ratio of the 21 advanced notice patterns to be selected is {167 (total number of judgment values assigned to the advanced notice patterns Nos. 1 to 18, 20, and 21) / 233 (all advanced notice patterns). The total number of judgment values assigned to the pattern)} × 100 = about 72%, whereas the ratio of the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 selected is {54 (hot heat warning) The total number of judgment values assigned to the intense heat notice patterns of pattern numbers 1 to 6) / 202 (the total number of judgment values assigned to all the intense heat notice patterns)} × 100 = about 27%. In this way, in order to determine whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect, a balloon or a character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the advance notice pattern) displayed as an image in the advance notice pattern is used. As a step before determining whether or not the balloon or character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the intense heat warning patterns Nos. 1 to 6 matches. The probability that the intense heat notification effect is executed is lowered by reducing the ratio of selecting the intense heat notification patterns of the intense heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 6 in the intense heat notification table.

  The lightning bolt notice selection process (step S214) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing lightning bolt notice selection processing which is a subroutine of notice selection processing. FIG. 53 is a list showing the daylight background lightning notice pattern selected by the sub-integrated board. FIG. 54 is a table showing the night background lightning warning pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 55 is a list display diagram showing a lightning bolt notice pattern.

  In the lightning bolt notice selection process (step S114) shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the daytime background flag is in the ON state (step S151). If the daytime background flag is on, the daylight background lightning notice table (FIG. 53) is selected (step S152). If the daytime background flag is not on (if it is off), the night background lightning notice is displayed. A table (FIG. 54) is selected (step S153). Then, a lightning warning pattern random number is acquired, and one lightning warning pattern is determined from the lightning warning pattern set in each lightning warning pattern based on the value of the acquired lightning warning pattern random number (step S154). In this embodiment, it is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and it is determined whether or not a lightning warning pattern other than the lightning warning pattern number 0 is determined in step S154 of the lightning warning selection process. Production execution determination means is provided. This is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and includes a destruction effect determining means for determining any one of the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 in step S154 of the lightning warning notice selection process. When the development type advance notice pattern number 0 is determined as the advanced type advance notice pattern and when the lightning bolt notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 are selected, the lightning bolt determined in step S225 of the notice selection process. A notice pattern is set, transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S110), and lightning bolts are displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical control board 113. Display control of the notice effect.

  Incidentally, FIG. 53 shows the lightning warning table for the daytime background, and FIG. 54 shows the lightning warning table for the night background. In these lightning bolt notice tables, seven types of lightning bolt notice pattern numbers 0 to 6 are prepared as lightning bolt notice patterns for lightning notice. In addition, when the lightning warning pattern number 0 is determined in the lightning warning pattern, the lightning warning effect is not performed. That is, in the lightning bolt notice table, it is determined whether or not to execute the lightning bolt warning effect based on the lightning bolt warning pattern random number, and the lightning bolt warning pattern of the lightning bolt warning effect is determined. For example, when the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 are determined, it is determined to execute the lightning warning effect, and the lightning warning pattern of the determined lightning warning pattern number is used as the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning effect. To decide.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the lightning warning pattern number 1 is a darkened image (for example, a decorative design, a background image, a character, etc.) that darkens the display content (for example, a decorative design, a background image, a character, etc.) when the decorative design variation display is started. This is a lightning warning notice pattern that performs an effect (blackout gast effect) that continuously executes the display contents before the blackout effect is performed after performing a blackout effect that controls the display of the dark image 83) for a predetermined time. .

  Lightning bolt notice pattern No. 2 performs the blackout effect once when starting the decorative display of the decorative pattern, and then continuously executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed. It is a lightning notice pattern that performs an effect (blackout gast effect) that performs an out effect and continuously executes the display content before the second blackout effect is performed again.

  The lightning warning pattern number 3 is an effect that changes the background image after the blackout effect is performed twice and the second blackout effect is performed in the same way as the lightning warning pattern number 2 (for example, the daytime when the background image is described later in the daytime). If it is the background image 81, it is a lightning notice pattern for changing to the night background image 82).

  Lightning notice pattern No. 4 performs a blackout effect once at the start of the decorative display of decorative symbols, and then continuously executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed. During the second blackout production, the lightning flash for running lightning (lightning) on the dark image is controlled in the display area 42, and the left decorative pattern 80a is displayed on the dark image by being illuminated by the lightning. This is a lightning warning pattern that produces an effect of stopping and displaying while floating.

  The lightning warning pattern number 5 performs the lightning warning pattern number 4 and then executes the blackout effect again. During the execution of the blackout effect, the second lightning flash is displayed and controlled. This is a lightning notice pattern that produces an effect of forming a reach form by displaying the right decorative design 80c in a dark image while stopping and displaying it.

  The lightning warning pattern number 6 is a lightning warning pattern that performs a blackout gaze effect (full rotation gaze) as if the full rotation reach effect described above is performed. In this embodiment, when the full rotation reach effect is executed, a special image that can recognize that the full rotation reach effect may be executed is displayed and controlled. In the lightning warning pattern No. 6, after the display control of this special image, the blackout gasse effect which does not execute the full rotation reach effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the daylight background lightning notice table displays the lightning acquired in step S154 described above when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image indicating the state of the daytime (daytime background image 81). It is a table for determining a lightning bolt notice pattern based on a notice pattern random number. In the lightning bolt notice table for the daytime background, the lightning warning pattern random number values are distributed to seven types of lightning warning patterns 0 to 6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the night background lightning notice table is acquired in the above-described step S154 when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image at night (night background image 82). Lightning bolt notice pattern This is a table for determining a lightning bolt notice pattern based on random numbers. In the lightning bolt warning table for night background, the lightning bolt warning pattern random number value is assigned to seven types of lightning warning pattern Nos. 0-6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns in the same manner as the lightning bolt warning table for daytime background. It has been.

  In the lightning bolt warning table for the day background and the lightning bolt warning table for the night background, the lightning warning pattern number 4 described above, or only when the variable display pattern that becomes the reach mode is designated as the decorative pattern variable display pattern, or The judgment values are assigned so that the lightning warning pattern No. 5 can be selected. In other words, when the normal variation of the variation display pattern number 1 is designated as the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol, the determination value is distributed so that only the lightning notice pattern numbers 1 to 3 can be selected. When the lightning warning pattern Nos. 1 to 6 are performed when the variable display pattern that is the reach mode is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the decorative pattern reach mode is executed after executing the effect. Is displayed. As described above, the light emitting operation means for controlling the lighting lamps 44a and 44b to be turned on and blinking based on the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5 is provided.

  In addition, a fluctuation display pattern (variation display pattern of fluctuation numbers 23 to 31) for instructing execution of “spotlight notice” and a fluctuation display pattern (variation display patterns of fluctuation numbers 32 and 33) for instructing execution of “object reach”. ), The determination values are distributed so that only the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern number 2 described above can be selected. Then, when the lightning warning pattern No. 2 with the lightning warning pattern is performed, the super reach development effect executed by each of the characters described above after the execution of the effect is performed, or the feature-driven feature reach is performed. Production is performed.

  In this embodiment, the sub integrated board 111 determines a lightning warning pattern for executing a lightning warning such as a background change (lightning warning pattern number 3) or a lightning flash (lightning warning pattern number 4, 5). The reach control in which the blackout effect (lightning bolt notice pattern number 2) is incorporated is determined by the main control board 101. These reach effects are a super reach development effect (variable display patterns with variable numbers 23 to 31) and an accessory reach effect (variable display patterns with variable numbers 32 and 33) after execution of the spotlight notice. High reach production. In this way, not all of the notice effects are determined by the sub-integrated board 111, but a part of the notice effect that derives the reach effect having a high expectation degree of big hit is determined by the main control board 101, so that the notice effects are derived. Balanced. For example, an advanced notice effect is easily executed for a variable display pattern that is a big hit, and it is difficult to execute a lightning notice effect (blackout effect) having a lower priority than the advanced notice effect. By determining the reach effect incorporating the out effect on the main control board 101, the bias of the notice effect is suppressed.

  Further, in the variation display pattern (variation display pattern of variation number 34) instructing the execution of “full rotation reach”, only the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern number 0 described above can be selected, that is, lightning. The judgment value is distributed so that the notice effect is not executed. In the variable display pattern instructing the execution of “full rotation reach”, after the display control of the special image described above in the display area 42, an effect similar to the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern number 1, that is, An effect of performing display control of the dark image for a predetermined time is performed.

  In this embodiment, the ratio (selection rate) of selecting the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5 in the lightning warning table for night background is higher than that for the lightning warning table for daytime background. Is set. Specifically, for example, when the variation display pattern of “Wolf man, hit” of the variation number 6 is determined, if it is the lightning warning table for the daytime background, the lightning warning of the lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5 is used. Pattern selection rate is {(numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 4) + (numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 5) / number of counters of lightning warning pattern random number} = 116/200 However, in the case of the lightning warning table for the night background, the selection rate of the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5 is 144/200. This corresponds to the fact that lightning is actually easier to see in the night background than in the daytime background.

  In step S154, it is determined whether to perform the lightning warning effect by determining either the lightning warning table for the daytime background or the lightning warning pattern set in the lightning warning table for the night background. However, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to perform a lightning warning effect may be provided, and after determining to perform a lightning warning effect using this random number, it may be determined as one of the lightning warning patterns for performing a lightning warning effect. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lightning warning pattern determined in step S154 is a background change of lightning warning pattern number 3 (step S155). If the background is changed, the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is switched (step S156). That is, if it is in the ON state, it is in the OFF state, and if it is in the OFF state, it is in the ON state. If the background does not change, the process returns to the main flow as it is. The ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is stored in the RAM 113c. In addition, a value of “0” is set when the daytime background flag is OFF, and a value of “1” is set when the daytime background flag is ON. In this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 switches the day / background flag ON / OFF in step S156 of the lightning notice selection process, and is based on an instruction from the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. Special image display control means for controlling the display of the daytime background image 81 and the nighttime background image 82 in the display area 42 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 is provided. The function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 is to select the lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern number 3 in steps S152 and S153 of the lightning warning selection process, and to set the daytime background flag in step S156 of the lightning warning selection process. Special image switching display control means for switching between ON and OFF is provided.

  The mini character notice selection process (step S215) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a mini character notice selection process which is a subroutine of the notice selection process. 56 and 57 are table diagrams showing the mini character notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 59 is a list showing the mini character notice pattern.

  In the mini character notice selection process (step S215) shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the comment notice pattern number is 9 (step S191). The comment notice pattern is determined as one of comment notice pattern numbers 1 to 15 in step S137 of the advanced notice process. If it is not the comment notice pattern number 9 (if the comment notice pattern number is 1 to 8, 10 to 15), the first mini character notice table (FIG. 57) is selected (step S192). Then, the second mini character notice table (FIG. 58) is selected (step S193). Then, the mini character notice pattern random number is acquired, and one mini character notice pattern is determined from the mini character notice pattern set in each mini character notice table based on the value of the obtained mini character notice pattern random number (step S194).

  The first mini character notice table is shown in FIG. 57, and the second mini character notice table is shown in FIG. In these mini character notice tables, 12 types of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are prepared as mini character notice patterns for mini character notice effect. Further, when the mini character notice pattern No. 0 is determined among the mini character notice patterns, the mini character notice effect is not performed. That is, in the mini character notice table, it is determined whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect based on the mini character notice pattern random number, and the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect is determined. For example, when the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 are determined, it is decided to execute the mini character notice effect, and the mini character notice pattern of the decided mini character notice pattern number as the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect is determined. To decide. A random number for determining whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect is separately provided, and when it is determined that the mini character notice effect is executed based on this random number, the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 based on the mini character notice pattern random number are provided. You may make it decide in any of them. Further, a variable display pattern including a mini character notice pattern may be provided, and when the variable display pattern including these mini character notice patterns is determined, a mini character notice effect may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the mini character notice pattern number 1 is a mini character image representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. 90 is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image of 90. The mini character notice pattern number 2 is a Hiroshi sister on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative symbols when the decorative pattern variable display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing the image.

  The mini character notice pattern number 3 is a mini character imitating a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image 92. Mini character notice pattern number 4 is a human character on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a of the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern variable display is started. It is a mini character notice pattern which produces the effect which displays the mini character image (Kai-chan) 93 imitating the girl.

  The mini character notice pattern number 5 displays a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. Among the decorative symbols, a mini character warning pattern for performing an effect of displaying an image of a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a. When the display is started, a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative design 80c among the decorative designs, and a mini character image 92 imitating a triple is displayed. It is a mini character notice pattern that performs the production.

  The mini character notice pattern number 7 displays a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces a mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 that imitates a human girl on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a of the decorative symbols. Displays a mini-character image 91 representing Hiroshi's sister on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a among the decorative symbols when starting the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the right of the decorative symbols. Miniki for performing an effect of displaying a mini character image 92 imitating a trio on the back of the variable display area of the decorative pattern 80c It is a La notice pattern.

  In addition, the mini character notice pattern number 9 displays a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol variable display is started. , A mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi's sister, and the mini character notice pattern number 10 indicates the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative patterns when the decorative pattern variation display is started. A mini character image 92 simulating a trio is displayed on the back of the variable display area, and a mini character image simulating a human girl is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a of the decorative pattern This is a mini character notice pattern that performs an effect of displaying the image of the child 93).

  Further, the mini character notice pattern number 11 imitates the mini character image 90 and the triplet representing the Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative patterns when the decorative pattern variable display is started. The mini character image 92 is displayed as an image, and the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister and the mini character image imitating a human girl (Kyoko-chan) on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a among the decorative symbols. ) 93 is an image display of the mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying all the mini characters as images.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the first mini-character notice table has a comment of “Someone won't come” (comment notice pattern with comment notice pattern number 9) in a balloon from monster-kun (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern). It is a table for determining a mini character notice pattern based on the mini character notice pattern random number acquired in step S194 described above when the contents are not displayed. In the first mini character notice table, the values of the mini character notice pattern random numbers are assigned to 12 kinds of mini character notice patterns of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the second mini-character notice table has a comment “Someone won't come” (comment notice pattern with comment notice pattern number 9) in the balloon from the monster (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern). It is a table for determining a mini character notice pattern based on the mini character notice pattern random number acquired in step S194 described above when the contents are displayed. In the second mini character notice table, similarly to the first mini character notice table, the values of the mini character notice pattern random numbers are assigned to 12 kinds of mini character notice patterns 0 to 11 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns. Yes.

  In the first mini character notice table and the second mini character notice table, the ratio of the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 is selected when the display result is larger than the case where the display result is out of place (the mini character notice effect is executed). The determination value is distributed so that the ratio is increased. For example, in the first mini character notice table, the probability (appearance rate) that a mini character appears as a mini character notice effect, that is, the probability that the mini character notice patterns No. 1 to 11 are executed is a normal reach effect (fluctuation) When the number 4 variable display pattern) is executed, {95 (total number of judgment values assigned to the mini character notice patterns No. 1 to 11 of the mini character notice pattern) / 151 (assigned to all mini character notice patterns) Total number of judgment values)} × 100 = about 63%, but when a normal reach effect (variation display pattern with variation number 3) is executed, (81/151) × 100 = about 54%. Therefore, when the mini character notice effect is executed and the mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the display result is a big hit.

  In the above-described second mini character notice table, when the display result is out of proportion, the ratio of selecting the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 (the ratio of executing the mini character notice effect) is larger than the first mini character notice table. The judgment values are distributed so as to be lower. For example, when a normal reach effect (variation display pattern with variation number 3) that is out of place is executed, the probability that the mini character announcement patterns with the mini character announcement pattern numbers 1 to 11 are executed in the first mini character announcement table is about 54. On the other hand, in the second mini character notice table, the probability that the mini character notice patterns with the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 are executed is (11/151) × 100 = about 7%. Since the second mini character notice table is a table used when the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 9 is selected, a message from the monster-kun (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern) says "Is there anyone? When the comment content of “(comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 9)” is displayed, the proportion of appearance of the mini characters based on the mini character notice pattern is set to be significantly low. In other words, the comment content of “Someone wo n’t come” is displayed in the balloon from the monster, and when a mini character based on the mini character notice pattern appears, the probability of a big hit (expected expectation of big hit) is set high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display result is a big hit for the player.

  In addition, only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the mini character notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, and 6 including the image display of the mini character image 92 simulating the above-described three-person set are displayed. The determination values are distributed so that 8, 10, and 11 can be selected. When the mini character notice pattern Nos. 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 11 are executed when the variable display pattern that is the reach form is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern, at least a triple set After the mini character image 92 simulating the image is displayed, the reach pattern of the decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, when the mini character image 92 imitating a three-person group is displayed, it can be understood that the decorative symbol variation display becomes a reach mode.

  Also, among the variable display patterns in the reach form as the decorative display variable display pattern, the variable display patterns (variation numbers 4, 6, and 8) that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a winning value in the big hit determination process. ,..., 22, 35) is designated, the above-mentioned mini character notice pattern number 11 can be selected. In other words, when all the mini characters (Hiroshi, Hiroshi sister, trio, and Kai-chan) displayed in the mini character preview are displayed, it is understood that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a big hit symbol. Can do.

  In the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 23 to 34) instructing execution of “spotlight advance notice”, “actual object reach”, and “full rotation reach”, the mini character of the above-mentioned mini character advance notice pattern number 0 is used. The judgment values are assigned so that only the notice pattern can be selected, that is, the mini character notice is not executed.

  Further, each of the mini-character images 90 to 93 corresponding to each character is set with a big hit expectation degree in the order of Kaiko-chan> Three person group> Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister. In other words, the highest jackpot expectation is set when Kaiko-chan is displayed in the mini character notice effect.

  Specifically, in the above-described first mini character notice table, the determination value is assigned so that the expectation level for jackpot is the highest when the mini character of Kyoko is displayed. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern number 4 (image display of mini character image (Kai-chan) 93 imitating a human girl) is executed in the first mini character notice table, the expectation of big hit is 75%. (66 (total number of determination values allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is obtained) / 88 (total number of determination values allocated to all the variable display patterns) × 100) When the mini character notice pattern (mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi or mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister) is executed, the big hit expectation degree is about 33% (165 (variable display when the big hit is reached) Total number of judgment values assigned to the pattern) / 495 (total number of judgment values assigned to the total variation display pattern) × 1 00), and when the above-mentioned mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 3 (image display of a mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 imitating a human girl) is executed, the expectation of jackpot is about 67% ( 165 (total number of determination values allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is obtained) / 245 (total number of determination values allocated to all the variable display patterns) × 100). Therefore, when the Kai-chan mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  Moreover, when the mini character of Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister is displayed, the big hit expectation is set lower than when the mini-character of the triplet and Kai-chan is displayed, but the mini character of Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister When the mini characters are displayed in combination, the big hit expectation is set higher than when the mini characters of Hiroshi and Hiroshi are displayed alone.

  Specifically, in the above-described mini character notice table, when Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister's mini characters are displayed, the determination value is assigned so that the expected degree of jackpot is high. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern number 5 (mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi and image display of mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister) is executed in the mini character notice table, the big hit expectation is 88. % (44 (total number of determination values allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is obtained) / 50 (total number of determination values allocated to all the variable display patterns) × 100). Therefore, the meanings (expected expectations of big hits) suggested by the mini characters differ between when they are displayed individually and when they are displayed in combination. Even if the degree of expectation of jackpot is low, it does not stop paying attention to Hiroshi, Hiroshi sister's mini character.

  In this embodiment, the function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 is to determine a mini-character notice pattern in step S194 of the mini-character notice selection process, and information corresponding to the result of the mini-character notice selection process is sub- In the information output process (step S110), the information is transmitted to the second illumination control board 113, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113 executes the mini character notice as a back effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. Back effect execution means is provided.

  The branch effect notice selection process (step S216) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a branch effect notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. FIG. 61 is a table showing branching effect notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 62 is a list display diagram showing a branch effect notice pattern. FIG. 63 is a list showing branching effect presentation notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 64 is a table showing branching effect presentation notice patterns.

  In the branch effect notice selection processing (step S216) shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the received variation display pattern command is the variation numbers 5 to 22 and 35 (step S201). If the change display pattern command of change numbers 2 to 22 and 35 has not been received, the process returns to the main flow as it is. Then, it is determined whether or not the received variation display pattern command is variation number 5 to 22 among variation numbers 5 to 22 and 35 (step S202).

  In step S202, if the received variation display pattern command is variation number 5-22 of variation numbers 5-22, 35, the branch effect notification table using the first type branch effect notification pattern (FIG. 62A). (FIG. 61) is selected (step S203), and if the received variation display pattern command is not variation number 5 to 22 (if variation number 35), variation number 35 is a variation display pattern that is a big hit. Then, it is determined whether or not a probability variation jackpot command has been received (step S204). If the probability change jackpot command has been received (if the jackpot is a probability change jackpot), the branch effect notice table (FIG. 61) using the second kind branch effect notice pattern (FIG. 62B) is selected (step S205). ), If the probability variation jackpot command has not been received (if the jackpot is a non-probability variation jackpot), the branch effect notice table (FIG. 61) using the third kind branch effect notice pattern (FIG. 62 (C)) is selected. (Step S206). Then, a branch effect notice pattern random number is acquired, and one branch effect notice pattern is determined from the branch effect notice pattern set in the branch effect notice pattern based on the acquired branch effect notice pattern random number (step S207). ).

  A branch effect notice table is shown in FIG. The branch effect notice table includes 24 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 23 as the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the super reach branch effect (branch effect notice) and the branch effect notice pattern number as the second kind branch effect notice pattern. Twelve types of 0 to 11 and 12 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are prepared as third kind branch effect notice patterns. Here, since the super reach production and the super reach development production are executed based on the fluctuation display patterns of the fluctuation numbers 5 to 22 and 35, the branch production notice (super reach) is made in the process of shifting from the normal reach production to the super reach production. It has already been decided to execute the branch effect. That is, in the branch effect notice table, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the branch effect notice is executed, and only the branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice is determined. Note that a variable display pattern including a branch effect notice pattern may be provided, and the branch effect notice may be executed when the variable display pattern including these branch effect notice patterns is determined.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 62A, 62B, and 62C, the branch effect notice pattern includes the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the display area 42 and the first time. A combination of branch effects for three times up to the third time (a character displayed in the portrait 90) is set. In the figure, “O” displays a character image imitating a wolf man in the portrait 90, “Dora” displays a character image imitating Dracula in the portrait 90, and “Hula” displays the character image imitating the portrait 90. A character image imitating Franken is displayed. In “monster”, a character image imitating a human boy (Monster-kun) is displayed in portrait 90, and in “monster”, a character imitating human girl in portrait 90 Display the image (Kyoko-chan).

  Here, blue and red are prepared as background colors of the portrait 90. If the blue background color is a normal color (a background color that does not suggest anything) and a red background color is displayed, the super-reach effect does not lead to the derivation of the design, and the super-reach effect is followed by a super It is determined that the reach development effect is to be executed (however, when the big hit symbol is derived in the super reach effect, the super reach development effect is not executed).

  As shown in FIG. 62 (A), the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0, 10, 20, and 21 are the first kind branch effect notice that displays a character image imitating a wolf man in the third branch effect notice. It is a pattern. Further, branch effect notice pattern numbers 1 to 3, 11 to 13, 22, and 23 are first kind branch effect notice patterns that display a character image imitating Dracula in the third branch effect notice. Further, branch effect notice pattern numbers 4 to 9 and 14 to 19 are first kind branch effect notice patterns for displaying character images simulating Franken in the third branch effect notice. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are the second kind of effect that displays a character image (monster) simulating a human boy in the third branch effect notice. It is a notice pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are the third kind branch that displays a character image (Kyoko-chan) imitating a human girl in the third branch effect notice. This is a production notice pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the branch effect notice table is a table for determining the branch effect notice pattern based on the branch effect notice pattern random number acquired in step S207 described above. In the branch effect notice table, 24 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 23 corresponding to each of the change display patterns of change numbers 5 to 22 for executing the super reach effect, the super reach development effect of the monster-kun reach development effect or Corresponding to the variation display pattern of variation number 35 for executing the full rotation reach effect, the branch effect notice pattern random number values are distributed to 12 types of branch effect notice patterns 0 to 11. On the other hand, in the variation display patterns of variation numbers 1 to 4 and 23 to 34, there is no process of shifting from the normal reach production to the super reach production.

  In the branch effect notice table, at least when the change display patterns of the change numbers 5 to 10 for executing the wolf man reach effect are designated, the first of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0, 10, 20, and 21 described above are specified. The determination values are distributed so that the one-type branch effect notice pattern can be selected. When the branch effect notice pattern Nos. 0, 10, 20, and 21 are executed when the change display patterns of the change numbers 5 to 10 are designated, the third branch of the branch effects is executed. After the character image imitating the wolf man is displayed on the portrait 90 in the effect announcement, the wolf man reach effect is displayed in which the character image imitating the wolf man is displayed.

  Also, the first branch effect of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 1 to 3, 11 to 13, 22, and 23 described above is specified only when the change display pattern of the change numbers 11 to 16 for executing the dramatic reach effect is specified. The judgment values are distributed so that the notice pattern can be selected. When the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 1 to 3, 11 to 13, 22, and 23 are executed when the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 11 to 16 are designated, After the character image imitating Dracula is displayed on the portrait 90 at the third branch effect notice, the Dracula Reach effect that displays the character image imitating Dracula is executed.

  Further, only when the variation display pattern of the variation numbers 17 to 22 for executing the Franken reach effect is designated, the first branch effect announcement pattern of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 4 to 9 and 14 to 19 is selected. The judgment values are distributed so as to be possible. If the first kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 4 to 9 and 14 to 19 is executed when the change display pattern of change numbers 17 to 22 is specified, the third branch of the branch effects is executed. After the character image imitating Franken is displayed on the portrait 90 in the effect notice, the Franken Reach effect is displayed in which the character image imitating Franken is displayed.

  In addition, the above-described second-type branch effect notice pattern with the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 described above is provided only when the change display pattern of the change number 35 for executing the super reach branch premier effect is specified and the odd probability change is a big hit. The judgment values are distributed so that can be selected. When the variation display pattern of the variation number 35 is designated and the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 are executed when the uncertain change is a big hit, the third of the branch effects is executed. After the character image (monster) imitating a human boy is displayed on the portrait 90 in the branch effect notice, the character image (monster) imitating a human boy is displayed without executing the super reach effect. A monster-kun reach development effect is executed, and a non-probable big hit symbol (a combination of non-specific symbols) is displayed in the monster-kun reach development effect.

  Further, only when the variation display pattern of the variation number 35 for executing the super reach branch premier effect is designated and the probability variation is a big hit, the above-described third type branch effect announcement pattern of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 is displayed. The judgment values are distributed so that they can be selected. When the variation display pattern of the variation number 35 is designated and the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 are executed when the probability variation is a big hit, the third branch of the branch effect is executed. After the character image (Kyoko-chan) imitating a human girl is displayed on the portrait 90 in the performance notice, the full reach production is executed without executing the super reach production. Probability big hit symbol (a combination of specific symbols) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second-type branch effect notice pattern or the third-type branch effect notice pattern is based on the change display pattern determined by the main control board 101 and the game state flag (here, the probability change state flag). However, by including game state information in the variable display pattern, the branch effect notice pattern is determined based on the variable display pattern including the game state information. May be. For example, in the variation display pattern of variation number 35, if the variation display pattern for displaying the probability variation jackpot and the variation display pattern for displaying the non-probability variation jackpot are set in the variation display pattern table after the super reach branch premier effect is executed. Good. In this case, there is no need to distinguish between the second kind branch effect notice pattern and the third kind branch effect notice pattern, and it can be a single kind of branch effect notice pattern. In the branch effect notice table, the game state Different determination values can be assigned to each of the variable display patterns including the above information.

  Also, no outlier symbol is derived in the super reach production, the big hit symbol is derived in the super reach production, or the variation numbers 6 to 10 and 12 to 16 are executed after the super reach production. , 18 to 22, the determination values are distributed so that the above-described first type branch effect notice patterns of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 10 to 19 can be selected only when the variable display patterns of 18 to 22 are designated. When the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 6, 12 and 18 are designated, if the first-type branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 10 to 19 is executed, the super reach effect after the branch effect is executed A big hit symbol is displayed at. When the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 10 to 19 is executed when the change display patterns of the change numbers 7 to 10, 13 to 16, and 19 to 22 are designated, the branch effect is given. After performing the above, the super reach development effect is executed via the super reach effect.

  In addition, the first to third branch effect notices executed in this embodiment (the first kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 19 and the second kind of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11). In the branch effect notice pattern and the branch effect notice pattern Nos. 0 to 11 of the third kind effect effect notice pattern), as in the advanced notice effect, the upper and lower relations depend on the upper and lower relations of the monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. An effect of sequentially appearing toward the upper character is executed. However, unlike the advanced notice effect, characters having the same vertical relationship can appear over a plurality of (two or three) branch effect notices.

  Also, in the super reach effect and the super reach development effect after the third branch effect notice is executed, the expectation level for jackpots is set higher as the character's vertical relationship rises. In addition, the super reach development effect, which is determined to be executed when the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the branch effect notice is red, is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the super reach effect. . Therefore, it is possible to specify the super reach effect and the super reach development effect based on the character displayed in the third branch effect notice and the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the first to third branch effect notices. In addition, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  Further, in this embodiment, the branch effect notice includes the second or third notice of the branch effect that is displayed toward the lower character in the upper and lower relations of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. The branch effect notice pattern is provided in the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20-23.

  Specifically, the branch effect announcement pattern is only provided when the variation display patterns of variation numbers 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 from which the jackpot symbol is derived in the super reach production or the super reach development production are designated. The determination values are distributed so that the first type branch effect notice patterns with numbers 20 to 23 can be selected. When the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 to 23 is executed when the change display patterns of the change numbers 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 are designated, 2 of the branch effect. The top and bottom relations are displayed toward the lower character at the third or third time, and the jackpot symbol is displayed at the super reach effect or the super reach development effect after the branch effect is executed. Thereby, attention is paid to the character displayed by the branch effect notice from the first time to the third time, and the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be gradually increased.

  Further, in the branch effect notice table, the branch effect notice pattern in which the background color of the portrait 90 is blue (the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 9 and the first of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 5 is shown. Branch effect notice pattern (branch effect notice pattern numbers 10 to 10) whose background color is red rather than the ratio at which the two kinds of branch effect notice patterns and branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected. 19 first type branch effect notice patterns, second effect branch notice patterns of branch effect notice pattern numbers 6 to 11 and third kind branch effect notice patterns of branch effect notice pattern numbers 6 to 11) are selected. It is set to be low.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the variation display pattern of the variation number 8 that is a big hit is executed, the ratio of the branch effect announcement pattern number 0 of the first type branch effect announcement pattern is selected. , {57 (judgment value assigned to first branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern number 0) / 73 (total number of decision values assigned to all first kind branch effect notice pattern)} × 100 = About 78%, the proportion of the branch effect notice pattern number 10 of the branch effect notice pattern number 10 selected is assigned to {12 (branch effect notice pattern number 10 of the first kind branch effect notice pattern). Determination value) / 73 (the total number of determination values assigned to all first-type branch effect announcement patterns)} × 100 = about 16%.

  Further, in the branch effect notice table, the branch effect notice pattern (the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 19) to be sequentially displayed toward the upper character in the vertical relationship is more than the ratio selected. The ratio at which the branch effect notice pattern including the branch effect notice displayed for the character whose upper and lower relations are lower (the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 to 23) is significantly reduced. Is set to

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 that is a big hit is executed, the first type branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 and 10 is selected. The ratio is {69 (determination value assigned to the first kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 and 10) / 73 (total number of decision values assigned to all first kind branch effect notice patterns) )} × 100 = about 95%, the proportion of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 and 21 of the first kind branch effect notice pattern selected is {4 (the number of branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 and 21 The determination value assigned to the first-type branch effect notice pattern) / 73 (the total number of determination values assigned to all first-type branch effect notice patterns)} × 100 = about 5%. In this way, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the derivation of the big hit symbol by greatly reducing the ratio of selecting the branch effect notice pattern including the branch effect notice pattern that is displayed toward the character whose upper and lower relations are lower. In the case where the previously recognized ratio is executed at a low rate while the branch effect notice pattern is executed, it is possible to improve the level of bliss for the fact that the derivation of the jackpot symbol is recognized before all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Next, after determining the branch effect notice notice pattern in step S207, the branch accessory effect notice table (FIG. 63) is selected (step S208). Then, branch branch effect announcement notice pattern random numbers are obtained, and one branch role is selected from the branch feature effect announcement patterns set in the branch feature presentation notice pattern based on the acquired branch feature presentation notice pattern random number value. An object effect notice pattern is determined (step S209).

  Note that FIG. 63 shows a branch accessory effect notice table. In the branching effect presentation notice table, three types of branching effect presentation pattern numbers 0 to 2 are prepared as branching effect presentation notice patterns of branching effect presentation. In addition, when the branching instrument effect notice pattern is determined to be the branching accessory notice pattern number 0, the branching effect effect notice is not performed. That is, in the branching effect presentation notice table, it is determined whether or not the branching effect presentation notice is executed based on the branching action presentation notice pattern random number, and the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice is determined. Is determined. For example, when it is determined that the branching object effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 are determined, the branching object notice is determined to be executed and the branching effect effect notice pattern is determined as the branching effect effect notice pattern. The branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect production notice pattern number is determined. In addition, a separate random number for determining whether or not to execute the branching effect presentation notice is provided, and when it is determined that the branching effect presentation notice is executed based on this random number, branching is performed based on the branching effect presentation notice pattern random number. You may make it determine in any one of the accessory effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2. In addition, a variable display pattern including a branch effect announcement notice pattern is provided together with a branch effect announcement pattern, and when the variable display pattern including the branch effect announcement pattern and the branch effect presentation notice pattern is determined, the branch effect notice is displayed. As a part, a branch accessory effect notice may be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 64, the branching effect presentation pattern number 1 is the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 when a predetermined character is displayed on the display area 42 as the third branch presentation notice. Is a branching effect production notice pattern that produces an effect of causing all the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear in front of the display area 42. Here, a part of the character body 150, 152, 154 is visually recognized without making the entire shape of the character body 150, 152, 154 visible like the movement of the character body 150, 152, 154 by the advanced notice pattern. The character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are rattled in a state before the appearance position where the entire shape of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized (a state where the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 are not fully opened). The stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled so as to operate in a small and intense manner.

  Further, the branch character effect notice pattern number 2 is a character body 150, 152, 154 that imitates the same character as the character when a predetermined character is displayed as an image in the display area 42 as the third branch effect notice. Is a branching effect presentation notice pattern in which the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled to appear in front of the display area 42. Here, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven to the appearance positions where the entire shapes of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized, like the movements of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 according to the advanced notice pattern. Control.

  It should be noted that in the branching effect presentation notice pattern of branching effect presentation notice number 1, all the character bodies 150, 152, 154 are operated in front of the appearance position, but as the third branching effect notice. The stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled so that only the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the same character as the character displayed in the display area 42 move in front of the appearance position. May be. Further, in the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 2, a character body 150, 152, 154 imitating the same character as the character displayed in the display area 42 as the third branching effect notice. However, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 may be driven and controlled so that all the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are moved to the appearance position. Further, the branching effect presentation notice is an effect of causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear only in the third branch presentation notice, but is also displayed in the display area 42 in the first and second branch presentation notices. It may be an effect of causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to match the character being present.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the branching effect presentation notice table is a table for determining a branching effect presentation notice pattern based on the branching action presentation notice pattern random number acquired in step S209 described above. In the branching effect presentation notice table, three types of branching effect presentation notice patterns of branching effect production pattern numbers 0 to 2 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns of variation numbers 5 to 22 and 35 for executing the branching effect notice are executed. The random value of the branching effect production notice pattern is assigned to each other. When the variation display pattern with the variation number 35 is executed, a monster or a monster character will be displayed in the display area 42 as the third branch effect notice. Since the character body imitating the same character is not provided, the variation display pattern with the variation number 35 has the branching agent effect announcement pattern random number value in the branching agent effect announcement pattern with the branching agent effect pattern number 2. Not assigned.

  In the branching effect presentation notice table, the big hit expectation is set higher than when the fluctuation display pattern (fluctuation display pattern in which the super reach production is executed) in which the big hit expectation is set low is executed. When the variable display pattern (the variable display pattern in which the monster-kun reach development effect is executed as the super reach development effect) is executed, the branching effect effect notice pattern for causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is selected. The ratio is set to be high.

  For example, when the wolf man reach effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 6 which is a big hit is executed, the branch accessory effect advance notice pattern Nos. 1 and 2 is selected. The ratio is {16 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the branching effect presentation notice patterns of the branching effect presentation pattern numbers 1 and 2) / 98 (the judgment value assigned to all the branching effect presentation notice patterns). )} × 100 = about 16%, the monster man reach production is executed after the wolf man reach production is executed, and the variation display pattern of variation number 10 which is a big hit is executed. In this case, the ratio at which the branch effect notice pattern with the branch effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 is selected is {23 (the branch effect effect notice pattern with the branch effect effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2). It has become allocated total determination value is) / 98 (the total number of judgment values that are allocated to all branches won game presentation notice patterns)} × 100 = about 23%.

  Further, when the variable display pattern from which the jackpot symbol is derived is executed, compared to the case where the variable display pattern from which the off symbol is derived is executed, the branch character effect notice for causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear. The pattern selection ratio is set to be high.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 7 is executed, the branch accessory effect notice pattern Nos. 1 and 2 are selected. The ratio is (14/98) × 100 = about 14%, but branching occurs when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed. The ratio that the branch effect notice pattern of the effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 is selected is (20/98) × 100 = about 20%.

  In addition, in the order of the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 0, the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 1, and the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 2, the winning combination with respect to the variable display pattern from which the outlier design is derived. The variable display pattern from which the symbol is derived is set to be executed at a higher rate.

  For example, the big hit expectation degree when the branch accessory production notice pattern No. 0 is executed is about 49% (692 (allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is out of the fluctuation numbers 5 to 22). The total number of judgment values to be determined) / 1425 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the fluctuation display patterns of the fluctuation numbers 5 to 22) × 100). The expectation degree of jackpot when the branching effect presentation pattern No. 2 is executed is about 68, whereas the expectation degree of jackpot is about 53% (138/258 × 100). % (43/63 × 100). In this way, when the branch object effect notice pattern No. 1 is executed and the character bodies 150, 152, 154 move in a rattling manner, the character bodies 150, 152, 154 do not operate. The player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be increased, and further, the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 2 is executed and displayed in the display area 42 as the third branching effect notice. When a character body 150, 152, 154 imitating the same character as the existing character appears, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be further enhanced than when the character body 150, 152, 154 moves in a rattling manner. it can.

  In the notice selection process (step S103), the above-described advanced notice process (step S212), the intense heat notice process (step S213), and the lightning notice process (step S214) are sequentially executed and then determined by these processes. Whether or not to execute a notice effect (development notice effect, intense heat notice effect, lightning notice effect) based on the notice pattern, and which notice effect and notice pattern to execute if the notice effect is executed Is determined by the processing of steps S217 to S225. In addition, the mini character notice selection process (step S215) and the branch effect notice selection process (step S216) are executed, and whether or not the notice effects (developed notice effect, intense heat notice effect, and lightning notice effect) are executed. First, whether or not to execute the notice effect (mini character notice effect or branch effect notice) based on the notice pattern determined in these processes, and which notice pattern is executed when the notice effect is executed Is determined by the processing of steps S226 to S231.

  As shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process (step S212) is the advanced notice pattern number 0 (step S217). If it is not the advanced notice pattern number 0 (if it is the evolved notice pattern number 1 to 21), the evolved notice pattern determined in step S134 is set (step S218). By setting the advanced notice pattern in step S218, it is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S110), and the advanced notice pattern is received by the second electrical control board 113. Sometimes, the CPU 113a controls to start the advanced notice effect. Further, in the sub-information output process (step S110), the advanced notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and at the predetermined timing (the advance notice pattern step for causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is started. At the timing, a drive signal is output to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, and the character bodies 150, 152, 154 appear.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process (step S212) is the advanced notice pattern number 1 to 17 (step S218). If the advanced notice pattern number is 1 to 17, the comment notice pattern should be determined in step S137, and the comment notice pattern is set (step S220). By setting the comment advance notice pattern in step S220, the sub information output process (step S110) and the developed advance notice pattern set in step 218 are transmitted to the second illumination control board 113, and the second illumination control board 113 is transmitted. When the comment notice pattern is received at the CPU 113a, the CPU 113a starts the comment notice effect at a predetermined timing of the advanced notice effect (the start timing of step 1 of the advanced notice pattern that displays the balloon from the monster). Control is performed. Further, in the sub information output process (step S110), the advanced notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and a drive signal is outputted to the sound wave device 115 in accordance with the comment notice pattern, based on the comment notice pattern. The comment content is output as audio.

  If the advance notice pattern numbers are 18, 20, and 21, the button notice pattern for displaying the comment “Press the button!” In the balloon from the monster is already set in step S139. In this case as well, the advanced notice pattern set in step 218 is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S110), and the button notice pattern is displayed on the second electrical control board 113. When received, the CPU 113a controls to start the button notice effect at a predetermined timing of the advance notice effect (start timing of Step 1 of the advance notice pattern for displaying the balloon from the monster). Further, in the sub information output process (step S110), the advanced notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and a drive signal is outputted to the sound wave device 115 according to the button notice pattern, and based on the button notice pattern. The comment content (“Press the button!”) Is output as audio. In this embodiment, the comment contents set in the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern numbers 1 to 15 or the button notice pattern of button notice pattern numbers 1 to 14 are output as sound information. In this way, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the advanced notice selection process (step S212) of the notice selection process or the button notice selection process (steps S246, S250, and S253) of the button input process, thereby giving a comment notice. The pattern or button notice pattern is determined, and the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 and the waveform control board 114 in the sub-information output process (step S110). The CPU 113a mounted on the CPU 113 controls the display of the comment contents in the balloon 78 from the monster in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116, and the comment warning pattern stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114 or Button notice pattern And a corresponding sound sound information control means data based to output sound and outputs a drive signal to the ultrasound system 115 (portions for performing the comments informational display or buttons announcement attraction). In this embodiment, the plurality of modes are modes that appeal to the player's sense of hearing (sound output) and vision (image display), but are not limited to these senses of hearing and vision as long as they appeal to the human senses. .

  In this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the advanced notice selection process (step S212) of the notice selection process or the button notice selection process (steps S246, S250, S253) of the button input process. Then, the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern is determined, and the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern is transmitted to the waveform control board 114 by the sub information output process (step S110), and is sent to the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114. Sound information output control means for outputting a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on sound data corresponding to the stored comment notice pattern or button notice pattern is provided. Further, the advanced notice selection process (step S212) of the notice selection process or the button notice selection process (steps S246, S250, S253) of the button input process is executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and the comment notice pattern or The button notice pattern is determined, the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub-information output process (step S110), and the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical control board 113 is used. The display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 is provided with sound information display control means for controlling the display of the comment contents in the balloon 78 from the monster (a part for executing the comment notice effect or the button notice effect).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the advanced notice selection process (step S212) of the advance notice selection process to develop the advanced notices of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20, and 21. The developed advance notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S110), and the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 displays the display on the liquid crystal display 116. The area 42 is provided with effect area display control means for controlling the display of the balloon 78 from the monster who displays the comment content (the part for executing step 1 of the advanced notice effect).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the intense heat notice pattern determined in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process (step S213) is the intense heat notice pattern number 0 (step S221). If it is not the intense heat warning pattern number 0 (if it is the intense heat warning pattern number 1 to 6), the balloon or character displayed in the advanced notice pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the advanced notice pattern) 5) and whether or not the balloons and characters (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the intense heat warning patterns Nos. 1 to 6 match. (Step S222). If the balloon or character matches, the intense heat warning pattern determined in step S142 is set (step S223). By setting the intense heat warning pattern in step S223, the sub-information output process (step S110) and the development type warning pattern set in step S218 are transmitted to the second lighting control board 113, and the second lighting control board is transmitted. At 113, the CPU 113a has already started the advanced notice effect at the predetermined timing (the start timing of the step of the advanced notice pattern that causes a matching balloon or character to appear). Control to start the intense heat notice effect is performed. If the intense heat warning pattern number is 0 in step S221 or if the balloon or character does not match in step S222, the process proceeds to step S226. As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in step S222 of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, that is, as a predetermined matching condition. , Monster-kun speech balloon, wolf man, Dracula, Franken, monster-kun speech balloon and character image display, selected image display balloon and character to be executed with the selected advance notice pattern Matching condition judging means for judging whether or not a balloon or a character for image display executed with the intense heat notice pattern matches. And when it is determined as the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 21 and when it is decided as the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 6, and the step of the notice selection process When the step of the advanced notice pattern and the intense heat notice pattern match in S222, the advanced notice pattern determined in Step S218 of the notice selection process is set, and the intense heat notice pattern is set in Step S223. In the sub information output process (step S110), the information is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and the advanced notice effect is executed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. At the same time, the intense heat announcement effect is displayed and controlled by a part or all of the advanced notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the balloon or character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the advanced notice pattern) that is displayed as an image by the advanced notice pattern in step S222 and the intense heat of the intense notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 are displayed. It is determined whether or not the intense heat announcement effect is executed by determining whether or not the balloon or character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the intense heat announcement pattern) determined from the announcement pattern matches. Has been decided. If the intense heat warning pattern determined in step S142 is the intense heat warning pattern number 3, a plurality of steps (steps 1 and 2) are set, which match the step executed in the advanced warning pattern. The ratio to do becomes high. In this case, the intense heat notice effect is executed only in the matching step among the balloons and characters (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed as images by the evolved notice pattern. For example, if it is determined that the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 8 and the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 3 are determined, the advanced notice pattern includes step 1 of the intense heat notice pattern ( Since the balloon from the monster matches), there is no step 2 (the character of the wolf man does not match), so only step 1 of the intense heat warning pattern is executed.

  In this embodiment, the rate at which the intense heat announcement effect is executed is set to be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case where the display result is lost. For example, the probability of the appearance of a wolf man with a different appearance as an intense heat announcement effect (appearance rate), that is, the probability that the intense heat announcement pattern No. 2 will be executed, the wolf man reach development effect is executed, In addition, when the variation display pattern of variation number 8 that is a big hit is executed, the intense heat notification pattern of intense heat notification pattern number 2 is executed in advance type advance pattern numbers 2, 4, 5, 7, Since 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16 evolved advance notice patterns are executed, {90 (evolved advance notice pattern numbers 2, 4, 5, 7,. The total number of judgment values assigned to the 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16 advanced notice patterns) / 233 (the total number of judgment values assigned to all the advanced notice patterns)} × {14 Heat notice pattern Version number The total number of judgment values that are allocated to the intense heat notice pattern 2) / 202 (which is all the total number of evolved notice determination value allocated to the pattern)} × 100 = about 2.7%. In addition, when the same wolf man reach development effect as described above is executed and the change display pattern of change number 7 which is out of place is executed, (104/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about It is 0.44%. Therefore, when a balloon announcement or character that is different from a balloon or character displayed as an image in a normal development announcement announcement (development announcement announcement that does not execute a glow announcement announcement) is performed, The expectation that the display result is a big hit for the player can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the 1-byte execution area in the RAM 111c of the sub-integrated board 111, the intense heat notice pattern random number is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 201. In the 1-byte execution area, the upper limit of the numerical range of random numbers that can be updated is 256 (0 to 255), and the determination is simply made that the intense heat announcement pattern random number is assigned to the intense heat announcement pattern for executing the intense heat announcement effect. When the intense heat announcement effect is executed when the value matches the value, even if the upper limit numerical range is used as the intense heat announcement pattern random number, the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat announcement effect is executed is 1/256 ×. 100 = about 0.39%. On the other hand, in the case where the intense heat advance notice effect is executed only when the specific advanced notice effect is executed, when the evolved pattern random number is updated in the execution area of 1 byte (in this embodiment, Even if the advanced notice pattern random number is updated in the numerical range of 0 to 232, a 1-byte execution area is used), the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat notice effect is executed is (1 / 256) × (1/256) × 100 = about 0.0015%, and the probability that the intense heat notice effect is executed can be sufficiently reduced.

  Specifically, for example, the probability (appearance rate) that a monster with a different color scheme appears as an intense heat announcement effect, that is, the probability that the intense heat announcement pattern No. 6 will be executed is the wolf man reach When the development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed, (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11%. Therefore, the intense heat advance notice effect is executed only when a specific advanced notice effect is executed, so that the premier heat that is rarely executed while saving the RAM usage area is saved. A notice effect can be realized.

  In addition, when the intense heat warning effect is executed when the random number of the intense heat warning pattern coincides with the judgment value assigned to the intense heat warning pattern that executes the intense heat warning effect, the hot heat warning effect is regular. (Since the intense heat warning pattern random number is updated every predetermined time, the timing when the intense heat warning pattern random number matches the judgment value, that is, the timing when the intense heat warning effect can be executed. However, only when a specific advanced notice effect is executed, the intense heat notice effect is executed (determined from a balloon or an image displayed in the advanced notice effect and the intense heat notice pattern). Only when there is a match with a balloon or character, the intense heat announcement effect is executed as a part of the advanced notice effect). Consisting balloon and has appeared by chance of character or the like, the game is not to become monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, instead of setting the intense heat announcement pattern (the intense heat announcement pattern that makes a balloon or a character with a different color scheme appear) as a part of the advanced announcement effect, When it is configured to be included in the advanced notice pattern, it is necessary to prepare a new advanced notice pattern for each of the advanced notice patterns that can be executed. The amount of data to be stored in the ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111, which is the storage area for the advanced notice pattern, becomes enormous. However, an intense heat notice pattern is set separately from the evolved notice pattern, and a specific developed notice effect is produced. By executing the intense heat advance notice effect only when the is executed, it is possible to reduce the data amount of all the advance notice patterns to be stored in the ROM 111b. Kill.

  In addition, an advanced notice pattern in which an advanced notice effect is executed and an intense heat notice pattern in which an intense heat notice effect is executed independently of the advanced notice effect are set, and the intense notice effect is executed. Even if it is determined that the advanced notice effect is to be executed, the advanced notice effect is not executed and the intense heat notice effect is preferentially executed. In such a case, the notice effect itself will be changed, and the derivation balance of the advanced notice effect may be impaired. The derivation balance of the advanced notice effect is not impaired by setting the intense heat notice pattern to be executed and causing the intense heat notice effect to be executed as part of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the probability (appearance rate) that a character different from the character displayed in the advanced notice effect as an intense notice effect will appear in the vertical relationship of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. It is set differently depending on the situation. That is, as the character's vertical relationship becomes higher, the appearance rate of the character displayed as an intense heat announcement effect is set to be lower.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed when the background image is the daytime background image 81 and the change display pattern of the change number 8 that is a big hit is executed, The appearance rate of different wolf men (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern Nos. 2 and 3) is (90/233) × (42/202) × 100 = about 8.0%, The appearance rate of Dracula with different color schemes (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 4) is (66/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.28% The appearance rate of Franken with different color schemes (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 5 is executed) is (43/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.18%. Monsters with different color schemes Kun incidence of (probability of intense heat notice patterns of intense heat notice pattern number 6 is executed) has a (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11%.

  Here, the ratio (2/202) determined from each of the intense heat notification patterns of the intense heat notification pattern numbers 4 to 6 to each of the intense heat notification patterns is the same, but as the character's vertical relationship rises, Since the proportion determined as the advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding intense heat notice pattern is executed decreases, the appearance rate of the character displayed as an intense heat notice effect decreases. Therefore, as the character's vertical relationship rises, the character displayed as an intense heat notice effect rarely appears, and the bliss level when a character whose character's vertical relationship is high appears Can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, characters appearing at each stage are displayed on the display area 42 in the daytime background advance notice table and the night background advance notice table. The determination value is assigned so that the expected degree of jackpot when it appears by controlling the driving of the stepping motor is higher than the expected degree of jackpot. For this reason, when the variable display pattern is determined to be a big hit, the rate of appearance of the character is increased by controlling the driving of the stepping motor, compared to the case where the variable display pattern is determined to be out of sync. Balloons and characters that are displayed as images by the advanced notice patterns (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the advanced notice patterns) and the balloons and characters determined from the intense notice patterns 1-6 The rate at which (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 of the intense heat warning pattern) match is low.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the stepping motors 150h and 152h in the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the night background developed notice table than the day background developed notice table are provided. , 153f, and 155, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the advanced notice pattern that causes the corresponding character body 150, 152, 154 to appear is increased. For this reason, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, the ratio of causing the character to appear by displaying the image in the display area 42 is lower than in the case of the daytime background image 81, In step S222, the balloon or character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed as an image with the evolved notice pattern and the intense heat notice patterns Nos. 1 to 4 are determined. The rate at which the balloons and characters (steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the intense heat warning pattern) match decreases.

  As described above, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and so on are controlled by driving one of the stepping motors 150 h, 152 h, 153 f, and 155. In the case where the background image is the daytime background image 81, the balloon determined from the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 is improved by increasing the rate at which 154 appears. The expectation that becomes a big hit can be improved by making the character appear and increasing the ratio. In addition, as described above, when the display pattern is determined to be a big hit, or when the background image is the night background image 82, balloons and characters that are displayed as an intense heat announcement effect rarely appear. The bliss level when these balloons and characters appear can be improved.

  In step S217, if the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 is the advanced notice pattern number 0, the lightning notice pattern determined in step S154 of the lightning notice selection process (step S214) is lightning notice pattern number 0. It is determined whether or not there is (step S224). If it is not the lightning warning pattern number 0 (if it is lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6), the lightning warning pattern determined in step S154 is set (step S225). By setting the lightning warning pattern in step S225, when the lightning warning pattern is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub-information output process (step S110), and the lightning warning pattern is received by the second electrical control board 113 The CPU 113a controls to start the lightning notice effect. In addition, the sub information output process (step S110) transmits the lightning warning pattern to the second illumination control board 113 and starts displaying lightning based on the predetermined timing (lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5). At a timing, a drive signal is output to the effect lamps 44a and 44b, and the effect lamps 44a and 44b are turned on and blinked.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice pattern determined in step S194 of the mini character notice selection process (step S215) is the mini character notice pattern number 0 (step S226). If the mini character notice pattern number is not 0 (if the mini character notice pattern number is 1 to 11), the mini character notice pattern determined in step S194 is set (step S227). When the mini character notice pattern is set in step S227 and transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S110), and the mini character notice pattern is received by the second electrical decoration control board 113. The CPU 113a controls to start the mini character notice effect.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the received variation display pattern command is a variation number 5 to 22 or 35 (step S228). If the change number is 5 to 22, 35, the branch effect notice pattern should be determined in step S207 of the branch effect notice selection process (step S216), and this branch effect notice pattern is set (step S229). If the change numbers are not 5 to 22 and 35, the process returns to the main flow as it is.

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the branching effect presentation notice pattern determined in step S209 of the branching effect notice selection process (step S216) is the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 0 (step S230). If the branching effect presentation notice pattern number is not 0 (if the branching action presentation notice pattern number is 1 or 2), the branching effect presentation notice pattern determined in step S209 is set (step S231). By setting the branch effect notice pattern in step S229, it is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S110), and the branch effect notice pattern is received by the second electrical control board 113. Sometimes, the CPU 113a controls to start the branch effect notice. In addition, by setting the branching effect presentation notice pattern in step S231, the branching effect presentation notice pattern is transmitted to the first electrical decoration control board 112 in the sub information output process (step S110), and a predetermined timing (branching combination is displayed). At the start timing of the third branch effect notice that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear based on the branch effect notice notice pattern of the object effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven. A signal is output and character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as the effect mode based on the basic effect mode, before the reach mode is displayed, a preview effect (development type advance notice, comment) by the character images 70 to 75, the mini character images 90 to 93, etc. Notice, button notice, intense heat notice, lightning notice, mini character notice, etc.), which is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, corresponding to the variable display pattern received from the main control board 101 There is provided a selective effect mode determining means for executing a notice selection process (step S103) and determining a notice effect. It should be noted that in the effect mode based on the basic effect mode, the effect mode of the notice effect (branch effect notice, branching effect effect, etc.) executed after the reach mode is displayed, or the effect mode by sound output from the sonic device 115 Etc. are also included.

  Further, in this embodiment, a series of effects (notice effect and reach effect) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c to the stop display can be executed as the composite effect, and the sub integrated board 111 can be executed. Depending on the reach effect included in the change display pattern and the result of the advance selection process, the notice selection process (step S103) corresponding to the change display pattern received from the main control board 101 by the CPU 111a mounted on The information is transmitted to the first electrical control board 112, the second electrical control board 113, and the waveform control board 114 in the sub information output process (step S110), and the drive signal is transmitted a predetermined number of times by the first electrical control board 112. When input, the character body 150, 152, 1 is output by outputting a drive signal to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155. 4, the CPU 113 a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls display of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116, and stores it in the ROM 114 b mounted on the waveform control board 114. A composite effect executing means for outputting a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the predetermined sound data and outputting a sound is provided.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the character images 70 to 75 and the mini character images 90 to 93 can be displayed and controlled as effect images. The CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 displays the variation display pattern. A corresponding notice selection process (step S103) is executed and information corresponding to the reach effect included in the variable display pattern and the result of the notice selection process is displayed in the second information control in the sub information output process (step S110). A composite effect display control means for transmitting to the substrate 113 and controlling display of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control substrate 113 is provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, a dependent effect mode that depends on the reach effect (basic effect mode), for example, an advance notice, a comment notice, a button notice, Intense heat notice, lightning notice, branch effect notice, branch role effect, etc. Specific reach effect cannot be derived after execution of the notice effect (not easy to guide). The sound output can be changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the dependent effect modes are developed by controlling simultaneously with the single effect modes such as the advance notice, the lightning notice, and the branch effect notice, which are not controlled at the same time, and the single effect aspects. It is composed of a comment notice, a button notice, an intense heat notice, and a built-in effect form such as a branching effect effect notice executed as a part of a branch effect notice. Further, the dependent effect mode is a criterion for determining whether or not another notice effect is to be executed. That is, the effect type of the advanced notice as the priority effect aspect having a high priority and whether or not the advanced notice is executed. Whether or not to execute the production mode is determined based on the above, that is, the production mode as a non-priority production mode having a low priority, Comment notice (embedded effect mode), button notice (built-in effect mode), and intense heat notice (built-in effect mode) executed as part of the type notice are non-priority effects, and the advanced notice is not executed. In this case, lightning bolt notice (single effect mode) is a non-priority effect mode.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it has a balloon from a monster, a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and a monster as a plurality of effects in the priority effect. On the other hand, as a non-priority production mode, a single comment sentence (for example, a comment trailer or a button trailer), or a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, or a monster-kun (for example, an intense heat trail or a lightning bolt trailer) A spotlight notice) is displayed, and fewer effects are displayed than the effects in the priority effects. Further, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes an advanced notice selection process (step S212) of the notice selection process, and information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process is displayed in the sub information output process (step S110). 2 Send to the illumination control board 113, and the balloon 113 from the monster as a predetermined order in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113 → Wolf man → Dracula → Multi-stage effect execution means for displaying and controlling the advanced notice effect (multi-stage effect) in the order of Franken-> Monster-kun is provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, as one stage in the multi-stage stage, the monster man, Dracula, Franken, and the image of the monster are controlled as a subsequent stage after the balloon from the monster in the advanced notice stage. The comment notice or button notice executed as a part or all of the advanced notice effect is executed as an embedded effect incorporated in the monster-kun balloon in the advanced notice effect. The CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111 executes the advanced notice selection process (step S212) of the notice selection process or the button notice selection process (steps S246, S250, S253) of the button input process to execute the comment notice pattern or the button notice. The pattern is determined, the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 by the sub information output process (step S110), and the liquid crystal display is performed by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical control board 113. The display area 42 of the vessel 116 includes first built-in production execution means for controlling the display of the comment content in the balloon 78 from the monster. In the built-in production mode, the display of the comment content set in the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern as the comment text (for example, the comment content of “?” For comment notice pattern number 1) is controlled. To make the contents visible to the player. In addition, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the intense heat notice selection process (step S213) of the notice selection process, and the information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process is displayed in the sub information output process (step S110). As a built-in effect that is transmitted to the second illumination control board 113 and executed as a part or all of the advanced notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113. The second built-in effect execution means for controlling the display of the intense heat notice effect is provided. That is, in the notice selection process, the advance type notice, the intense heat notice, the lightning notice, and the branch effect notice are determined corresponding to each of the specific effect patterns for the effect patterns determined in advance (in the present embodiment, the symbol setting process). In addition, not only a specific production pattern but also a mini character notice is selected.

  Next, the sound control process (step S104) executed in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the sound output mode to be output by the sound wave device 115 is determined by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, and a drive signal is output to the sound wave device 115 according to the sound output mode. The ROM 1114b mounted on the waveform control board 114 stores a plurality of types of sound output data, and the ROM 111b mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 stores the ROM 1114b mounted on the waveform control board 114. A signal instructing driving of the sound wave device 115 is provided for each of a plurality of types of sound output data in a one-to-one correspondence.

  In this embodiment, the decorative pattern 80a to 80b is displayed in the display area 42 until the reach mode is formed and the reach effect is started, or the decorative pattern 80a is displayed in the display area 42. A predetermined sound output is executed from the start of the variable display of ˜80b until the display of the symbol is stopped without forming the reach mode. In this embodiment, control is performed so that the sound output mode to be output differs according to the background image. In the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114, the day background normal sound data indicating the day background normal sound corresponding to the day background image 81 and the night background normal sound data indicating the night background normal sound corresponding to the night background image 82 are stored. And are stored. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the change of the background image more clearly.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the sound is controlled so as to output a special sound different from these normal sounds (day background normal sound, night background normal sound) and mounted on the waveform control board 114. The ROM 114b also stores special sound data indicating special sounds. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the special sound is output, the game is controlled so that the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special sound is output. It raises the expectation for the probable big hit of the person.

  In this embodiment, no special sound is provided for each background image. That is, when outputting a special sound, the same special sound is output regardless of the type of the background image. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that a special sound is being output, so that a sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be increased when the special sound is output. In addition, you may comprise so that a special sound may differ for every background image, and since the combination of the background image displayed and the sound output aspect output increases in this case, the effect performed Can be diversified.

  In this embodiment, the change in the background image and the change in the sound output mode (normal sound) are synchronized, and a special sound different from the normal sound is output when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player's expectation can be synergistically increased by the background image and the sound output mode. For example, in the state in which the display of the night background image 82 is controlled, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be enhanced as compared with the case where the normal daytime background image 81 is displayed, and the special image regardless of the type of the background image. In the state in which the sound is output, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced compared to the case in which the normal sound is output. Further, in the state where these are combined, that is, the night background image 82 is displayed. In a state where the display is controlled and a special sound is output, both the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, the player's expectation can be increased step by step depending on the type of background image and the sound output mode. For example, the display state of the daytime background image 81 and the state in which the normal sound is output <the state in which the daytime background image 81 is displayed and the state in which the special sound is output ≦ the display of the night background image 82 is controlled, and In addition, the player's expectation for the big hit and the probable big hit can be increased step by step in the order of the normal sound output state <the night background image 82 is displayed and the special sound is output.

  FIG. 65 shows sound control processing executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. First, the CPU 111a executes a sound change determination process (step S161). In the sound change determination process, it is determined whether or not to change the sound output mode output by the sound wave device 115 based on a determination table described later.

  Here, the determination table set in accordance with the type of variation pattern for starting the next variation display and the sound output mode in the previous variation display will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a probability variation big hit determination table, a non-probability variable big hit determination table, a reach determination table, and a loss determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern for starting the next variation display is a probability variation jackpot, that is, when a probability variation jackpot command is received when a variation pattern that is a jackpot is received, Next, when the fluctuation pattern that starts the fluctuation display is a non-probable big hit, that is, when the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit is received, the probability variation big hit command is not received, and the fluctuation pattern that starts the fluctuation display next is When the reach is out of sync, that is, when the fluctuation pattern that is out of reach with the reach mode is received, and when the next change pattern that starts the display of fluctuation is out of the range without the reach mode, that is, normal fluctuation, and When a fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuations is received, it is different from normal sounds (day background normal sounds, night background normal sounds) and special sounds. The determination table is provided a plurality of types that are set, respectively.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table that is selected when the variation pattern for starting the next variation display is the probability variation big hit, a determination value is assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. If the probability change jackpot is changed at a high rate from the normal sound to the special sound, the player's expectation for the probability change jackpot is reduced when the normal sound is output. Therefore, even if the sound output mode in the previous fluctuation display is a normal sound and the next fluctuation display is a probable big hit, the normal sound is output by continuing the normal sound at a high rate. Does not reduce the expectation for. Further, when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than in the case where the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound. The player's interest can be further improved by reducing the sense of expectation for the probable jackpot by switching to the sound and then making the probable jackpot.

  Next, in the non-probability variable big hit determination table selected when the fluctuation pattern for starting the fluctuation display is non-probable variable big hit, determination values are assigned so that the sound output mode is a normal sound. In this embodiment, when the normal pattern is output by changing to the normal sound when the fluctuation pattern to start the next fluctuation display becomes the non-probable big hit, the special sound is further prevented so that the normal sound is not output. Is controlled so that it is always a probable big hit. With this configuration, when a special sound is output, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table, if the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern to start the next fluctuation display is non-probable big hit, even if it is changed to normal sound, the player does not know whether it is probable big hit or non-probable big hit. Even when the special sound is changed to the normal sound when the display is started, the expectation for the probable big hit is not lowered so much.

  Further, in the reach failure determination table and the disconnection determination table, determination values are assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. As described above, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in this embodiment is 1/490, and most of the variation patterns designated from the main control board 101 are out of reach and out of variation patterns. Therefore, when the next fluctuation display is out of reach or out of reach, the sound output mode is not changed frequently (continue to some extent) by continuing the sound output mode at a high rate, so the sound output mode is changed frequently. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, the CPU 111a determines whether or not the special sound output flag is set (step S162). The special sound output flag is set when it is determined in the sound change determination process (step S161) that the sound output mode is changed to the special sound, and the sound output mode output from the sound wave device 115 is the special sound. It is a flag indicating that there is. If the special sound output flag is set in step S162, a signal instructing the sound output data of the special sound is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S163).

  If the special sound output flag is not set in step S162, it is confirmed whether the daytime background flag is ON (step S164). If the daytime background flag is not ON, a signal instructing sound control data of the night background normal sound is sent. The signal is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S165), and if the daytime background flag is ON, a signal instructing sound control data of the daytime background normal sound is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S166). As described above, the background image is changed when the background change notice is executed in the blackout effect. In step S164, the state of the day / background flag that is turned ON / OFF by the background change notice is determined. Yes.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sound change determination process (step S161). In the sound change determination process, the CPU 111a first checks whether the special sound output flag is set (step 171). If the special sound output flag is set in step S171, the special sound output selection table is set (step S172). If the special sound output flag is not set in step S171, the normal sound output selection table is set. (Step S173).

  Next, the CPU 111a reads a sound determination random number stored in the RAM 111b mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 (step S174). The sound determination random number is extracted from a counter that updates the sound determination random number when a variation display pattern command is received from the main control board 101, and is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variation pattern command. That is, the sound determination random number read in step S174 is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variation pattern for starting the next variation display.

  Further, in this embodiment, a different determination table is selected according to the type of the variation pattern for starting the variation display next and the sound output mode in the previous variation display. That is, depending on whether it is a big hit (step S175), if it is a big hit, whether it is a probable big hit (step S176), if it is not a big hit, whether to reach (step S179). The non-probable big hit determination table (step S177), the probable big hit determination table (step S178), the reach determination table (step S180), and the loss determination table (step S181) are selected.

  After selecting the determination table in steps S171 to S181 described above, it is confirmed whether the sound is a special sound based on the sound determination random number read in step S174 and the selected determination table (step S182). In this case, if the special sound output flag is not set (step S183), the special sound output flag is set (step S184).

  If it is determined in step S182 that the special sound output flag is not set (step S185), the special sound output flag is reset (step S186).

  With the above processing, it is possible to change the normal sound corresponding to the background image, and the player can more clearly grasp the change of the background image. Further, the normal sound of the daytime background or the normal sound of the night background is output from the sound wave device 115 according to the type of the background image, and the sound is output when the sound change determination process (step S161) determines that the sound output mode is changed. In order to change the aspect to a special sound, when a special sound is output, the player is in a certain state (especially a state where it is likely to be a big hit), and the expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased Can be increased. As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the sound change determination process (step S161) of the sound control process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the sound control process. It is transmitted to the waveform control board 114 in the process (step S110), and a drive signal is output to the sound wave device 115 based on the special sound data stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114 to produce a sound output effect. Sound output effect execution means for outputting background normal sounds, night background normal sounds, and special sounds is provided. Further, as described above, the change of the sound output is determined depending on the sound output mode, the result of the jackpot determination process, whether or not the jackpot is determined to be a promiscuous jackpot, and the like, without depending on the effect mode of reach production.

  Next, the button input process (step S107) executed in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing button input processing that is a subroutine of effect control processing. FIG. 69 shows button notice selection processing that is a subroutine of button input processing. 70 to 72 are table charts showing button notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 73 is a table showing button notice patterns.

  In the button input process (step 107) shown in FIG. 68, it is determined whether or not the button input waiting timer started in step S139 of the advanced notice selection process (step S212) has timed out (step S241). That is, after the comment “Press the button!” Is displayed in the balloon from the monster, it is determined whether or not the button input waiting time corresponding to the advanced notice pattern has elapsed. If the button input waiting timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not the operation button 38 has been operated and an operation signal has been input to the sub-integrated substrate 111 (step S242). If no operation signal is input, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. As described above, an operation detection unit that detects the operation signal of the operation button 38, which is a function of the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated substrate 111, is provided.

  If an operation signal is input in step S242, the button input number counter is incremented by 1 (step S243), and it is determined whether or not the button input number counter is 1 (step S244). The button input number counter is a counter that is provided in the RAM 111c mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 and stores the number of times that an operation signal has been input (corresponding to the number of times the operation button 38 has been operated).

  If the button input number counter is 1 in step S244, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process (step S212) is the advanced notice pattern number 18 (step S212). Step S245). If it is the advanced notice pattern number 18, a button notice selection process to be described later is executed (step S246). If it is not the evolved notice pattern number 18, a comment “Let's hit repeatedly!” Is displayed in the balloon from the monster. A button notice pattern is set (step S247), and the process returns to the main routine. In step S247, by setting a button notice pattern of “Let's hit consecutively!”, The sub information output process (step S110) transmits to the second illumination control board 113 and drives the sound wave device 115 according to the button notice pattern. A signal is output, and the comment content (“Let's hit repeatedly!”) Based on the button notice pattern is output as a voice. Here, if it is not the advanced notice pattern number 18, the button input waiting timer is set only when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 18, 20, 21 is selected (YES in step S241). Therefore, the advanced notice pattern numbers 20 and 21 are respectively required to operate the operation button 38 three times and seven times. That is, after the comment “Press the button!” Is displayed in the balloon from the monster, the operation button 38 is operated once to display the comment “Let's hit repeatedly!” The player is informed that an operation is required.

  If the button input number counter is not 1 in step S244, it is determined whether or not the button input number counter is 3 (step S248). If the button input number counter is 3, it is determined whether or not it is the advanced notice pattern number 20 (step S249). If it is the advanced notice pattern number 20, the button notice selection process described later is executed (step S250). If it is not the evolved notice pattern number 20, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine.

  If the button input number counter is not 3 in step S248, it is determined whether or not the button input number counter is 7 (step S251). If the button input number counter is 7, it is determined whether or not it is the advanced notice pattern number 21 (step S252). If it is the advanced notice pattern number 21, a button notice selection process described later is executed (step S253). If the button input number counter is not 7 or the advance notice pattern number 21 is not satisfied, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine.

  In the button notice selection process (steps S246, S250, and S253) shown in FIG. 69, a button notice pattern random number is acquired (step S261), and any one of the first button notice table, the second button notice table, and the third button notice table is obtained. Is selected (step S262). Here, the first button notice table (FIG. 70) is selected for the advanced notice pattern number 18 and the second button notice table (FIG. 71) is selected for the evolved notice pattern number 20, and the evolved notice is selected. If the table 21, the third button notice table (FIG. 72) is selected. Then, based on the acquired button notice pattern random value, one button notice pattern is determined from the button notice pattern set in the button notice table selected in step S262 (step S263). In this embodiment, when the button notice effect is executed based on the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 18, 20, and 21, which is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, the button is displayed. Sound information to be determined as one of the button notice patterns of button notice pattern numbers 1 to 14 based on the button notice pattern random number and the determination values set in the first to third button notice tables in step S263 of the notice selection process A determination means is provided. If the button input number counter is a predetermined value (1 if the advanced notice pattern number is 18, 1 if the advanced notice pattern number is 20, 7 if the evolved notice pattern number is 21), the button input process is performed. Button notice selection process is executed in steps S246, S250 and S253, button notice pattern random numbers are acquired in step S261 of the button notice selection process, and button notice pattern random numbers are used in step S263 using the button notice pattern random numbers. One of the button notice patterns numbered 1 to 14 is determined.

  Next, the button notice pattern determined in step S263 is set (step S264). By setting the button notice pattern in step S264, the sub-information output process (step S110) transmits it to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 according to the button notice pattern. The comment content based on the button notice pattern is output as audio. That is, in the case of the advanced notice pattern number 18, the comment “Please press the button!” Displayed in the balloon from the monster-kun is operated by operating the operation button 38 once, so that the first comment notice table is displayed. The comment contents based on the comment notice pattern selected from the above will be updated and displayed. In the case of the advanced notice patterns 20 and 21, "Press the button!" ”Is updated and displayed in the comment content based on the comment notice pattern selected from the second comment notice pattern or the third comment notice pattern, respectively, by operating the operation button 38 three times or seven times. Become.

  The first button notice table is shown in FIG. 70, the second button notice table is shown in FIG. 71, and the third button notice table is shown in FIG. In these button notice tables, 14 kinds of button notice pattern numbers 1 to 14 are prepared as button notice patterns of button notice effects. In this case, it has already been determined that the button notice effect is executed on the balloon from the monster based on the developed notice pattern of the developed notice pattern numbers 18, 20, and 21. That is, in the button notice table, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the button notice effect is executed, and only the button notice pattern of the button notice effect is determined. In addition, when a variable display pattern including an advanced notice pattern and a button notice pattern is provided, and a variable display pattern including these advanced notice patterns and a button notice pattern is determined, the button notice pattern is executed together with the advanced notice pattern. You may make it do.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, the button notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 are displayed in a balloon from the monster-kun as “N ??”, “Ehehehe”, “Huh? ..!? ”Is a button notice pattern that performs an effect of updating and displaying each comment content. These comment contents are the same as the comment contents displayed in the comment notice patterns of comment notice pattern numbers 1, 2, 4, and 6. Note that the comment content based on the button notice pattern is often more useful information to the player than the comment content based on the comment notice pattern (such as comment content that can recognize the jackpot expectation), and the button notice effect is being executed. Further, the operation of the operation button 38 is promoted.

  Button notice pattern numbers 5 to 7 update and display the comment content “!!” in a balloon from the monster, and control the stepping motor 155 to control the character body 154 that imitates a wolf man (button notice pattern). No. 5), the character body 152 imitating the dracula by controlling the driving of the stepping motor 153f (button notice pattern number 6), and the character object 150 imitating the franken by controlling the driving of the stepping motors 150h and 152h (button notice) Pattern number 7) is a button notice pattern for producing an effect to appear in front of the display area 42, respectively.

  Button notice pattern numbers 8-12 are "Expectation 10 Kai", "Expectation 30 Kai", "Expectation 50 Kai", "Expectation 80 Kai", "Expectation Kai-Ikai Kai" This is a button notice pattern for performing an effect of updating and displaying each comment content. The “expectation degree” refers to the jackpot expectation degree. For example, the expression of the jackpot expectation degree of 10% is expressed as “expectation degree 10 Kai” by using the monster-kun style. In addition, “expected degree kai-aikaikai” cannot grasp what percentage of the big hit expectation degree, but in this embodiment, the big hit expectation degree is set to 100%. Furthermore, in “Expectation”, an expectation that is different from the actual jackpot expectation is displayed, but by making it easier to select an expression with a higher “expectation” for a variable display pattern with a higher hit expectation, It can be used as a measure of the level of expectation of jackpot. However, the “expected degree” may be an actual jackpot expectation degree.

  Button notice pattern numbers 13 and 14 are button notice patterns that perform an effect of updating and displaying the comment contents of “Leach! These comment contents are the same as the comment contents displayed in the comment notice patterns of comment notice pattern numbers 14 and 15.

  In addition, a button notice pattern for performing an effect of updating and displaying the comment content of “It's probable!” May be prepared in a balloon from the monster. This comment content is the same as the comment content displayed in the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 15. In the present embodiment, the determination value is assigned to the button notice pattern corresponding to the variation display pattern determined by the main control board 101, and the variation display pattern does not include information on whether or not the probability variation big hit. In addition, it is not possible to select the above-described “probable change!” Button notice pattern corresponding to the variation display pattern. However, for example, a variation display pattern that displays a probable variation jackpot and a variation display pattern that displays a non-probability variation jackpot are set in the variation display pattern table, and a determination value is set in the button notice pattern corresponding to these variation display patterns. In addition to the distribution, when the variable display pattern for displaying the probability variation jackpot is determined, the button notification table may be configured so that the button notification pattern “probability change!” Can be selected. Further, the button notice table may be configured so that the determination value is distributed to the button notice pattern in association with the change display pattern and the game state flag (here, the probability change state flag).

  As shown in FIG. 70, the first button notice table is used for determining a button notice pattern based on the button notice pattern random number acquired in step S264 described above when the advanced notice pattern number 18 is determined. It is a table. In the first button notice table, the value of the button notice pattern random number is assigned to 14 types of button notice patterns of button notice pattern numbers 1 to 14 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the second button notice table is used for determining the button notice pattern based on the button notice pattern random number acquired in step S264 described above when the advanced notice pattern number 20 is determined. It is a table. In the second button notice table, the value of the button notice pattern random number is distributed to 10 kinds of button notice patterns of button notice pattern numbers 5 to 14 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns. That is, the button notice pattern random numbers of the button notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 are not assigned to the button notice pattern random numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the third button notice table is used for determining the button notice pattern based on the button notice pattern random number acquired in step S264 described above when the advanced notice pattern number 21 is determined. It is a table. In the third button notice table, the value of the button notice pattern random number is distributed to nine types of button notice patterns of button notice pattern numbers 5 to 7 and 9 to 14 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns. That is, the button notice pattern random numbers are not assigned to the button notice patterns of button notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 and 8.

  In the first button notice table, the button notice pattern numbers 5 to 15 described above are assigned to the second button notice table and the second notice table only when the reach display pattern is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern. In the three-button notice table, the determination values are allocated so that the above-described button notice pattern numbers 1 to 15 can be selected only when the reach display pattern is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern. It has been. When button comment pattern numbers 5 to 15 provided in the first button notice table are determined and the comment content based on the button notice pattern is displayed when the first operation signal is input, the button notice effect ( The reach form of the decorative symbol is always displayed after the advanced notice effect) is executed. In addition, the comment contents based on the button notice pattern when the third or seventh operation signal is inputted, determined by the button notice pattern numbers 1 to 15 provided in the second button notice table or the third button notice table. Is displayed, the reach form of the decorative symbol is always displayed after the button notice effect (development notice effect) is executed. That is, when the player is requested to repeatedly hit the operation button 38, the reach form of the decorative symbol is always displayed after the button notice effect is executed.

  In the first to third button notice tables, the button notice pattern numbers 12 and 14 can be selected only when a variation display pattern that is a big hit is designated as the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol. Judgment values are distributed. When the comment content based on the button notice table is displayed when the button notice pattern is determined to be the button notice pattern of button notice pattern number 14 and the operation signal is input a predetermined number of times, The comment “Big hit!” Is displayed in the balloon (Step 1), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a non-probable big hit symbol or a big hit symbol after execution of the button notice effect (development type notice effect).

  Further, in the first to third button notice tables, the fluctuation display pattern of “spotlight notice”, “object reach”, “full rotation reach”, the fluctuation display pattern of the fluctuation number 3 in the second button notice table, For the change display patterns, etc., of the change numbers 3, 5, 11, and 17 in the 3-button advance notice table, each of the advanced notice patterns corresponding to the button notice table (any one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 18, 20, and 21) is provided. Is not selected in the daytime background advance notice table or the night background advance notice table, the determination values are not assigned to all button notice patterns.

  In the second button notice table, the determination values are not assigned to the button notice patterns of button notice pattern numbers 1 to 4. Here, the comment contents updated and displayed with the button notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 are the same as the comment contents displayed with the comment notice pattern numbers 1, 2, 4 and 6, and when the comment contents are displayed, Even if the button 38 is operated three times, the user feels that useful information cannot be obtained, and the operation button 38 is not operated in subsequent games. For this reason, the player rewards the effort of operating the operation button 38 three times, and the determination value is assigned only to the button notice patterns of the button notice pattern numbers 5 to 14. Further, more judgment values than the first button notice table are assigned to the button notice patterns of the button notice pattern numbers 12 and 14 for updating and displaying “expectation degree to Ikaikai” and “big hit!”.

  Further, in the third button notice table, the determination value is not assigned to the button notice pattern number 8 in addition to the button notice pattern numbers 1 to 4. Also in this case, since the player rewards the labor of operating the operation button 38 seven times, the third button notice table is used so that information that reduces the expectation that becomes a big hit such as “expected degree 10 Kai” is prevented from appearing. Is configured. In addition, the button notice pattern of button notice pattern numbers 12 and 14 for displaying “expectation degree to Ikaikai” and “big hit!” Has more judgment values than the first button notice table and the second button notice table. It is distributed.

  In addition, the content of the comment “!!” is updated and displayed, and a character body 154 imitating a wolf man, a character body 152 imitating Dracula, and a character body 150 imitating Franken appear in front of the display area 42, respectively. The button notice pattern numbers 5 to 7 are the character effects 150, 150, 150, 150, 150, 150, 150, 150 15, 150, 150, 150, 150, Many determination values are assigned to the variable display pattern for executing the reach effect for causing the characters corresponding to 152 and 154 to appear. For example, when a variation display pattern of variation numbers 5 to 10 for executing the wolf man reach effect is designated, the button notification pattern number of the button notification pattern number 5 for driving and controlling the character body 154 imitating the wolf man is the button notification pattern number. It is easier to select than the 6 and 7 button notice patterns.

  On the other hand, the button notice pattern numbers 5 to 7 have a small amount of determination values assigned to the variable display pattern for executing the reach effect that does not cause the characters corresponding to the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear. For example, when a variation display pattern of variation numbers 5 to 10 for executing the wolf man reach effect is designated, button notice pattern numbers 6 and 7 for driving and controlling the character body 152 imitating Dracula and the character body 150 imitating Franken. The button notice pattern is almost never selected. In this case, a reach different from the reach effect in which the character corresponding to the character body 150, 152, 154 appears after any of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 based on the button notification pattern is driven and controlled in the button notification effect. When the effect is executed, the player feels uncomfortable with the mismatch of characters. However, by making a big hit after executing the button notice effect, the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  The button notice pattern numbers 8 to 11 for updating and displaying the comment contents of “expected degree 10 chi”, “expected degree 30 chi”, “expected degree 50 chi”, and “expected degree 80 chi” are “expected degree”. As the button notice pattern number expressing a higher numerical value, a larger number of determination values are assigned to the variable display pattern having a higher expectation of jackpot. For example, when the change display pattern of the change number 6 is designated, the ratio of selecting the button advance notice pattern of the button advance notice pattern number 11 is {5 (determination assigned to the button advance notice pattern of the button advance notice pattern number 11 Value) / 198 (the total number of judgment values assigned to all button notice patterns)} × 100 = about 2.5%, whereas when the variation display pattern of variation number 10 is designated (10 / 198) × 100 = about 5%. As described above, when the button notice pattern having the button notice pattern numbers 8 to 11 is executed, the comment “expectation” is displayed when the operation button 38 is operated a predetermined number of times, and the player is given the expectation of jackpot expectation. When a comment with a high “expected degree” is displayed, the sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be increased.

  In this embodiment, only when a specific advanced notice (developed notice pattern) is executed, a notice effect such as a comment notice, button notice, intense heat notice, lightning notice, etc. is executed, and a specific branch effect notice is given. While the branching effect presentation notice is executed only when the (branch presentation notice pattern) is executed, the announcement effect such as the mini character notice and the sound output change is performed regardless of these advanced notice, branch effect notice, etc. Executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, advance notice, comment notice, button notice, intense heat notice, lightning notice, branch effect notice, branch effect effect, etc. are executed for the variation display pattern of the big hit rather than the outage. However, in the notice effect such as the mini character notice, the sound output change, etc., it is configured to be easily executed even for the deviation display pattern. As described above, in this embodiment, the ROM 111b mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 has the variable display pattern and the advanced notice pattern (any of the advanced notice patterns of the advanced notice pattern numbers 18, 20, and 21). And a first button notice table, a second button notice table, and a third button notice table as built-in effect determination tables provided according to the above.

  Next, a method for driving the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 will be described. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process, FIG. 75 is a table showing an example of a stepping motor scheduler, and FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of a stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process, and FIG. 79 is an allocation of first excitation data and second excitation data. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the abnormal excitation data clear process, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the excitation data transmission process, and FIG. 82 shows the first excitation data and the second excitation data. Support for sending 83 is a time chart showing the state of various signals in the CPU 111a of the integrated board 111, and FIG. 83 shows the serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i of the first electrical control board 112 when receiving the first excitation data and the second excitation data. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of a stepping motor process. The clockwise rotation of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 when viewed from the output shaft side is CW (abbreviation of Clock Wise), and the counterclockwise rotation is CCW (abbreviation of Counter Clock Wise). . Stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 are four-phase stepping motors and are controlled by a bipolar drive system. This “bipolar drive method” is a method of switching the magnetic field by exciting the coil by switching the polarity of the voltage applied to both ends of the stator coil and changing the direction of the current.

  First, the 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process will be described. When the 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is started, as shown in FIG. 74, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the stepping motor operation inhibition time is 0 (step S300). This stepping motor operation inhibition time (in this embodiment, the stepping operation inhibition time is set to 5.1 s) is a time set at power-on or reset, and within this time, the character body ( (Franken) 150, character body (Dracula) 152, shielding member (Dracula) 166, and character body (Wolf man) 154 are inspected to determine whether or not they are in their original positions. Based on the stepping motor scheduler, stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 are driven and controlled to return to their original positions (hereinafter referred to as “power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization processing”).

  It is executed when the stepping motor operation inhibition time is 0 in step S300, that is, when the power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization process is finished and when the variable display is started, the character body It is determined whether (Franken) 150, character body (Dracula) 152, shielding member (Dracula) 166, and character body (Wolf man) 154 are in their original positions (step S302). This determination is performed in character body (Franken) abnormality determination processing, character body (Dracula) abnormality determination processing, shielding member (Dracula) abnormality determination processing, and character body (wolf man) abnormality determination processing described later. When the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 are in their original positions in step S302, that is, commands transmitted from the main control board 101, that is, The address of the stepping motor scheduler corresponding to the variation number of the variation display pattern is set (step S304).

  This stepping motor scheduler has a plurality of patterns in which the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) are operated by the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155, respectively. Each pattern includes a plurality of pieces of data in which the driving pulse widths, rotation directions, and driving times of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 are set as one set. This data arrangement is stored in advance in the ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111 as a time series data string of data 0, data 1, data 2,..., Data n. For example, as shown in FIG. 75, in the data 0 of the pattern 38, the drive pulse width 4 ms, the rotation direction CW, and the drive time 40 ms of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 are set. Data 0 of this pattern 38 is set as the address of the stepping motor scheduler in step S304 shown in FIG. Since the data 0 of each pattern hits when the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 start driving, the first 10 steps, that is, 40 ms (= 4 ms × 10 steps) are slowed up so as not to step out. Yes.

  Returning to FIG. 74, subsequently, the stepping motor operation flag F is set to 1 (step S306), and this routine is terminated. This stepping motor operation flag F is a flag indicating that the address of the stepping motor scheduler has been set. When the address of the stepping motor scheduler is set, that is, when the pattern is set, the value 1 is set. If not, the value 0 is set.

  On the other hand, when at least one of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 is not in the original position in Step S302, the original position return operation processing is performed. (Step S308), and this routine is finished. This original position return process is a process for returning the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 to their original positions. The returning operation of the shielding member to the original position will be described later. On the other hand, when the stepping motor operation prohibition time is not 0 in step S100, that is, when the power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization process is not finished, this routine is finished as it is.

  Next, a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process and a stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process for setting the address of the stepping motor scheduler that drives the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 will be described. When the 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is started, as shown in FIG. 76, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether the power is on or reset (step S310). When the power is turned on or reset, a stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process described later is performed (step S312), the stepping motor operation inhibition time is set to 5.1 s (step S314), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization process is performed within the stepping motor operation inhibition time (5.1 s).

  On the other hand, when the power is not turned on or reset in step S310, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor operation inhibition time is 0, that is, whether or not the power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization process is finished (step S316). When the stepping motor operation inhibition time is 0, that is, when the power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization process is completed, a stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process described later is performed (step S318), and this routine is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the stepping motor operation inhibition time is not 0 in step S116, that is, when the power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization process is not completed, this routine is terminated as it is.

  Note that the stepping motor operation prohibition time set in step S314 is subtracted by the internal timer of the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated substrate 111, and then becomes 0.

  Next, when the stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process is started, as shown in FIG. 77, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the stepping motor operation flag F is a value 1, that is, the address of the stepping motor scheduler. Is set (step S320). When the stepping motor operation flag F is a value 1, that is, when the address of the stepping motor scheduler is set, the stepping motor operation flag F is set to the value 0, that is, the address of the stepping motor scheduler is not set ( In step S322), a stepping motor scheduler pattern is set (step S324), and this routine is terminated. The stepping motor scheduler pattern is set by setting the stepping motor scheduler address (for example, data 0 of pattern 38 shown in FIG. 75) set in step S304 of the 16 ms stepping motor scheduler starting process shown in FIG. Set as a pattern. On the other hand, when the stepping motor operation flag F is 0 in step S320, that is, when the pattern is not set, this routine is finished as it is.

  In step S322, the stepping motor operation flag F is set to 0. This is because the setting of the stepping motor scheduler pattern in step S324 is performed only once. The actual progress of the stepping motor scheduler pattern is performed by a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process described later. Further, next time the stepping motor operation flag F is set to 1, that is, the address of the stepping motor scheduler is newly set. Until this routine is executed, the address of the stepping motor scheduler set in the stepping motor scheduler pattern in step S324 is the sub address. It is stored in the RAM 111c of the integrated substrate 111.

  Next, a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process in which the stepping motor scheduler pattern is advanced will be described. When the 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process is started, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the driving time has ended as shown in FIG. 78 (step S330). This determination is made based on whether or not the elapsed time set in the stepping motor scheduler pattern has elapsed. Specifically, for example, the elapsed time 40 ms set by the data 0 of the pattern 38 shown in FIG. When the drive time has elapsed in step S330, the stepping motor scheduler pattern is advanced by one (for example, data 0 is advanced from data 0 of pattern 38 shown in FIG. 75, step S332), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the drive time has not elapsed in step S330, this routine is ended as it is.

  Next, excitation data creation processing for creating ON / OFF data of excitation signals of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, 155 will be described. When this excitation data creation processing is started, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111, based on the above-described stepping motor scheduler pattern, the first excitation data and the stepping data as ON / OFF data of the excitation signals of the stepping motors 150h and 153f. Second excitation data is created as ON / OFF data of excitation signals of the motors 152h and 155. The first excitation data and the second excitation data are information of 1 byte, that is, 8 bits, respectively, and ON / OFF data of the excitation signal of the stepping motor that is driven by the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are allocated, respectively. It consists of ON / OFF data of excitation signals that drive a total of two stepping motors. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79A, the upper 4 bits D7, D6, D5, and D4 of the first excitation data include SM1-4, SM1-3, and SM1- as excitation signals of the stepping motor 150h. 2 and SM1-1 are allocated to the lower 4 bits D3, D2, D1, and D0 of the first excitation data, respectively, as SM2-4, SM2-3, SM2-2, and SM2 as excitation signals of the stepping motor 153f. -1 is allocated. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the upper 4 bits D7 ′, D6 ′, D5 ′, D4 ′ of the second excitation data include SM3-4, SM3-3, SM3 as excitation signals of the stepping motor 152h. -2, SM3-1 are allocated, respectively, while SM4-4, SM4-3, and SM4-4 as excitation signals of the stepping motor 155 are assigned to the lower 4 bits D3 ', D2', D1 ', D0' of the second excitation data. SM4-2 and SM4-1 are allocated respectively. In the figure, MSB (abbreviation of Most Significant Bit) represents the most significant bit, which is D7 in the first excitation data in FIG. 79A and D7 ′ in the second excitation data in FIG. 79B. LSB (abbreviation of least significant bit) represents the least significant bit, which is D0 in the first excitation data in FIG. 79A and D0 ′ in the second excitation data in FIG. 79B.

  Next, excitation signals of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 when abnormality occurs in the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154. Excitation data clear processing at the time of abnormality for clearing ON / OFF data will be described.

  When the abnormal excitation data clear process is started, as shown in FIG. 80, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 has a character body (Franken) 150, a character body (Dracula) 152, a shielding member (Dracula) 166, a character It is determined whether or not the body (wolf man) 154 is in a normal state (step S340). This determination is based on a character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 set in a character body (Franken) abnormality determination process, which will be described later, and a character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-, which is set in a character body (Dracula) abnormality determination process. MS2, shielding member (dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3 set in the shielding member (dracula) abnormality determination processing, character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 set in the character body (wolf man) abnormality determination processing The value 0 is set as the normal state and the value 1 is set as the abnormal state. In step S140, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1, the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2, the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3, and the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 are all values. When it is 0, that is, when the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 are all in a normal state, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S140, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1, the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2, the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3, and the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 are displayed. When at least one of them is 1, that is, when at least one of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 is in an abnormal state, A value 0 is set in each of the first excitation data (D0 to D7) shown in FIG. 79A and the second excitation data (D0 ′ to D7 ′) shown in FIG. 79B (step S342). This routine ends.

  In step S342, since the first excitation data and the second excitation data are set to the value 0, the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, 155 do not rotate. For this reason, the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 do not operate. Specifically, by setting a value 0 to the upper 4 bits D7, D6, D5, and D4 of the first excitation data, each phase coil (φ1, φ2, φ3, φ4 of the stepping motor 150 by the drive circuit unit 112j. ) Is stopped and the stepping motor 150 does not rotate. For this reason, the character body (Franken) 150 does not operate. Also, the drive circuit section is set by setting the value 0 to the lower 4 bits D3, D2, D1, D0 of the first excitation data and the upper 4 bits D7 ', D6', D5 ', D4' of the second excitation data. Switching of excitation current to each phase coil (φ1, φ2, φ3, φ4) of stepping motor 153f by 112k and each phase coil (φ1, φ2, φ3, φ4) of stepping motor 152h by drive circuit unit 112m is stopped. Thus, the stepping motors 153f and 152h do not rotate. For this reason, the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 do not operate. Further, when the value 0 is set in the lower 4 bits D3 ′, D2 ′, D1 ′, D0 ′ of the second excitation data, each phase coil (φ1, φ2, φ3, φ) of the stepping motor 155 by the drive circuit unit 112n. Switching of the excitation current is stopped with respect to φ4), and the stepping motor 155 does not rotate. For this reason, the character body (wolf man) 154 does not operate.

  Next, excitation data transmission processing for transmitting excitation data of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, 155 will be described. When this excitation data transmission process is started, the arithmetic processing unit 111aac in the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the transmission permission bit Te is a value 1 as shown in FIG. 81 (step S360). . The transmission permission bit Te has a transmission permission state for permitting transmission to the outside and a transmission prohibition state for prohibiting transmission to the outside. A value 1 is set as the transmission permission state and a value 0 is set as the transmission prohibition state. ing. When the transmission permission bit Te is 1 in step S360, that is, when the transmission permission state is set, it is determined whether or not both the transmission buffer empty flag Tb and the transmission register empty flag Tr are 1 (step S362). This transmission buffer empty flag Tb is a flag indicating whether or not there is transmission data in the transmission buffer register 111asb. The transmission buffer register 111asb has a value of 1 and no transmission data exists in the transmission buffer register 111asb. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, the transmission register empty flag Tr is a flag indicating whether or not there is transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr. When there is no transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr, the transmission register 111asr has the value 1 as transmission completion. When there is transmission data being transmitted, the value 0 is set as being transmitted. When the transmission data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr, the transmission buffer empty flag Tb rises (values up) from the value 0 to the value 1, that is, there is no transmission data of the transmission buffer register 111asb. Become. At this time, the transmission register empty flag Tr falls from the value 1 to the value 0 (down edge), that is, transmission is in progress.

  When both the transmission buffer empty flag Tb and the transmission register empty flag Tr are 1 in step S362, that is, there is no transmission data in the transmission buffer register 111asb, and there is no transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr. The second excitation data is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb (step S364), the second excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr (step S366), and whether or not the transmission buffer empty flag Tb is 1 is determined. Determination is made (step S368). This determination is made based on whether the transmission buffer empty flag Tb has risen, that is, whether or not all the second excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb has been transferred to the transmission register 111asr. When the transmission buffer empty flag Tb is not the value 1 in step S368, that is, when all the second excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is not transferred to the transmission register 111asr, the process waits as it is, while the transmission buffer empty flag Tb has the value 1 In other words, that is, when all the second excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr, the first excitation data is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb (step S370). At this time, the second excitation data transferred to the transmission register 111asr is transmitted to the first electrical control board 112 via the level converter 111e in synchronization with the transfer clock SM-CLK from the transmission controller 111asc. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the transmission register empty flag Tr is 1 (step S372). This determination is made based on whether the transmission register empty flag Tr has risen, that is, whether transmission of the second excitation data in the transmission register 111asr has been completed.

  When the transmission register empty flag Tr is not 1 in step S372, that is, when the transmission of the second excitation data in the transmission register 111asr has not been completed, the process waits as it is. When the transmission of the second excitation data of the transmission register 111asr is completed, the first excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr (step S374), and it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer empty flag Tb is a value 1 (step S374). Step S376). When the transmission buffer empty flag Tb is not a value 1, that is, when all the first excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is not transferred to the transmission register 111asr, the process waits as it is, while the transmission buffer empty flag Tb is a value 1. That is, when all the first excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr, this routine is finished. Thereafter, the first excitation data is transmitted to the first electrical control board 112 via the level converter 111e in synchronization with the transfer clock SM-CLK from the transmission controller 111asc. On the other hand, when the transmission permission bit Te is 0 in step S360, that is, when the transmission is prohibited, or when both the transmission buffer empty flag Tb and the transmission register empty flag Tr are 0 in step S362, that is, the transmission buffer register. If there is transmission data in 111asb and there is transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr, this routine is terminated as it is.

  When transmitting the first excitation data and the second excitation data to the first electrical control board 112 in the excitation data transmission process described above, the ON / OFF of the 8-bit excitation signal of the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, respectively. This is done by shifting the OFF data to the right bit by bit, and the lamp integrated board in order from the ON / OFF data of the least significant bit (LSB) excitation signal to the ON / OFF data of the most significant bit (MSB) excitation signal. 112. Specifically, in the first excitation data shown in FIG. 79A, D0, D1,..., D4,..., D7, that is, SM2-1, SM2-2,. 1,..., SM1-4 are transmitted bit by bit to the first electrical control board 112 in order, and in the second excitation data shown in FIG. 79 (b), D0 ′, D1 ′,. ,..., D7 ', that is, SM4-1, SM4-2,..., SM3-1,.

  Next, each signal in the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated substrate 111 when the excitation data transmission process is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, when the excitation data transmission process is started, the transmission permission bit Te shown in FIG. 82B is 1 (step S360 of the excitation data transmission process shown in FIG. 81), and FIG. ) And the transmission register empty flag Tr shown in FIG. 82 (f) are both 1 (excitation data transmission processing step S362 shown in FIG. 81, timing T1), the second excitation. Data is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb, and the transmission buffer empty flag Tb falls from the value 1 to the value 0 (down-edge) (step S364 of excitation data transmission processing shown in FIG. 81, timing T2). Subsequently, the second excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr (step S366 of the excitation data transmission process shown in FIG. 81) and waits until the transfer is completed (excitation data transmission process shown in FIG. 81). Step S368), when the transfer is completed, the transmission buffer empty flag Tb rises from 0 to 1 (up edge, timing T3). At this time, the transfer clock SM-CLK shown in FIG. 82 (d) is generated, the transmission register empty flag Tr goes down, and the transmission register 111asr changes from LSB to MSB, that is, 1 bit in order from D0 ′ to D7 ′. Second excitation data (excitation data SM-DAT shown in FIG. 82 (e)) is transmitted one by one.

  Subsequently, the first excitation data is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb, and the transmission buffer empty flag Tb goes down (step S170 in the excitation data transmission process shown in FIG. 81, timing T4). Subsequently, the process waits until the transmission register empty flag Tr has a value of 1, that is, transmission of the second excitation data is completed (step S372 in the excitation data transmission process shown in FIG. 81). When transmission is completed, the transmission register empty flag Tr rises, and the first excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr (step S374 in the excitation data transmission process shown in FIG. 81), and waits until the transfer is completed. (Step S376 of the excitation data transmission process shown in FIG. 81). When the transfer is completed, the transmission buffer empty flag Tb rises (timing T5). At this time, the transmission register empty flag Tr goes down, and the second excitation data is followed by the first excitation data (FIG. 82 (e)) from the LSB to the MSB of the transmission register 111asr, that is, from D0 to D7. Excitation data SM-DAT) shown in FIG. When transmission is completed, the transmission register empty flag Tr rises.

  The transmission permission bit Te is set to a value of 1, that is, a transmission permission state before the excitation data transmission process is started. Here, the transmission permission bit Te is set to the value 0 (timing T6) during the transfer of the first excitation data, that is, the transmission prohibited state, but actually the transmission prohibited state is set after the transmission of the first excitation data is completed. . In this embodiment, the transfer clock SM-CLK is set to 250 kHz, and one period is 4 μs, and the clock pulse width Tc is 2 μs. The transfer rate of the excitation data SM-DAT synchronized with the transfer clock SM-CLK is 250 kbps (which is an abbreviation for bit per second and represents the number of bits transferred per second). Since the first excitation data and the second excitation data are each 1-byte information, the total is 2 bytes, that is, 16 bits, and the transmission time performed in the excitation data transmission process is 16 bits × 4 μs = 64 μs. . Thereby, the transmission of the first excitation data and the second excitation data is performed by the latch signal SM-LAT shown in FIG. 82A as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process in step S260 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It will be completed before it is latched.

  Next, processing in the serial / parallel conversion units 112h and 112i of the first electrical decoration control board 112 will be described. The first excitation data and the second excitation data transmitted from the sub-integrated board 111 are synchronized with the transfer clock SM-CLK shown in FIG. 83 (b) as the excitation data SM-DAT shown in FIG. 83 (c). The second excitation data passes through the shift register 112hs of the serial / parallel conversion unit 112h of the first electrical control board 112 and is shifted to the shift register 112is of the serial / parallel conversion unit 112i, and the first excitation data is converted to the serial / parallel conversion unit 112h. Shift register 112hs. The first excitation data and the second excitation data transmitted to the shift register 112hs and the shift register 112is by being latched by the above-described latch signal SM-LAT (see FIG. 83A) are stored in the storage register 112ht and the storage register. The data is transferred to 112it at a time. The transferred first excitation data and second excitation data are output to the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, and 112n as excitation signals, respectively. Specifically, the second ON / OFF data of the excitation signals SM3-4 to SM3-1 and SM4-4 to SM4-1 shown in FIGS. 83 (m) to (p) and (q) to (t) is used. Excitation data D7 ′ to D4 ′ and D3 ′ to D0 ′ are output to the drive circuit units 112m and 112n, respectively, and SM1-4 to SM1 shown in FIGS. 83 (d) to (g) and (h) to (k). The first excitation data D7 to D4 and D3 to D0 are output to the drive circuit units 112j and 112k as ON / OFF data of the excitation signals of -1, SM2-4 to SM2-1, respectively. Drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 is performed by the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, and 112n in accordance with the excitation signals, respectively, and a CW or CCW rotational motion is obtained. Here, the ON / OFF data D0 to D7 and D0 ′ to D7 ′ of the excitation signals indicated by the wavy lines in FIGS. 83D to 83T are latched to the latch signal SM-LAT in the previous time (2 ms before). The ON / OFF data D0 to D7 and D0 ′ to D7 ′ of the excitation signal indicated by the solid line are latched this time.

  In this embodiment, the latch signal SM-LAT is set to 3 μs, which is larger than the above-described clock pulse width Tc, as the latch signal width. At this time, the first excitation data and the second excitation data transmitted to the shift register 112hs and the shift register 112is are respectively transferred to the storage register 112ht and the storage register 112it at a time.

  Next, when the stepping motor process is started, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 performs a 2 ms timer batch subtraction process as shown in FIG. 84 (step S380). This 2 ms timer batch subtraction process is a process of subtracting the driving time of the stepping motor scheduler pattern by 2 ms. For example, the data 0 of the pattern 38 shown in FIG. 75 is subtracted every time this 2 ms timer batch subtraction process is performed, ie, the drive time of 40 ms to 2 ms, 38 ms, 36 ms,. Subsequently, a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is performed (step S382). As described with reference to FIG. 77, the 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is a process of setting the address of the stepping motor scheduler that drives the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155. Subsequently, a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process is performed (step S184). This 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process is a process of advancing the stepping motor scheduler pattern as described with reference to FIG. Subsequently, excitation data initialization processing is performed (step S386). This excitation data initialization process is a process for initializing the first excitation data and the second excitation data and setting each value 0 as an initial value. Subsequently, excitation data creation processing is performed (step S388). This excitation data creation processing is processing for creating first excitation data and second excitation data based on the stepping motor scheduler pattern as described with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, an abnormal excitation data clear process is performed (step S190). In the abnormal excitation data clear process, as described with reference to FIG. 80, an abnormality occurred in the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154. Is a process of setting the value 0 to the ON / OFF data of the excitation signals of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, 155 at the time. Subsequently, excitation data transmission processing is performed (step S192). As described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the excitation data transmission process is a process of transmitting the excitation data of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155. The stepping motors 150h, 153f, and 152h are transmitted by the transmitted excitation data. , 155 drive control is performed, resulting in CW or CCW rotational motion. This stepping motor process is performed as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process in step S60 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Next, the abnormality determination of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 will be described. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the character body (Franken) abnormality determination process, FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the character body (Dracula) abnormality determination process, and FIG. 87 shows the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality determination process. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of character body (wolf man) abnormality determination processing. For convenience of explaining the outline of the process, each of these processes is performed as one process of 16 ms steady process in step S248 of the reset process shown in FIG. 35 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This flowchart is combined with the process performed as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process in step S260. For example, in step S408 of the character body (franken) abnormality determination process described later, the stepping motor 150h is set to CCW for 60 steps, but actually, the 2ms timer interrupt process of step S260 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Each time it is done, it is CCWed one step at a time. Each of these processes is performed every time a variation number of the variation display pattern shown in FIG. 32 (for example, an accessory reach of the variation number 32) is transmitted as a command from the main control substrate 101 to the sub integrated substrate 111.

  Next, when the character body (Franken) abnormality determination process is started, as shown in FIG. 85, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the character body (Franken) 150 is in the original position ( Step S400). This determination is made based on whether or not the reference plate 150m is detected by the photosensor 150n. Specifically, a state in which the reference plate 150m is in the recess of the photosensor 150n is detected as a state in which the character body (franken) 150 is in the original position, while the reference plate 150m is in the recess of the photosensor 150n. No state is detected as a state where the character body (Franken) 150 is not in the original position. When the character body (Franken) 150 is in the original position in step S400, that is, when the reference plate 150m is in the recess of the photosensor 150n, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is set to 0. (Step S402), and this routine is finished. This character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is a flag indicating whether or not the reference plate 150m is in a state where it is in the recess of the photosensor 150n, and the reference plate 150m is set in the recess of the photosensor 150n. The value 0 is set as the normal state of the character body (Franken) 150 and the value 1 is set as the abnormal state of the character body (Franken) 150 when the reference plate 150m is not in the recess of the photosensor 150n. Yes.

  Here, as described above, the character body (Franken) 150 causes the character body (Franken) 150 to appear on the front side of the display area 42 by rotating the stepping motor 150 in CW, that is, clockwise. By rotating the motor 150 CCW, that is, counterclockwise, the character body (franken) 150 returns to the original position. For this reason, when the character body (Franken) 150 is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by CCWing the stepping motor 150h (referred to as “original position return processing (Franken)”).

  On the other hand, when the character body (franken) 150 is not in the original position in step S400, that is, when the reference plate 150m is not in the recess of the photosensor 150n, the reference plate 150m is set in the recess of the photosensor 150n. As a return operation, the stepping motor 150h is caused to perform one step CCW (step S404).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the edge of the reference plate 150m is detected (step S406). This determination is performed based on the history that the photo sensor 150n detects the edge of the reference plate 150m. Specifically, for example, when the photo sensor 150n continuously detects the edge of the reference plate 150m three times, it is determined that the character body (Franken) 150 is in a state of returning to the original position, while the photo sensor 150n When the edge of the reference plate 150m is not detected three times in succession, it is determined that the character body (franken) 150 is not in a state of returning to the original position. When the edge of the character body (Franken) 150 is detected in Step S406, that is, when the character body (Franken) 150 is in the state of returning to the original position, the stepping motor 150h is CCWed by 60 steps (Step S408). This rotation is performed to finely adjust the character body (franken) 150 to the original position by rotating the stepping motor 150h.

  Subsequently, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is set to 0 (step S402), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the edge of the reference plate 150m is not detected in step S406, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 150h has rotated more than N1 steps (step S410). Here, the N1 step is the number of steps (for example, 483 steps) when the stepping motor 150h makes one rotation. When the stepping motor 150h has rotated N1 steps or more in step S410, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is set to 1 (step S412), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the stepping motor 150h has not rotated more than N1 steps in step S410, the process returns to step S204 to cause the stepping motor 150h to perform one step CCW, and until the edge of the reference plate 150m is detected in step S406 or step S410. In step S404, step S406, and step S410 are sequentially repeated until the stepping motor 150h rotates N1 steps or more.

  In this character body (Franken) abnormality determination process, when the detection signal from the photosensor 150n does not exist for a predetermined time, the driving of the stepping motor 150h is stopped as an abnormality.

  Note that the processing sequentially performed with Step S400 and Step S402 is performed as one of the 16 ms steady processing of Step S248 of the reset processing illustrated in FIG. 35, and is sequentially performed with Step S404, Step S406, Step S408, and Step S402. Step S404, Step S406, Step S410, and Step S412 are sequentially performed as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process in Step S260 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Next, when the character body (Dracula) abnormality determination process is started, as shown in FIG. 86, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the character body (Dracula) 152 is in the original position ( Step S420). This determination is made based on whether or not the reference plate 153m is detected by the photosensor 153n. Specifically, a state in which the reference plate 153m is in the recess of the photosensor 153n is detected as a state in which the character body (Dracula) 152 is in the original position, while the reference plate 153m is in the recess of the photosensor 153n. No state is detected as a state where the character body (Dracula) 152 is not in the original position. When the character body (Dracula) 152 is in the original position in step S420, that is, when the reference plate 153m is in the recess of the photosensor 153n, the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2 is set to 0. (Step S422), this routine is finished. This character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2 is a flag that indicates whether or not the reference plate 153m is in the recess of the photosensor 153n. The reference plate 153m is in the recess of the photosensor 153n. The value 0 is set as the normal state of the character body (Dracula) 152, and the value 1 is set as the abnormal state of the character body (Dracula) 152 when the reference plate 153m is not in the recess of the photosensor 153n. Yes.

  Here, as described above, the character body (Dracula) 152 causes the character body (Dracula) 152 to appear on the front side of the display area 42 by rotating the stepping motor 153f once by CW, and returns to the original position. Become. For this reason, when the character body (Dracula) 152 is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by CWing the stepping motor 153f (referred to as “original position return processing (character body (Dracula))”).

  On the other hand, when the character body (Dracula) 152 is not in the original position in step S420, that is, when the reference plate 153m is not in the recess of the photosensor 153n, the reference plate 153m is set in the recess of the photosensor 153n. As a return operation, the stepping motor 153f is caused to perform one step CW (step S424).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the edge of the reference plate 153m has been detected (step S426). This determination is made based on the history of the photosensor 153n detecting the edge of the reference plate 153m. Specifically, for example, when the photosensor 153n continuously detects the edge of the reference plate 153m three times, it is determined that the character body (Dracula) 152 is in a state of returning to the original position, while the photosensor 153n When the edge of the reference plate 153m is not detected three times in succession, it is determined that the character body (Dracula) 152 is not in a state of returning to the original position. When the edge of the character body (Dracula) 152 is detected in Step S426, that is, when the character body (Dracula) 152 is in the state of returning to the original position, the stepping motor 153f is CWed by 78 steps (Step S428). This rotation is performed to finely adjust the character body (Dracula) 152 to the original position by rotating the stepping motor 153f.

  Subsequently, the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2 is set to 0 (step S422), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the edge of the reference plate 153m is not detected in step S426, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 153f has rotated N2 steps or more (step S430). Here, the N2 step is the number of steps when the stepping motor 153f makes two rotations (for example, if one rotation is 483 steps, two rotations are 483 × 2 steps). When the stepping motor 153f rotates N2 steps or more in step S430, the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2 is set to 1 (step S432), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the stepping motor 153f has not rotated more than N2 steps in step S430, the process returns to step S424, the stepping motor 153f is caused to perform one step CW, and until the edge of the reference plate 153m is detected in step S426 or step S430. In step S424, step S426, and step S430 are sequentially repeated until the stepping motor 153f rotates N2 steps or more.

  In this character body (Dracula) abnormality determination process, when there is no detection signal from the photosensor 153n for a certain time, the driving of the stepping motor 153f is stopped as an abnormality.

  Note that the processing that is sequentially performed with step S420 and step S422 is performed as one of the 16 ms steady processing of step S248 of the reset processing illustrated in FIG. 35, and is sequentially performed with step S424, step S426, step S428, and step S422. Step S424, step S426, step S430, and step S432 are sequentially performed as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process in step S260 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Next, when the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality determination process is started, as shown in FIG. 87, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is in the original position ( Step S440). This determination is made based on whether or not the reference plate 152m is detected by the photosensor 152n. Specifically, the state in which the reference plate 152m is in the recess of the photosensor 152n is detected as the state in which the shielding member (dracula) 166 is in the original position, while the reference plate 152m is in the recess of the photosensor 152n. The state where the shielding member (dracula) 166 is not in the original position is detected. When the shielding member (dracula) 166 is in the original position in step S440, that is, when the reference plate 152m is in the recess of the photosensor 152n, the shielding member (dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3 is set to 0. (Step S442), and this routine is finished. This shielding member (dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3 is a flag indicating whether or not the reference plate 152m is in a state of being accommodated in the recess of the photosensor 152n, and the reference plate 152m is accommodated in the recess of the photosensor 152n. The state where the shielding member (dracula) 166 is normal is set to the value 0, while the state where the reference plate 152m is not in the recess of the photosensor 152n is set to the abnormal state of the shielding member (dracula) 166 and the value 1 is set. Yes.

  Here, as described above, the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is an operation in which the shielding member (Dracula) 166 appears on the front side of the display area 42 by rotating the stepping motor 152h once by CW and returns to the original position. Become. For this reason, when the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by CWing the stepping motor 152h (referred to as “original position return processing (shielding member (Dracula))”).

  On the other hand, when the shielding member (dracula) 166 is not in the original position in step S240, that is, when the reference plate 152m is not in the recess of the photosensor 152n, the reference plate 152m is set in the recess of the photosensor 152n. As a return operation, the stepping motor 152h is caused to perform one step CW (step S444).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the edge of the reference plate 152m has been detected (step S446). This determination is made based on the history of the photo sensor 152n detecting the edge of the reference plate 152m. Specifically, for example, when the photo sensor 152n continuously detects the edge of the reference plate 152m three times, it is determined that the shielding member (dracula) 166 is in the state of returning to the original position, while the photo sensor 152n When the edge of the reference plate 152m is not detected three times in succession, it is determined that the shielding member (dracula) 166 is not in a state of returning to the original position. When the edge of the reference plate 152m is detected in step S446, that is, when the shielding member (dracula) 166 returns to the original position, the stepping motor 152h is CWed by 27 steps (step S448). This rotation is performed to finely adjust the shielding member (dracula) 166 to the original position by rotating the stepping motor 152h.

  Subsequently, the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3 is set to 0 (step S442), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the edge of the reference plate 152m is not detected in step S446, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 152h has rotated N3 steps or more (step S450). Here, the N3 step is the number of steps when the stepping motor 152h makes two rotations (for example, if one rotation is 483 steps, two rotations are 483 × 2 steps). When the stepping motor 152h has rotated N3 steps or more in step S450, the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3 is set to 1 (step S452), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the stepping motor 152h has not rotated N3 steps or more in step S450, the process returns to step S444, and the stepping motor 152h is caused to perform one step CW, and until the edge of the reference plate 152m is detected in step S446 or step S450. In step S444, step S446 and step S450 are sequentially repeated until the stepping motor 152h rotates N3 steps or more.

  In this shielding member (dracula) abnormality determination process, when there is no detection signal from the photosensor 152n for a predetermined time, the driving of the stepping motor 152h is stopped as an abnormality.

  Note that the processing sequentially performed with step S440 and step S442 is performed as one process of 16 ms steady processing of step S248 of the reset processing illustrated in FIG. 35, and is sequentially performed with step S444, step S446, step S448, and step S442. The process that is performed in sequence with steps S444, S446, S450, and S452 is performed as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process of step S260 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Next, when the character body (wolf man) abnormality determination process is started, as shown in FIG. 88, the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the character body (wolf man) 154 is in the original position. (Step S460). This determination is made based on whether or not the reference plate 154m is detected by the photosensor 154n. Specifically, the state in which the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n is detected as the character body (wolf man) 154 is in the original position, while the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n. A state where the character body (wolf man) 154 is not in the original position is detected. When the character body (wolf man) 154 is in the original position in step S460, that is, when the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n, the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 has a value of 0. Is set (step S462), and this routine is terminated. This character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 is a flag indicating whether or not the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n, and the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n. The state where the character body (wolf man) 154 is normal is the value 0, while the state where the reference plate 154m is not in the recess of the photosensor 154n is the abnormal state of the character body (wolf man) 154. Is set.

  Here, as described above, the character body (wolf man) 154 causes the character body (wolf man) 154 to appear on the front side of the display area 42 by rotating the stepping motor 155 once by CW, and returns to the original position. It becomes operation. For this reason, when the character body (wolf man) 154 is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by causing the stepping motor 155 to CW (referred to as “original position return process (wolf man)”).

  On the other hand, when the character body (wolf man) 154 is not in the original position in step S460, that is, when the reference plate 154m is not in the recess of the photosensor 154n, the reference plate 154m is set in the recess of the photosensor 154n. As a return operation, the stepping motor 155 is caused to perform one step CW (step S464).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the edge of the reference plate 154m has been detected (step S466). This determination is made based on the history that the photo sensor 154n has detected the edge of the reference plate 154m. Specifically, for example, when the photo sensor 154n continuously detects the edge of the reference plate 154m three times, it is determined that the character body (wolf man) 154 is in a state of returning to the original position, while the photo sensor 154n When the edge of the reference plate 154m is not detected three times in succession, it is determined that the character body (wolf man) 154 is not in a state of returning to the original position. When the edge of the reference plate 154m is detected in step S466, that is, when the character body (wolf man) 154 returns to the original position, the stepping motor 155 is CWed by 46 steps (step S468). This rotation is performed to finely adjust the character body (wolf man) 154 to the original position by rotating the stepping motor 155.

  Subsequently, the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 is set to 0 (step S462), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the edge of the reference plate 154m is not detected in step S466, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 155 has rotated N4 steps or more (step S470). Here, the N4 step is the number of steps when the stepping motor 155 rotates twice (for example, if it is 483 steps in one rotation, it is 483 × 2 steps in two rotations). When the stepping motor 155 rotates N4 steps or more in step S470, the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 is set to 1 (step S472), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the stepping motor 155 has not rotated N4 steps or more in step S470, the process returns to step S464, the stepping motor 155 is caused to perform one step CW, and until the edge of the reference plate 154m is detected in step S466 or step S470. In step S464, step S466, and step S470 are sequentially repeated until the stepping motor 155 rotates N4 steps or more.

  In this character body (wolf man) abnormality determination process, when the detection signal from the photosensor 154n does not exist for a predetermined time, the driving of the stepping motor 155 is stopped as an abnormality.

  Note that the processing sequentially performed with step S460 and step S462 is performed as one process of 16 ms steady processing of step S248 of the reset processing illustrated in FIG. 35, and is sequentially performed with step S464, step S466, step S468, and step S462. Step S464, step S466, step S470, and step S472 are sequentially performed as a process of 2 ms timer interrupt processing in step S260 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

  Next, the rendering operation of the liquid crystal display 116 accompanying the variation display of the decorative design will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 103 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects produced by the liquid crystal display.

  First, a variation display example of the decorative design will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation display pattern of variation number 1 in which the jackpot determination random number is an outlier in the above-described jackpot determination process and is not accompanied by a reach mode. The CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 receives information such as the variable display pattern, the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the stop symbol selected so that the right decorative symbol 80c is different from each other. Transmit to the control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 describes the process of effect display control executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data is selected, and control of decorative symbols and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is started in a semi-transparent display mode so that the background image (daytime background image 81) can be seen based on the selected process data (FIG. 89A). At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c change rapidly from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 (the moving speed is faster than the process in which each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Fluctuation) is displayed. Further, the decorative pattern 80b in the middle is variably displayed in an opaque display mode rather than a semi-transparent display mode.

  Then, after the predetermined time elapses based on the process data, the left decorative pattern 80a of the left and right decorative patterns 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed, and the display gradually changes from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation display. The display is changed from translucent to an opaque display mode in which the background image (daytime background image 81) cannot be seen through (FIG. 89B). Then, the left decorative design 80a stops and displays the designated stop design (“7” is illustrated in FIG. 89) (FIG. 89C).

  Similarly to the left decorative design 80a, the right decorative design 80c is changed from a high-speed change to a low-speed change display in a process in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. To an opaque display mode. Then, the right decorative design 80c stops and displays a stop design ("6" is illustrated in FIG. 89) designated to be different from the left decorative design 80a (FIG. 89D).

  Next, an example of the advanced notice effect and the comment notice effect for displaying the character images 70 to 74 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the advanced notice effect of the advance notice pattern number 12 and the comment notice effect of the comment notice pattern number 14 described above. If the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 12 and the comment notice effect of the comment notice pattern number 14 as a part thereof, the above-mentioned As described above, the control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 corresponding to the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 12 and the comment notice pattern number 14 are selected and the variable display pattern is selected. The information such as the advanced notice pattern number 12, the comment notice pattern number 14, and the stop symbol is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113. Also, a timer set in the control data is started on the sub-integrated board 111. This timer synchronizes with the image display control executed on the basis of the process data selected on the second electrical control board 113, the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, and This is for performing lighting control of the decoration lamp 49 and sound control of the sound wave device 115.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 displays in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 12, and the comment notice pattern number 14 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Then, process data describing a process of effect display control to be executed is selected, and control of the decorative design, the above-described character image display, and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the display of variation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data (FIG. 90 (A)).

  Then, the balloon 78 (effect area) from the monster is displayed on the display area 42 based on the process data (FIG. 90B). Note that the one-step step 1 described above is a display control of the balloon 78 from the monster from the state where only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed in the display area 42. FIG. This is the state of (C), and the stage is changed from the 0 stage where only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is controlled to the 1 stage where the balloon 78 from the monster is controlled. It is a developed state.

  Note that a comment sentence 77 (comment content) of “It is a big hit!” Is displayed and controlled on the balloon 78 from the monster-kun whose display is controlled in the display area 42 based on the process data. In addition, voice control of the sound wave device 115 is performed in synchronization with the display control of the comment content, and the comment content (“big hit!”) Is output as a voice. As described above, the comment notice effect is executed as a part of the advanced notice effect (step 1 in one step).

  As shown in FIG. 90B, the balloon 78 from the monster is composed of an area ratio of about 40% with respect to the display area 42 (50% in the vertical direction and 80% in the horizontal direction). The outlet is directed toward the mouth of a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy. By controlling the display of the comment content “Big hit!” In the balloon 78 from the monster and outputting it as a voice, it is possible to give an impression as if the monster is talking to the player. Further, the balloon 78 from the monster is based on white, and the content of the comment controlled to be displayed inside the balloon is made to stand out with respect to the balloon by surrounding it with yellow characters in black. . Furthermore, the character string of the comment content is displayed in a balloon with a limit of 10 characters per line in the left-right direction, and the character number of the comment content is displayed to the player by displaying it over two lines for more characters. It can be clearly recognized.

  Then, display control of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man based on the process data is performed in the display area 42 (FIG. 90C). The above-mentioned one-step step 1 is the display control of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man from the state where only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed on the display area 42. FIG. 90C shows a state in which only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled, and the character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed in one step. It is a state where the stage has been developed.

  After the display control of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man in FIG. 90C, the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed (FIG. 90D). This state is the above-described two-stage step 2, and the stage has been developed from the first stage in which the character image 71 imitating the wolf man is controlled to the second stage in which the character image 72 imitating the dracula is controlled. State.

  90C and 90D, display control of all mini character images 90 to 93 is performed in the display area 42 based on the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 11. In this case, two types of notice effects are simultaneously executed so that the character images 70 to 74 are displayed by the advanced notice effect and the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed in the display area 42 by the mini character notice effect. . Therefore, it is possible to make the notice effect more lively than to execute only one of the advanced notice effect and the mini character notice effect, and the game does not become monotonous for the player, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed. can do. Note that the mini character notice effect can be executed simultaneously with the evolved notice and the lightning notice effect for causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear, similarly to the developed notice effect for displaying the character images 70 to 74.

  Here, although the description regarding the several layers displayed on the display area 42 is mentioned later, while displaying the mini character images 90-93 on the back surface of the decorative design 80a-80c, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and Dracula are displayed. Since the simulated character image 72 is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and the character image 72 imitating a dracula are displayed in front of the mini character images 90 to 93. For example, the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi is displayed in FIG. 90C, but the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi is displayed by displaying the character image 72 imitating the Dracula in FIG. 90D. And a part of the variable display of the left decorative pattern 80a is not visible. Accordingly, the player is given priority to pay attention to the advance notice effect in which the character images 70 to 74 are displayed rather than the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Can do.

  After the display control of the character image 72 simulating Dracula in FIG. 90D, the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 73 simulating Franken is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. (FIG. 90E). This state is step 3 of the above-described three stages, and the stage is developed from the two stages in which the character image 72 imitating the Dracula is displayed and controlled to the three stages in which the character image 73 imitating the Franken is displayed and controlled. It is.

  After the display control of the character image 73 imitating Franken in FIG. 90 (E), a process based on the process data is further executed, and a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy when a predetermined period has elapsed. Display control is performed on the display area 42 (FIG. 90F). This state is the above-described four-step step 4, from the three-step display control of the character image 73 imitating Franken to the four-step control of the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy. It is a state where the stage is developed.

  In this embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42 are continuously displayed from the first stage (FIG. 90C) to the third stage (FIG. 90E). Thus, control is performed so that the effect display by a plurality of characters is possible. Further, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect based on the number of display of the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42. Further, as described above, the stage of the advanced notice effect develops. As a result, the degree of expectation for the big hit increases, so that the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of display of the character images 71 to 73.

  Next, an example of the advance notice effect that drives the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 17 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 17, as described above, the change display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number 17, , Control data for the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decoration lamp 49, and sonic device 115 corresponding to the comment notice pattern are selected, as well as the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 17 , Stop symbols, and other information are transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113. Also, a timer set in the control data is started on the sub-integrated board 111.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern and the advanced notice pattern number 17 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data in which a control process is described is selected, and control of decoration symbols, the above-described character image display, and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data.

  Then, the balloon from the monster is displayed in the display area 42 based on the process data. It should be noted that in the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 17, the character bodies 150, 150h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled without controlling the display of the character images 71 to 73 in the display area 42. This is done by causing 152 and 154 to appear. In addition, as described above, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are controlled by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 by outputting a drive signal to the first illumination control board 112. In the process data selected by the CPU 113a mounted on the illumination control board 113, control data relating to these drive controls is not set. The process data selected corresponding to the advanced notice pattern of the evolved notice pattern number 17 includes the actions of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 by the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 and the display area 42. Until the predetermined drive control is executed by the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 in order to synchronize the display mode, the decorative symbols change display and the predetermined drive control is executed (for example, The control data for controlling the display of the character image 70 is set in the case of FIG. 91 (D ′).

  A character imitating a wolf man by outputting a drive signal to the stepping motor 155 based on the control data by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 when a predetermined period has elapsed after the display control of the balloon from the monster. The body 154 is caused to appear so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period (FIG. 91 (A ′)). Note that the above-described two-stage step 2 ′ means that a character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears from a state where only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed in the display area 42. 91 (A '), and the stage is developed from the first stage where the balloon from the monster is controlled to the second stage where the character body 154 imitating the wolf man appears for a predetermined period. It is a state.

  After the character body 154 imitating a wolf man in FIG. 91 (A ') appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, the CPU 111a further performs processing based on the control data. When the predetermined period has elapsed, a character 152 that imitates a dracula by outputting a drive signal to the stepping motors 152h and 153f appears for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42. (FIG. 91 (B ′)). This state is the above-described three-stage step 3 ', and the stage is changed from the two stages in which the character body 154 imitating the wolf man appears for a predetermined period to the three stages in which the character body 152 imitating the dracula appears for a predetermined period. It is a developed state.

  After allowing the character body 152 imitating Dracula in FIG. 91 (B ′) to appear for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42, the CPU 111a further executes processing based on the control data. Then, when a predetermined period has passed, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 150h to make the character body 150 imitating the franken appear for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42 (see FIG. 91 (C ′)). This state is the above-described four-stage step 4 ′, and the stage is expanded from the three stages in which the character body 152 imitating Dracula appears for a predetermined period to the four stages in which the character object 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period. It is the state made to do.

  The character body 150 imitating Franken in FIG. 91 (C ′) appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, and then the CPU 111a further executes processing based on the control data. When a predetermined period has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to cause the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear. After a predetermined period of time, the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls display of the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy based on the process data in the display area 42 (FIG. 91 ( E ′)) At this time, the CPU 111a outputs drive signals to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 based on the control data to accommodate the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. As described above, the operation of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the display of the character images 70 to 73 in the display area 42 are synchronized by the timer set in the control data and the timer set in the process data. ing. This state is the above-described five-stage step 5, and the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled from three stages in which the character body 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period. It is a state that has evolved into stages.

  When shifting from FIG. 90 (E) to FIG. 90 (F) and when shifting from FIG. 91 (D ′) to FIG. 91 (E ′), control for stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 80a is executed. ing. However, the middle decorative symbol 80b and the right decorative symbol 80c are not stopped and displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect is executed before the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative designs 80a to 80c is started.

  In this embodiment, control is performed so that the appearance directions of the character image and the character body corresponding to the same character are the same. For example, display control is performed so that the character image 71 appears from the left side of the display area 42 in FIG. 90C, and the character body 154 is displayed in the display area 42 by driving the stepping motor 155 in FIG. It is comprised so that it may appear from the accommodating part 160 provided in the left side. By configuring in this way, the character image corresponding to the same character and the character member appear from the same direction, so that the player can more clearly understand that the relationship between the character image and the character body is the same. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect is executed by causing one of the character image and the character member to appear at each stage, and display control of the character image corresponding to the same character at each stage You may comprise so that both a character image and a character body may appear by performing drive control of the stepping motor which can operate a character body. With this configuration, the character can be displayed in a more visible manner at each stage, so that the player can easily recognize that the effect is being executed, and the player's sense of expectation Can be further enhanced.

  In this case, it may be configured such that both the character body and the character image appear only when the background image is the night background image 82, and when only one of them appears by such a configuration. You can give an impression that more monsters are making noise at night, so you can give a stronger impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  When both the character body and the character image appear in the advanced notice effect, the appearance direction of the character image may differ from the appearance direction of the character body. That is, in this embodiment, since the character body appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42, an area in which the character image is displayed by the character body by causing the character image and the character body to appear from the same direction. There is a possibility that the character image cannot be visually recognized. This problem can be solved by changing the appearance direction of the character image and the character body.

  In this embodiment, the number of character images that are displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect and the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the driving of the stepping motor are different from each other. And the number of character bodies may be the same. That is, in this embodiment, character images 70 to 73 corresponding to four characters (in this example, monster-kun, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) and three characters (in this example, wolf man, Dracula). , Franken) and the character body 150, 152, 154 corresponding to the character body 150, 152, and 154, the four types of character members (in this embodiment, monsters) (Kun, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) may be provided to execute the advanced notice effect. Further, the number of character images to be displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect may be configured to be smaller than the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the driving of the stepping motor. For example, three characters (wolf) The advanced notice effect may be executed by a character image corresponding to a man, Dracula, Franken) and a character body corresponding to four characters (Monster-kun, Wolf Man, Dracula, Franken).

  Further, in this embodiment, the character body is switched and displayed at each stage. However, even if control is performed so that a plurality of characters can be controlled at each stage by continuously causing the character body to appear. Good. In addition, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect based on the number of appearing character bodies, and further, as described above, since the stage of the advanced notice effect develops, the big hit expectation increases. A sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies appearing.

  When both the character body and the character image are displayed at the same stage in the advanced notice effect, only one of the character image and the character body is continuously displayed at each stage. You may control as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect according to the number of appearances of the character body and the display number of the character images, and further, as described above, the stage of the advanced notice effect is developed. Since the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased, the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies appearing.

  In this embodiment, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1, the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2, the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3, the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F When any of -MS4 has a value 1, that is, in an abnormal state, for example, when character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 has a value 1, that is, an abnormality has occurred in character body (Franken) 150, FIG. The first excitation data and the second excitation data are set to the value 0 in step S342 of the abnormal excitation data clear process described in the above. By this setting, switching of the excitation current to each phase coil (φ1, φ2, φ3, φ4) of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, 155 by the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, 112n is stopped, respectively. 150h, 153f, 152h and 155 do not rotate. For this reason, the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 do not operate. Specifically, for example, when the advanced notice pattern number 17 is set as described above, in step 1 ′, the character body (wolf man) 154 should appear on the front side of the display area 42. Since the stepping motor 155 does not rotate, the character body (wolf man) 154 shown in FIG. 91 (A ′) does not appear. In step 2 ′, the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 should appear on the front side of the display area 42. However, since the stepping motors 153f and 152h do not rotate, respectively, FIG. 91 (B ′ The character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 shown in FIG. In step 3 ′, the character body (Franken) 150 should appear on the front side of the display area 42. However, since the stepping motor 150h does not rotate, the character body (Franken) 150 shown in FIG. Does not appear.

  When the variation number of the variation display pattern is transmitted as a command from the main control board 101 next time, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is set to 0, that is, the character body (Franken) abnormality determination process. When Franken 150 is in a normal state, as shown in FIGS. 91 (A ′) to (C ′), a character body (wolf man) 154 and a character body (Dracula) 152 are shielded on the front side of the display area 42. A member (Dracula) 166 and a character body (Franken) 150 appear in order.

  Next, an example of the button notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 18 and the comment notice effect of the button notice pattern number 4 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 18, as described above, the change display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number 18, A button notice pattern that displays “Press the button!” And the control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 corresponding to the button notice pattern are selected. Information such as a button notice pattern for displaying “Press the button!” And a stop pattern is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113. Also, a timer set in the control data is started on the sub-integrated board 111. This timer synchronizes with the image display control executed on the basis of the process data selected on the second electrical control board 113, the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, and This is for performing lighting control of the decoration lamp 49 and sound control of the sound wave device 115.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives the signal indicating the information, and displays the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 18, and the button notice that displays “Press the button!”. The process data in which the display display process 42 executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the pattern is described is selected, and the decorative pattern and the image display of the character described above are selected based on the contents described in the process data. , Etc. control is started. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data.

  The balloon 78 from the monster is displayed in the display area 42 based on the process data (FIG. 92A). Note that a comment sentence 77 (comment content) of “Please press the button!” Is displayed and controlled on the balloon 78 from the monster-kun whose display is controlled in the display area 42 based on the process data. In addition, voice control of the sound wave device 115 is performed in synchronization with the display control of the comment content, and the comment content (“Press the button!”) Is output as a voice. Further, in the lower right portion of the display area 42, display control of the characters “PUSH” is performed together with an image 79 simulating the operation button 38, thereby prompting the player to operate the operation button 38. As described above, the button notice effect is executed as the whole of the advanced notice effect (step 1 in one step). The display form of the comment sentence 77 is the same as the display form of the comment sentence 77 based on the comment notice pattern.

  Then, when the operation button 38 is operated once, an operation signal is input to the CPU 113a, and when it is decided to execute the advanced notification effect of the button notification pattern number 4 at the timing when the operation signal is input. As described above, the control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 corresponding to the button notice pattern number 4 is selected, and the information of the button notice pattern number 4 is used as the second electric decoration control board. 113.

  Then, the balloon 78 from the monster kun whose display is controlled in the display area 42 is updated to the comment sentence 77 (comment content) of "Maybe ...!?" Based on the process data, and the display is controlled (FIG. 92). (B)). In addition, voice control of the sound wave device 115 is performed in synchronization with the display control of the comment content, and the comment content (“probably ...!?”) Is output as voice. Here, the balloon 78 from the monster is updated from white to light blue, and the display control is performed, so that the player can clearly recognize that a response has been made to the comment content "Maybe ...!?" Can be made.

  Next, an example of the intense heat notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (A) is an explanatory view showing the intense heat notification pattern No. 1 described above, and FIG. 93 (B) is an illustration showing the above-mentioned intense heat notification pattern No. 5. FIG. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20, and 21 with the advanced notice pattern number 1, If it is decided to execute the heat announcement effect, as described above, it is decided by the balloon from the monster (image 1 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed in the evolved notice pattern and the intense heat notice pattern. In addition to the information such as the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, the stop pattern, etc., because the balloon from the monster-kun (Step 1 of the intense heat notice pattern) matches, Information on the intense heat notice pattern of pattern number 1 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 corresponds to the intense heat notice pattern of the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the intense heat notice pattern number 3 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data describing a process of effect display control to be executed in the display area 42 to be selected, and control of decorative symbols, image display of the above-described character, etc. is performed based on the contents described in the process data. Start. Then, at the timing when the balloon 78 from the monster is displayed in the display area 42 according to the advanced notice effect pattern (the timing at which step 1 of the advanced notice pattern is executed), the monster displayed as an image with the advanced notice pattern is displayed. Unlike the white balloon 78, the display area 42 is controlled to display the rainbow balloon 78 whose color scheme has been changed (FIG. 93A). For example, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 and when it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 3, FIG. In the scene where the balloon 78 from the monster in FIG. 90 (B) is displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 90 (F), the background color is not white but the rainbow balloon in FIG. 93 (A). 78 is controlled in the display area 42.

  In addition, when the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice pattern No. 7, 8, 12, or 13, the intense heat notice pattern number 5 When it is decided to execute the intense heat warning effect, as described above, the character imitating Franken displayed in the advanced notice pattern (step 4 of the advanced notice pattern) and the intense heat notice pattern are displayed. In addition to the information such as the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the stop pattern, the character imitating Franken determined in step 4 (step 4 of the intense heat notice pattern) matches the character. Information on the intense heat warning pattern with the heat warning pattern number 5 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 corresponds to the intense heat announcement pattern of the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the intense heat notice pattern number 5 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data describing a process of effect display control to be executed in the display area 42 to be selected, and control of decorative symbols, image display of the above-described character, etc. is performed based on the contents described in the process data. Start. Then, at the timing of controlling the display of the character image 73 simulating Franken in the display area 42 according to the advanced notice effect pattern (the timing at which Step 4 of the advanced notice pattern is executed), the Franken displayed in the developed notice pattern is displayed. Unlike the simulated character image 73, the display area 42 is controlled to display a white character image 76 simulating Franken changed to a color scheme based on white (FIG. 93B). For example, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 12, and when it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 5, FIG. A) In the scene where the character image 73 simulating the franken shown in FIG. 90 (E) in the advanced notice effect shown in FIG. 90 (F) is displayed, the franken shown in FIG. 93 (B) is used instead of the character image 73. Display control of the white character image 76 in the display area 42 is performed.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 12, and when it is decided to execute the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 2, FIG. A) In the scene where the character image 71 imitating the wolf man in FIG. 90C in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 90F is displayed, the character image 71 is imitated instead of the character image 71. When display control of a white character image (not shown) is performed in the display area 42 and it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 3, the operations shown in FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (F) are performed. In a scene where the white balloon 78 from the monster in FIG. 90B in the advanced notice effect is displayed and controlled, the rainbow-colored balloon 78 from the monster like the intense heat notice pattern number 1 (FIG. 93). A)) and a white character imitating a wolf man with a different form like the intense heat warning pattern number 2 in the scene where the character image 71 imitating the wolf man in FIG. When it is determined to display an image (not shown) in the display area 42 and to execute the intense heat notification effect of the intense heat notification pattern number 4, the development type of FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (F). In the scene where display control is performed on the character image 72 simulating the Dracula in FIG. 90D in the notice effect, the display area 42 is not a character image 72 but a white character image (not shown) simulating a wolf man with a different color scheme. 90 in the advanced notice effects of FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (F). F) In the scene where the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled, a white character image (not shown) imitating a wolf man with a different color scheme of clothing is displayed instead of the character image 70. Control display.

  In this embodiment, among the image displays of a plurality of types of characters, such as a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and Monster, the image display character to be executed with the selected advanced notice pattern and the selected intense notice When the image display character executed in the pattern matches, the intense heat advance notice effect is executed as part or all of the advanced notice effect. Further, since the intense heat announcement effect is not executed unless the characters match, the execution rate is low, and therefore, the big hit expectation degree is set high for the character of the intense heat announcement effect.

  Next, an example of the lightning notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 94, as the effect example 1 of the lightning warning effect, the determination result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and the main control board 101 is determined as “variable number reach, hit” with the variable number 33 as the variable display pattern. The case where lightning bolt warning pattern number 2 (twice blackout) is determined as the lightning bolt warning pattern from the lightning bolt warning table for the daytime background on the integrated substrate 111 is shown.

  When the special symbol display 41 starts the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c is also started in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 (FIG. 94A). Specifically, in the vicinity of the center of the display area 42, the display pattern is variably displayed in such a manner that the middle decorative symbol 80b jumps, and the background image is visible on both sides of the central decorative symbol 80b. The left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c that are translucent are displayed in a variable manner in such a manner that the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42. In addition, a daytime background image 81 is displayed in the display area 42, and a character image (monster) 70 is displayed below the decorative pattern 80b in the middle (lower center of the display area 42).

  Next, as the first blackout effect, a darkening image 83 that darkens the display area 42 that controls the display of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the daytime background image 81 so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize is predetermined. Time (for example, 1 second) is displayed (FIG. 94 (B)). At this time, the player can recognize that one of a plurality of lightning notice effects has been started, and a special effect with a high expectation of jackpot (a super reach development effect that starts from a spotlight notice) , Etc.) can have a sense of expectation to be performed. Thereafter, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 94C).

  Next, as the second blackout effect, the darkness image 83 having a higher darkening degree than the darkness during the first blackout effect is displayed for the first time so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. Is displayed for a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the production time during the blackout production (FIG. 94D). At this time, the player can recognize that at least the lightning warning pattern number 1 is not the blackout gasse effect, and the second lightning warning pattern number 2 may be performed. However, the expectation that special effects (super-reaching development production and feature reach production, etc. started from spotlight notice) will be performed for the first time will be higher than the first blackout production. This can be improved compared to blackout production. In other words, by performing the blackout effect twice, the expectation that a special effect (such as a super reach development effect or an accessory reach effect started from a spotlight notice) will be gradually improved. be able to. Thereafter, as in the case after the first blackout effect, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 94E).

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a, 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, the “7” reach mode is illustrated) is formed, and the accessory reach production is started. A character 84 “notice of reach” to be notified is displayed (FIG. 94 (F)). At this time, since the content before the blackout effect was continuously displayed after the second blackout effect, a special effect (a spotlight notice or role) with a higher expectation level than a super reach effect was displayed. It is possible to improve the feeling of expectation that it was the second blackout gasse production without the performance of the object reach, etc., and to improve it again by performing the effect reach production. It is possible to give a sharpness to interest. In the character reach production, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 attached to the effect device 40 operate, and still stop according to the state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168. There is an effect that the decorative pattern 80b that is not displayed is variably displayed.

  Next, in the lightning warning effect production example 1, since the variable number 33 “actual reach, hit” is determined, the decorative pattern 80b in the middle stops at the same design as the left and right decorative patterns 80a and 80c. By the display, the big hit symbol (in the figure, the big hit symbol “777” is illustrated) is fixedly displayed (FIG. 94 (G)). After that, the combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is a jackpot symbol, and the opening image 85 that informs the player that the jackpot game will be started can be displayed and controlled with the above-described multiple types of effects. Are displayed together with the character images 70 to 75 (FIG. 94 (H)).

  FIG. 95 shows, as a lightning notice effect example 2, a change display pattern determined by the main control board 101 as one of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22, and the sub-integrated board 111 from the daylight background lightning notice table. The case where the background change effect of lightning warning pattern number 3 is determined as the lightning warning pattern is shown. Note that the first blackout effect is also performed in the lightning notice effect example 2 as in the effect example 1.

  After the first blackout effect, when a predetermined time elapses, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 95A). Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 95B). Thereafter, the display area 42 is controlled so as to continue the content before the blackout effect is performed, but a night background image 82 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image. (FIG. 95 (C)). At this time, there will be no special effects (such as spotlight notices or role-reach effects) that have a higher expectation level than the Super Reach effect. The lightning warning table for lightning backgrounds (FIG. 54) is used to determine the lightning flash pattern, making it easier to perform lightning flashing notifications for lightning lightning pattern numbers 4 and 5, or for selecting the advanced lighting effect. By using the advanced notice table (FIG. 45), the operating rate of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is improved, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, a reach mode of “7” is illustrated) is formed, and notification that the reach effect is started is notified. A character 86 “REACH” is displayed (FIG. 95D). Thereafter, a super reach effect, a super reach development effect, or the like corresponding to any one of the change display patterns of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22 determined on the main control board 101 is performed. The background image 82 is the night background image 82 when the decorative pattern variation display is started in the display area 42, and the background change effect of the lightning warning pattern number 3 is used as the lightning warning pattern from the night background lightning warning table on the sub-integrated board 111. If determined, a daytime background image 81 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image after the second blackout effect.

  In FIG. 96, as the third effect example of the lightning notice effect, the main control board 101 is determined as one of the change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, or 18 to 22 as the change display pattern. The case where the lightning flash effect of lightning warning pattern number 5 is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the background lightning warning table is shown. Note that the first blackout effect is also performed in the third lightning effect effect example 3, as in the first effect example.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed after the first blackout effect, display control is performed on the display area 42 so as to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 96A). After that, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that it is more difficult for the player to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 96 (B)). After that, the effect lamp 44a arranged above the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 blinks and lights up, and a lightning flash notice for running a lightning (thunder) 87 on the dark image 83 from above the display area 42 is performed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 80a (illustrated as “7” in the figure) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 when illuminated by the lightning 87 (FIG. 96C).

  Next, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first and second blackout effects is displayed in the second blackout effect so that the player cannot see (not visible). A time comparable to the time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 96D). At this time, the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed on the right side of the display area 42 in a state where the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and the middle and right decorative symbols 80b and 80c are variably displayed. The lower part is darker than a normal display (for example, when a reach effect or the like is not executed), and is darkly displayed to the extent that it is difficult for the player to view. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed by the first lightning flash warning, and the left decorative symbol 80a is continuously stopped and displayed in the dark image 83 thereafter. It is sufficient that the reach mode is formed before the production (in this case, the second lightning flash notice described later) is completed, and the left decorative symbol 80a is not stopped and displayed in the first lightning flash notice. In (D), the left decorative design 80a may be in a variable display.

  Next, after a third blackout effect, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect lamps 44a and 44b arranged on the upper right side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 flash and light multiple times. When a lightning flash advance notice is made to run the lightning (lightning) 87 on the dark image 83 from the right side of the display area 42, the right decorative design is displayed together with the left decorative design 80a that is already stopped by being illuminated by the lightning 87. 80c ("7" is illustrated in the figure) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 (FIG. 96 (E)). At this time, since the second lightning flash announcement was made, the player will not be out of reach with normal reach and super reach production, and in other cases, the big hit expectation is high With Super Reach Development and Super Reach Branch Premier production, you can expect a big hit.

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, a reach mode of “7” is illustrated) is formed, and notification that the reach effect is started is notified. A “reach” character 86 is displayed (FIG. 96F). Thereafter, a super reach effect or a super reach development effect corresponding to any of the change display patterns of change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, and 18 to 22 determined by the main control board 101 is performed. If the lightning bolt warning pattern number 4 is determined as the lightning warning pattern on the sub-integrated board 111, the second lightning flash warning is not performed, but only the first lightning flash warning is performed.

  Next, in the lightning bolt notice effect example 3 (lightning flash notice), an effect example of changing the display mode of the decorative symbol 80 will be described with reference to FIG. First, at the time of normal symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the character 123 (“7” in FIG. 97A) depicted in the array identification unit 121 of the decorative symbol 80 is displayed. The color scheme of the illustrated “monster” character) and the background image 124 (the “monster house and bat” pattern) depicted in the depth display unit 122 are the numbers of the numbers in the decorative design 80 (sequence identification unit 121). In order to prevent the recognition, the color scheme of the character 123 and the background image 124 is different from the color scheme (base color) of the decorative symbol 80 and the same color (the symbol “7” shown in FIG. 97A (specific symbol)). The image is displayed in a reddish color based on the red of the specific design by gradation or the like). In other words, the decorative pattern 80 is displayed in the symbol display mode (sequence highlighting display mode) in which the visibility of the sequence identification unit 121 is prioritized without the character 123 and the background image 124 interfering with the visibility of the sequence identification unit 121. The

  On the other hand, when the lightning flash notice is performed, when the darkening image 83 shown in FIG. 96 (B) or FIG. 96 (D) is displayed, an effect of running the lightning 87 on the display area 42 is performed ( 96 (C), (E)), the decorative pattern 80 is displayed in a dark image 83 when illuminated by the lightning 87 displayed on the background image, as shown in FIG. 97 (B). Is displayed. Specifically, by illuminating the white light of the lightning 87, the color scheme of the decorative pattern 80 based on red is a monochrome color scheme in which the white color is emphasized (a color scheme having a higher white display ratio than black). The image is changed and displayed. In addition, in such a lightning flash notice, image display control is performed to change the brightness of the lightning 87 displayed on the background image in order to enhance the effect, and when the brightness of the lightning 87 decreases. Is that the degree to which the white light of the lightning 87 illuminates the decorative pattern 80 is reduced. As shown in FIG. 97C, the decorative pattern 80 is illuminated by the lightning 87 whose luminance has been reduced, so that the dark image 83 is displayed. It is displayed in a display mode that appears slightly. Specifically, the decorative design 80 is displayed as an image instead of a monochrome tone color scheme in which white is emphasized to a monochrome tone color scheme in which black is emphasized (a color scheme having a higher black display ratio than white). Then, when the reach mode is formed after the lightning flash advance notice is finished and the reach production shown in FIG. 96 (F) is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), it is depicted in the array identification unit 121. The background image 124 depicted on the character 123 and the depth display unit 122 is displayed in an original color tone regardless of the base color. As a result, the character 123 is highlighted in the array identification unit 121, and the background image 124 is highlighted in the depth display unit 122. That is, the character 123 and the background image 124 drawn in a color scheme that does not interfere with the recognition of the numbers (the arrangement identification unit 121) during normal symbol variation are displayed in a color tone that can be positively recognized during the lightning flash advance notice. . In other words, the visibility of the character 123 and the background image 124 is given the highest priority, and the character 123 and the background image 124 can be clearly seen (the decorativeness of the decorative symbol 80 is enhanced compared to the arrangement highlighting display mode). The decoration symbol 80 is displayed in the (decoration emphasis display mode). In addition, in addition to the “monster house and bat” design, the “lightning” design 124 a is additionally displayed in the background image 124 in this decoration highlighting display mode in order to leave a reverberation after the lightning flash notice has been executed. However, the symbol display in the decoration emphasis display mode is terminated immediately before the start of the reach effect, and after the reach effect, the display is changed to the array emphasis display mode again and the variation display of the decoration symbol 80 is performed.

  FIG. 98 shows, as a lightning notice effect example 4, the main control board 101 determines one of the change numbers 29 and 30 as the change display pattern, and the sub-integrated board 111 shows the lightning notice from the daylight background lightning notice table. The case where the blackout production of the lightning notice pattern number 2 is decided twice as a pattern is shown. It should be noted that the first blackout effect is performed in the lightning warning effect example 4 as well as in the effect example 1.

  After the first blackout effect, the display area 42 is controlled so that the content before the first blackout effect is continued after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 98 (A)). Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 98B). Thereafter, a spotlight notice is made under the center of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 while a character (a character image (monster) 70 is illustrated) appears in the spotlight 88 (FIG. 5). 98 (C)). At this time, since the spotlight notice is performed, the player can confirm that the super reach development effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is performed, and can improve the expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, since the super reach development effect corresponding to the character is performed, it is possible to recognize the high expectation degree of the big hit, and it is possible to have various feelings of expectation depending on the character that has appeared. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are the normal decorative symbols (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed) in the lower right portion of the display area 42 (the portion that is not illuminated by the spotlight 88). This is smaller than when the variable display is executed, and is darkly displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Next, the character image (monster) 70 lowers the start image 89 for starting the super reach development effect corresponding to the character whose image display is controlled by the spotlight notice from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. An effect is performed (FIG. 98D). Thereafter, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed as a super reach development effect corresponding to one of the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 29 and 30 determined on the main control board 101, thereby reaching the reach mode ( In FIG. 98, the super-reach development effect is started in a state in which the reach form of “7” is formed) (FIG. 98E).

  Here, the spotlight notice is not determined by the sub-integrated board 111 like the lightning flash notice (Production Example 2) or the background change notice (Production Example 3), and the variation number 23 in which the same blackout effect is incorporated. Are determined by the main control board 101 as? Even for the lightning warning effect determined on the main control board 101, until the end of the second blackout effect in FIG. 98 (B) (approximately 3.5 seconds from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c). Are displayed in the same effect form as in FIG. 95B of effect example 2 and FIG. 96B of effect example 3.

  In the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice, the lightning (lightning) 87 can be run or the spotlight 88 can be exposed to the character by setting the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 to the dark image 83 by the blackout effect. It is a notice effect that becomes possible. Therefore, it can be said that the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice are effects unique to the dark display by performing the blackout effect.

  As described above, according to the configuration of this embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize the entire display area where the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in the display area 42, the character image 70, and the like. By executing a lightning notice effect (disappearance effect) for displaying the dark image 83 for a predetermined time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c until the dark image 83 is displayed by the player are displayed. It becomes impossible to pay attention to the fluctuating display, the character image 70, etc., and it is possible to effectively make the notice effect (blackout effect) that the player wants to be aware of. In addition, after making the notice effect start by the blackout effect, the effect lamps 44a and 44b of the effect device 40 are turned on and blinked as the notice effect, and the lightning 87 is displayed in the display area 42. By displaying the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c in a visible manner in such a production manner, it is possible to effectively pay attention to a notice production that the player wants to be aware of. Therefore, by noticing and paying attention to the notice effect that the player wants to be aware of, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous and suppresses a decrease in the interest of the game. Can do. As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the lightning notice selection process (step S214) of the notice selection process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process as the sub information. The process (step S110) transmits to the second lighting control board 113, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second lighting control board 113 displays the lightning notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. Means.

  Note that, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, a dark image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire area where information such as the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the character image 70 is displayed in the display area 42 is displayed. 83 is displayed for a predetermined time, but it is sufficient that the player cannot pay attention to the information display. For example, only a bright image or a background image is displayed in the display area 42 as an image different from the dark image 83. Alternatively, the information display may be concealed by erasing an image including the information display by turning off the power of the display area 42 or providing an operable concealment member in the effect device 40 or the like.

  In addition, conventionally, there are some cases where a plurality of characters are displayed, and other effects other than the special symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display device are performed lively, but even if a plurality of characters are displayed, the jackpot symbol is not displayed. It was rarely derived and did not make the character aware. However, such a presentation can be made conscious by the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, an example of the effect of the mini character notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is an explanatory view showing the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern No. 1 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, as described above, the variable display pattern, the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, and the stop Information such as symbols is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display control executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern and the mini character notice pattern number 1 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. The process data in which the above process is described is selected, and control of the decorative design, the above-described mini character image display, and the like based on the contents described in the process data is started. That is, the variable display of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is started in a translucent display mode based on the selected process data. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c change rapidly from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 (the moving speed is faster than the process in which each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Fluctuation) is displayed. Further, for the decorative pattern 80b in the middle, since the mini character image display by the mini character notice is not performed on the back side, it is not necessary to make the back side visible to the player, and it is not a translucent display mode but an opaque display mode. The display is variable. However, even if the decorative pattern 80b in the inside is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, it does not affect the player's visual recognition.

  Then, based on the process data, the display on the lower right side of the display area 42 and the door displayed on the back of the right decorative design 80c is opened, and the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi in the form where the upper body is mounted is displayed in the display area 42. Display control is performed (FIG. 99A). At this time, the right decorative design 80c is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, and the player can visually recognize the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the right decorative design 80c. Therefore, the player does not need to move the viewpoint between the right decorative symbol 80c and the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, and displays the Hiroshi while gazing at the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c. The mini character image 90 can be visually recognized.

  Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed based on the process data, the door displayed on the back of the right decorative design 80a is closed in the process in which the left decorative design 80a of the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Non-display control of the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi is performed in the display area 42 (FIG. 99B). At this time, the left decorative design 80a is gradually changed from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation display, and is changed from translucent to opaque display mode. Therefore, even if the player is gazing at the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, the player can surely recognize that the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed. Then, the left decorative design 80a stops and displays the designated stop design (in the figure, “7” is exemplified) (FIG. 99C).

  Similarly to the left decorative design 80a, the right decorative design 80c is changed from a high-speed change to a low-speed change display in a process in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. To an opaque display mode. Then, the right decorative design 80c stops and displays a stop design (designated as “6” in FIG. 99) designated to be different from the left decorative design 80a (FIG. 99D).

  In this embodiment, the mini character images 90 to 93 are controlled to be hidden (FIG. 99B) before the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed, but after the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed, Display control may be performed until the decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed. In this case, a mini-character image imitating a human girl is displayed on the back of the stop position of the left decorative symbol 80a that is first stopped and displayed (left lower part of the display area 42) among the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The child is displayed and controlled, and the mini character is a mini character (mini character notice pattern number 4) having a high expectation of big hit, or a combination of mini characters including the mini character (mini character notice pattern number 11) is a big hit. Therefore, before the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed, the back of the stop position must be watched, and the display area 42 can be focused even in the normal state.

  In this embodiment, the display area having a smaller display area than each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c, that is, the variable display region of each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed on the inner side, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are easily visible to the player. Note that it is not necessary to move the viewpoint between the decorative symbols 80a to 80c displayed in the display region 42 and the mini character images 90 to 93, and characters are displayed in some display regions of the decorative symbol variable display regions. Even if the image is displayed, the character image may be displayed in all the display areas in the decorative symbol variation display area. Further, for example, the mini character image may be displayed in a display area having a display area larger than that of the decorative symbol variation display region so that the decoration symbol variation display region and the mini character image display region overlap.

  Here, in the liquid crystal display 116, display control is performed on the display area 42 as one effect image by superimposing a plurality of layers. Here, the image data of the background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82), mini character images 90 to 93, left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, etc. The image data stored in the ROM 113b is read out separately to the RAM 113c of the second electrical decoration control board 113 at a predetermined timing based on the process data, and is output to the liquid crystal display 116. It is displayed in the display area 42 as a layer. Priorities displayed in the display area 42 are set for these image data (a plurality of layers). By superposing upper layers in order from the lowest layer, priority is given to higher layers. Are displayed in the display area 42.

  A plurality of layers for displaying the mini character notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing a plurality of layers for displaying the advanced notice effect in which steps 1, 2, and 3 of the aforementioned advanced notice pattern are executed and the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern number 11 described above. FIG. The plurality of layers for executing the mini character notice effect include a background layer 42a in which a background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) is displayed as at least the lowest layer, and a mini as a first middle layer. The mini character layer 42b on which the character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in a variable manner as the second middle layer (the higher layer than the first middle layer). The symbol layer 42c to be displayed and the notice character layer 42d in which the character images 70 to 75 are displayed as the highest layer are configured.

  In the background layer 42a, as shown in FIG. 100A, a daytime background image 81 is depicted as a background image, a door 94a at the lower right, a door 94b at the upper left, a door 94c at the upper right, and a door 94c at the lower left. A door 94d is depicted. Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the mini character layer 42b includes a mini character image 90 showing a Hiroshi at a position corresponding to the lower right door 94a of the background layer 42a, and a position corresponding to the lower left door 94b. A mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi's sister, a mini character image 92 imitating a triplet at a position corresponding to the upper right door 94c, and a mini character image imitating a human girl at a position corresponding to the lower left door 94d. (Kyoko-chan) 93 is depicted. Note that the mini character images 90 to 93 include a depiction of a door that is in a half-open state together with the mini character.

  Then, by overlapping the background layer 42a and the mini character layer 42b that is higher than the background layer 42a, the doors 94a to 94d depicted in the daytime background image 81 are not visible, and the mini character image 90 to 93 becomes visible. It should be noted that only the necessary mini character images among the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed on the mini character layer 42b in accordance with the mini character notice pattern number. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 1 is determined, only the mini character image 90 is displayed on the mini character area 42b, and as shown in FIG. Only the character image 90 representing Hiroshi is displayed in the display area 42.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100C, the symbol layer 42c includes a left decorative symbol 80a in a semi-transparent display mode and a middle decorative symbol in an opaque display mode at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character images 91 and 93. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in a translucent display manner at a position overlapping the display area of 80b, the mini character images 90 and 92. Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c, which is higher than the mini character layer 42b, the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are seen through during the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. The mini character images 90 to 93 are visible to the player.

  It should be noted that the symbol layer 42c when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed is an opaque display mode at a position overlapping the display region of the mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 imitating a human girl. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in an opaque display manner at a position overlapping the left decorative design 80a and the display area of the mini character image 90 imitating Hiroshi. When the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c that is higher than the mini character layer 42b, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are displayed. The position where the mini character images 90 and 93 are depicted is not visible to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100D, the notice character area 42d is opaque at a position overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and the display areas of the mini character images 91 and 93. In the display mode, a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a character image 72 imitating Dracula, and a character image 73 imitating Franken are depicted. Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c and the notice character layer 42d which is higher than these layers, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and the mini character notice are performed during the advanced notice effect. Character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are visible to the player in front of the mini character images 90 to 93 in the effect. The blank display area in the mini character layer 42b, the symbol layer 42c, and the notice character layer 42d is a transparent display mode, and can transmit the lower layer.

  FIG. 100 shows only the layer on which the daytime background image 81, the mini character images 90 to 93, the left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, and the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are displayed. In addition to these layers, based on the image data stored in the ROM 113b of the second electrical control board 113, a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy displayed together with the background image, in blackout effects It has a layer on which the dark image 83 and the like are displayed. The character images 70 to 75 displayed in the blackout effect are displayed on the same layer as the notice character layer 42d on which the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice are displayed. And background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) <mini character image 90-93 in mini character notice effect <character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy (displayed in the lower center of display area 42) <Left / Middle / Right decorative symbols 80a-80c <Character images 70-75 in advance notice effect (character images 70-73 in advanced notice effect or character images 71-75 in blackout effect) <Dark image in blackout effect The priority order displayed in the display area 42 is set in the order of 83.

  Further, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 described above appear so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42, an advanced notice effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is executed. Some of the mini character images 90 to 93 and the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are not visible to the player. In other words, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear with a higher priority than all the images displayed in the display area 42. For example, when mini character images 90 to 93 in the mini character notice effect are displayed, by driving the character body 154 imitating a wolf man, one of the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister and one of the left decorative symbols 80a. The part becomes invisible. Therefore, the player is given priority to the advance notice effect in which the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are driven over the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Can be made.

  In this embodiment, the design layer 42c is set higher than the mini character layer 42b, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are visible through the back of the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c. It is sufficient that the viewpoint does not need to be moved between the 80a to 80c and the mini character images 90 to 93. For example, the mini character layer 42b is higher than the symbol layer 42c, and the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are used. The mini character images 90 to 93 may be displayed on the front side of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c so as to be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. In this case, the decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be displayed in an opaque display mode.

  In this embodiment, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are variably displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, so that the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c can be seen transparently. 93 can be visually recognized, but the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be variably displayed so that the mini character images 90 to 93 can be visually recognized. For example, the left and right decorative symbols 80a are displayed in an opaque display mode. , 80c are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are visually recognized by using the visual effect of the after image of the mini character images 90 to 93 visible between the decorative symbols in the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. It may be possible.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and it is determined whether or not to execute the mini character notice selection process (step S215) of the notice selection process to execute the mini character notice. A rear effect execution determining means for determining is provided. In addition, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the mini character notice selection process (step S215) of the notice selection process, and the information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process is secondly displayed in the sub information output process (step S110). The display area (lower order) of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the character images 70 to 75 is displayed on the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113 and transmitted to the illumination control board 113. The rear effect executing means for controlling the display of the mini character notice effect as the rear effect for controlling the display of the mini character images 80 to 83 is provided.

  Next, an example of a normal reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102A and 102B. The normal reach effect is executed when any of the change numbers 3 to 22 and 35 is determined as the change display pattern on the main control board 101. In other words, the normal reach production is performed when any of the above-described advanced notice effect, lightning notice effect example 2 (background change notice), effect example 3 (lightning flash notice) is executed, and In the case where it is not executed, the effect is executed after the reach mode is formed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed to form a reach mode (in FIG. 101, a reach mode of “7” is illustrated). When the “reach” character 86 is displayed to notify that the reach production is started, the left decorative design 80a forming the reach mode is displayed at the upper left of the display area 42, as shown in FIG. 101 (B). Is displayed smaller than when the normal decorative pattern variation display is executed (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed) (the left decorative pattern 80a of “7” is displayed smaller in the same figure). The right decorative design 80c forming the reach mode is displayed smaller in the upper right part of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative design is displayed (in the same figure). , "7" right decorative design 80c is displayed small Exemplified when). Further, the middle decorative symbol 80b is displayed in a larger size at the lower center of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative symbol variation display is executed (in the same figure, “8” middle decorative symbol 80b is displayed. Example when it is displayed large). Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), in the portrait 90 of “Daio” in the monster house displayed by the background images (the day background image 81 or the night background image 82) of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, the display area A presentation image is displayed in which all the other items displayed in 42 are drawn in a spiral shape (variation mode), and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c each rotate a virtual vertical line in the vertical direction. It is rotated as an axis.

  Here, the rotation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c described above will be described with reference to FIGS. First, during normal symbol fluctuations other than during symbol rotation, the decorative symbol 80 includes, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), a numeric-shaped arrangement identifying unit 121 in which a character 123 is depicted, and a background image 124. The depth display unit 122 that is the depicted thick portion, and thus the variable display is performed in a state of being three-dimensionally displayed on the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 that is a two-dimensional space (plane). Is called. Specifically, as described above, the left and right decorative symbols are changed in such a display manner that the reel is rotating from the upper side to the lower side of the display region 42, and the middle decorative symbols are displayed on the display region 42. It is changed in such a display manner as to jump around the center. However, the three-dimensional display at the time of such normal symbol variation displays the decorative symbol 80 in a three-dimensional manner by displaying the depth display unit 122 that displays the depth of the array identification unit 121 two-dimensionally. In other words, the display ratio between the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 constituting the decorative design 80 is kept substantially constant (generally, the sequence identification unit 121 is 70% and the depth display unit 122 is 30%). A variable display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the symbol is rotated, the decorative symbol 80 is rotated around the virtual axis 120 (vertical vertical line) set in the virtual three-dimensional space of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. . That is, as shown in FIGS. 101 (E) to 101 (H), the display ratios of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 change every moment as the decorative design 80 rotates, and the display change causes two changes. The decorative pattern 80 is displayed as if it were a three-dimensional substance in the display area 42 of the dimensional space (plane). The symbol display mode of the medium decorative symbol 80b will be described as an example. In the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (E) (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation), the display ratio of the array identification unit 121 is the depth display unit. The display ratio of the depth display unit 122 is gradually higher as the rotation progresses, and the display of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 is similar to the symbol display mode illustrated in FIG. The display ratio is substantially the same (50% for the array identification unit 121 and 50% for the depth display unit 122). Thereafter, the rotation further proceeds (through the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (G)), and the display ratio of the depth display portion 122 becomes almost 100% as in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (H). A decorative pattern 80 of only the depth display unit 122 is displayed. Thereafter, reverse rotation is performed, and after the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (G), the display ratio of the array identification unit 121 gradually increases, and as shown in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. After the display ratios of the identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 become substantially the same, the reverse rotation proceeds, and the display returns to the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (E) (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation). By repeatedly changing the display ratios of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 described above, the decorative symbol 80 is rotated (including reverse rotation). However, the change of the display ratio of the arrangement | sequence identification part 121 and the depth display part 122 is performed in a series of flows accompanying rotation of the decoration symbol 80. FIG.

  Then, after the decorative symbols 80 (left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c) are rotated for a predetermined time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are shown in FIG. 101 (E). The rotation is stopped in the display mode (the symbol display mode at the time of normal symbol variation), and the image 90 is sucked into the portrait 90 in this display mode. On the other hand, the rotation of the medium decorative design 80b is stopped in a symbol display mode (the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (H)) in which the display ratio of the depth display unit 122 is almost 100%, and is sucked into the portrait 90. (See FIGS. 102A and 102B). Thereafter, the image for the super reach branch effect is displayed, and the transition from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect is confirmed.

  In addition, when any of the variation numbers 3 and 4 is determined as the variation display pattern on the main control board 101, that is, when the display result of the deviation is derived after the normal reach effect is performed, and after the normal reach effect is performed When the jackpot display result is derived, after the above-described decorative symbols 80a to 80c are rotated, the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (E) (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation) is all used. By stopping the rotation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, the final display result is derived and the variation display of the decorative symbols is terminated. That is, the display result is derived without displaying the effect in which the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90 and the image for the super reach branch effect. Accordingly, when the effect of displaying the image for the super reach branching effect is not performed after the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90, the super reach effect having a higher degree of expectation of the big hit than the normal reach effect at that time. It can be recognized that the super reach development effect is not performed. In other words, when the effect of displaying the image for the super reach branching effect is performed after the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90, the super reach production or the development of the super reach having a higher degree of expectation of a big hit than the normal reach production. It can be recognized that the production is performed, and the expectation that becomes a big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, as the effect display for rotating the decorative pattern 80, the horizontal display shown in FIG. 101 (D) is used in addition to the rotation with the vertical virtual line (virtual axis 120) as the rotation axis in the normal reach effect described above. An effect display is performed in which the decorative symbol 80 is rotated about the virtual axis 120a that is a virtual perpendicular to the direction. In addition, the “moon” pattern is drawn on the upper surface of the thick portion (depth display portion 122) of the decorative pattern 80, and the “lake” pattern is drawn on the lower surface. These “moon” and “lake” patterns can be visually recognized.

  Next, an example of the effect of the super reach branch effect (branch effect notice) will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (H) are explanatory views showing the branch effect notice of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 in the first-type branch effect notice pattern described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the branch effect notice pattern No. 5 in the first kind branch effect notice pattern, as described above, the variable display pattern and the stop pattern The information of the branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 together with such information.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the branch effect notice pattern No. 5 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data describing a display control process is selected, and control of character image display is started based on the contents described in the process data.

  After the decorative pattern 80 (left, middle and right decorative patterns 80a to 80c) is drawn into the spiral display mode drawn in the portrait 90, the spiral display mode is drawn based on the process data. The displayed portrait 90 is controlled over the entire display area 42 (FIG. 102C). After that, as a first branch effect notice, an impact sound of “passing” that tears the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115, and a character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed on the portrait 90 ( FIG. 102 (D)). Here, it is a mode with higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the face of the wolf man after transformation is overlapped with the face of the wolf man before transformation, and is displayed in an enlarged form on the entire portrait 90, The branch effect notice is an effect that has an impact on the player.

  Next, an erasing sound of “shwar” that pulls back the character image 71 simulating a wolf man to a spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115 and a portrait 90 on which a spiral display mode is drawn is displayed again. They are displayed in the area 42 (FIG. 102 (E)). After that, as the second branch effect notice, the impact sound of “passy” that tears the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115 as in the first branch effect notice, and the portrait 90 is imitated with a dracula. The displayed character image 72 is displayed (FIG. 102 (F)). Again, this is a mode with a higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the Dracula's face is displayed in an enlarged mode on the entire portrait 90, thereby making the branching effect notice an effect that has an impact on the player. .

  Next, an erasing sound “Shwer” that pulls back the character image 72 simulating Dracula to the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115 and the portrait 90 on which the spiral display mode is drawn is displayed again in the display area. 42 (FIG. 102G). After that, as the third branch effect notice, the sound wave device 115 outputs an impact sound of “passy” that tears the spiral display mode in the same way as the first and second branch effect notices, and to the portrait 90 A character image 73 simulating Franken is displayed (FIG. 102 (H)). Again, this is a mode with higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the Franken's face is displayed in an enlarged mode on the entire portrait 90, thereby making the branching effect notice an effect that has an impact on the player. . In this case, any of the variation numbers 17 to 22 should already be determined as the variation display pattern, and after executing the third branch effect notice, the franken displayed in the third branch effect notice is displayed. A Franken reach effect is displayed in which the same character image as the imitated character image 73 is displayed.

  In this embodiment, it is also possible to make an impact of three branch effects in a short time based on the spiral display mode in which the decorative symbols 80 (left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c) are sucked. By performing in a certain manner, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances interest. Further, at the timing when the character image is displayed on the portrait 90, a branching effect warning sound of an impact sound of “passi” and an erasing sound of “shwar” is output from the sound wave device 115. By clarifying the display start of the image and the display start of the spiral display mode (end of display of the character image), the player can more clearly grasp the change in the display mode. In addition, since the branch effect warning sound is output at a good tempo, it is possible to further enhance the expectation that a reach effect with a high expectation level for big hits is derived. As described above, in this embodiment, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man in the portrait 90, the character image 72 imitating Dracula, the character image 73 imitating Franken, and a monster-kun were imitated in three branch effects notice. A result mode for displaying either the character image 70 or the character image 74 imitating Kai-chan is displayed.

  When it is decided to execute the second branch effect notice pattern, the character image (monster) imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled on the portrait 90 in the third effect notice (FIG. 92 ( A)). For example, when it is decided to execute the second branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 1, the franken shown in FIG. 102 (H) in the branch effect notices shown in FIGS. In the scene where the character image 73 displayed is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90, the character image (monster) 70 simulating a human boy in FIG. 103A is controlled instead of the character image 73 simulating Franken.

  If it is decided to execute the third branch effect notice pattern, the character image (Kyoko-chan) imitating a human girl is displayed and controlled on the portrait 90 in the third branch effect notice (FIG. 103). (B)). For example, when it is decided to execute the third kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 1, the Franken of FIG. 91 (H) in the branch effect notice of FIGS. 102 (C) to (H) is simulated. In the scene where the character image 73 displayed is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90, the character image 73 (Kai-chan) imitating a human girl in FIG. 103B is controlled instead of the character image 73 imitating Franken. In this way, in the third branch effect notice, the character image 70 imitating Monster-kun or the character image 74 imitating Kai-chan is displayed on the portrait 90 as the specific result mode. Note that the case where it is decided to display the character image 74 imitating Phantom on the portrait 90 in the third branch effect notice is only the case of a probable big hit. That is, since it is possible to grasp that the character image 74 imitating Phantom-chan is displayed on the portrait 90 in the third branching advance notice, it is possible to improve the player's interest. .

  As shown in FIGS. 103 (A) and 103 (B), the portrait 90 displayed as the branch effect notice has a left / right decorative pattern 80a that forms a reach mode at the timing when each character image is displayed. , 80c are stopped (not shown in FIGS. 102D, 102F, and 102H). The left decorative symbol 80a is displayed at a lower stop in the upper left part of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative symbol variable display is performed (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed), and the right decorative symbol 80c. Is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area 42 in a smaller stop than when the normal decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  Further, in the branching effect presentation notice, any of the character images 70 to 74 is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90 in the display area 42 and the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 1543f, and 155 are driven in the third branch presentation notice. This is performed by causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear under control. Further, since the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are controlled by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 by outputting a drive signal to the first lighting control board 112, the second lighting control board 113 is controlled. In the process data selected by the CPU 113a mounted on the control data, control data relating to these drive controls is not set. In order to synchronize the action of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 by the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 and the display mode of the display area 42 to the process data selected corresponding to the branch effect notice pattern. In addition, the control for displaying and controlling one of the character images 70 to 74 at the timing when predetermined drive control is executed by the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 (for example, when it becomes (H) in FIG. 102). Data is set.

  For example, when it is decided to execute the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 and it is decided to execute the branch effect effect pattern of the branch effect effect notice pattern number 2 In the scene of controlling the display of the character image 73 imitating Franken in the portrait 90 of FIG. 102 (H) in the branch effect notice of FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (H), a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 150h. The character body 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 (see FIG. 91 (C ′) for the appearance of the character body 150). In this way, a game that pays attention to the branch effect notice executed in the display area 42 by executing the branch role effect notice that drives and controls the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 as a part of the branch effect notice. It is possible to give a strong impression to a person, and it is possible to give a strong impression of which of the super reach effects is executed after the branch effect notice (branch role effect notice). In addition, since the big hit expectation degree when the branching effect presentation notice pattern is executed is set high, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit game state is increased. Can do. In the present embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes a branch effect notice selection process (step S216) of the notice selection process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process as a sub information output process (step S110). ) Are transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and the effect display of the character images 70 to 74 is sequentially displayed on the portrait 90 in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113 a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. By performing control (execution of branch effect notice (selection appearance)), a selection appearance execution means that suggests a super reach effect that is executed after the branch effect notice is provided. In the branch effect notice, display control is performed so that the final character in the branch effect notice and the character displayed in the super reach effect after execution of the branch effect notice coincide with each other.

  Further, it is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, which is a 1-byte notice pattern random number (developed notice pattern random number, intense heat notice pattern random number, lightning notice pattern random number, mini character notice pattern random number, sound determination random number). Random number updating means for updating within a numerical value range of 256, which is within the execution area. The update random number storage means is mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 that acquires the notice pattern random number and stores the notice pattern random number when the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 receives the variable display pattern command. The RAM 111c. Then, the intense heat announcement pattern random number is updated in the numerical range of 0 to 201 within the execution area of 1 byte, and the intense heat announcement pattern random number stored in the RAM 111c is the intense heat announcement pattern number 1 to 6. It is determined whether or not it is determined to be the intense heat announcement pattern number 1 to 6 in step S142 of the intense heat announcement selection process depending on whether or not it matches the determination value assigned to. Further, the extinction effect determination table is a daylight background lightning notice table and a night background lightning notice table provided in accordance with the change display pattern and the background images (the day background image 81 and the night background image 82). . Further, in this embodiment, there is provided a low-disappearance effect executing means for displaying the dark image 83 in the display area 42 as the first blackout effect based on the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 1-6. Further, a high-obscuration effect executing means for displaying a dark image 83 in the display area 42 as a second blackout effect based on the lightning warning pattern numbers 2 to 6 is provided. Further, after the lightning 87 is displayed based on the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5, the left decorative pattern 80a or the right decorative pattern 80c is displayed in the dark image 83 by being illuminated by the brightness of the lightning 87. 42 is provided with a hide-time image display control means.

  Further, in this embodiment, a combined effect is executed by combining the basic effect (reach effect) with different combinations of the above-mentioned accessory act effect mode and the accessory non-actual effect mode. In other words, the character object 150, 152, 154 for the actor's reach, the advance notice, and the pattern for driving and controlling the shielding members 164, 166, 168, the character bodies 150, 152, 154 for the branch effect, and the shielding members 164, 166, A determination value is assigned to each determination table of patterns for driving and controlling 168 (FIGS. 32, 44, 45, 63, 70, 71, and 72). An object operation effect mode and an accessory non-operation effect mode are executed. As described above, since the determination values are assigned in the respective determination tables, even if the frequency of driving and controlling the character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, 168 increases, The expectation degree set for jackpot can be maintained, and the effect member can be driven without drastically reducing the expectation degree for jackpot. Note that the above-mentioned accessory act effect mode may be executed as a reach effect that is executed after becoming the reach mode, or may be executed as a notice effect that is executed before the reach mode is set. Good.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
38 Operation buttons 40 Production device 42 Display areas 44a and 44b Production lamps 70 to 75 Character image 76 White character images 80a to 80c Left / middle / right decorative symbols 83 Dark image 90 to 93 Mini character image 100 Main board 101 Main control board 110 Peripheral board 111 Sub-integrated board 113 Second electrical decoration control board 114 Waveform control board 115 Sonic device 116 Liquid crystal display 150, 152, 154 Character body 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 Stepping motor

Claims (2)

Image display means for displaying a predetermined image as the game progresses;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied;
In a gaming machine comprising: a profit granting state control unit that controls a profit granting state that grants a profit to the player based on a determination result by the winning determination unit;
Components constituting part of the gaming machine;
An effect device that is attached to the component member and forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the component member as viewed from the player,
A main control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
And peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the image display means,
The stage device is
The image display means for displaying the predetermined image from the production area toward the front side of the gaming machine;
An appearance position that faces the player by appearing in front of the image display means so as to perform a stunning operation, and a standby position that becomes invisible to the player by retreating from the appearance position; A plurality of types of production members that can reciprocate between the plurality of types of character forms,
A plurality of drive mechanisms that configure a plurality of operation mechanisms together with each of the plurality of types of effect members, and reciprocate the plurality of types of effect members;
The plurality of types of effect members and the plurality of drive sources are accommodated for each of the operation mechanisms, and a plurality of standby accommodating portions that hold the plurality of types of effect members in the standby position in the accommodated state,
The main control means includes
The winning determination means, the profit grant state control means,
Basic display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of basic display patterns for recognizing the determination result of the winning determination means;
Basic display pattern selection means for selecting the basic display pattern from the basic display pattern storage means based on the determination result by the winning determination means;
Command signal transmission means for transmitting the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means to the peripheral control means as a command signal,
The peripheral control means includes
Image storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect images imitating at least the plurality of types of character aspects as the predetermined image;
Display control means for notifying whether or not to control the display of the image display means based on the command signal transmitted by the command signal transmission means to control the profit grant state;
A basic effect mode as a display control execution content by the display control means until the image display means notifies whether or not to control the profit granting state according to the basic display pattern transmitted as the command signal A basic effect mode determining means for determining
Based on the basic effect mode determined by the basic effect mode determining means, an image effect mode for controlling display of a predetermined effect image among the plurality of types of effect images imitating the plurality of types of character modes, and the plurality An effect that determines any additional effect mode from a plurality of types of additional effect modes that have different degrees of combination with an accessory effect mode that drives a predetermined effect member among the plurality of types of effect members that forged different types of character modes An aspect determining means;
A combined effect execution means for executing a combined effect in which the additional effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is combined with the basic effect mode;
Among the plurality of types of additional effect modes, the additional effect mode including the accessory effect mode is replaced with the predetermined effect image displayed and controlled in the additional effect mode not including the accessory effect mode. It is combined so as to drive the effect member that has created the same type of character form as the effect image at the same timing as the display control timing,
In the same type of character mode among the plurality of types of character modes, the effect mode determination means increases the expectation that the drive control of the effect member is in the profit-giving state rather than the display control of the effect image. A game machine characterized in that the additional effect mode is determined using an additional effect mode determination table assigned to each other. Image display means for displaying a predetermined image as the game progresses;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied;
In a gaming machine comprising: a profit granting state control unit that controls a profit granting state that grants a profit to the player based on a determination result by the winning determination unit;
It is possible to reciprocate between a standby position that is not visible to the player and an appearance position that faces the player by appearing from the standby position in front of the image display means. A plurality of types of effect members imitating a plurality of types of character aspects having a vertical relationship of
A plurality of drive mechanisms that configure a plurality of operation mechanisms together with each of the plurality of types of effect members, and reciprocate the plurality of types of effect members;
Basic display pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of basic display patterns for recognizing the determination result of the winning determination means;
Basic display pattern selection means for selecting the basic display pattern from the basic display pattern storage means based on the determination result by the winning determination means;
Display control means for controlling the display of the image display means based on the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means and notifying the determination result of the winning determination means;
Image storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect images imitating a plurality of types of character aspects having at least the predetermined vertical relationship as the predetermined image;
Based on the basic display pattern selected by the basic display pattern selection means, the accessory effect mode that drives a predetermined effect member among the multiple types of effect members that forged the multiple types of character modes, and the plurality Combined degree of image effect mode in which a predetermined effect image among the plurality of types of effect images imitating the type of character mode is displayed from the same direction as the effect member that forged the same type of character image as the effect image Effect mode determining means for determining any additional effect mode from a plurality of types of additional effect modes,
A combined effect execution means for executing a combined effect in which the additional effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is combined with the basic effect mode;
Among the plurality of types of additional effect modes, the additional effect mode including the accessory effect mode is the same as the effect image instead of the predetermined effect image that is displayed and controlled in the additional effect mode not including the accessory effect mode. It is compounded so as to drive the effect member that forged various kinds of character aspects,
In the same type of character mode among the plurality of types of character modes, the effect mode determination means increases the expectation that the drive control of the effect member is in the profit-giving state rather than the display control of the effect image. A game machine characterized in that the additional effect mode is determined using an additional effect mode determination table assigned to each other.